TeleForm10.5 Adminstration Rev0.pdf

TeleForm
™

TeleForm
Administration Guide

Version 10.5
Document Revision 0
04 November 2011

Copyright Notice

Notice
This documentation is a proprietary product of Autonomy and is protected by copyright laws and international treaty. Information in this
documentation is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Autonomy. While reasonable efforts have
been made to ensure the accuracy of the information contained herein, Autonomy assumes no liability for errors or omissions. No liability is
assumed for direct, incidental, or consequential damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this documentation.
The copyrighted software that accompanies this documentation is licensed to the End User for use only in strict accordance with the End User
License Agreement, which the Licensee should read carefully before commencing use of the software. No part of this publication may be
reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, nor translated into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means,
electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the copyright owner.
This documentation may use fictitious names for purposes of demonstration; references to actual persons, companies, or organizations are
strictly coincidental.

Trademarks and Copyrights
Copyright 2010 Autonomy Corporation plc and all its affiliates. All rights reserved. ACI API, Alfresco Connector, Arcpliance, Autonomy Process
Automation, Autonomy Fetch for Siebel eBusiness Applications, Autonomy, Business Objects Connector, Cognos Connector, Confluence
Connector, ControlPoint, DAH, Digital Safe Connector, DIH, DiSH, DLH, Documentum Connector, DOH, EAS Connector, Ektron Connector,
Enterprise AWE, eRoom Connector, Exchange Connector, FatWire Connector, File System Connector for Netware, File System Connector,
FileNet Connector, FileNet P8 Connector, FTP Fetch, HTTP Connector, Hummingbird DM Connector, IAS, IBM Content Manager Connector,
IBM Seedlist Connector, IBM Workplace Fetch, IDOL Server, IDOL, IDOLme, iManage Fetch, IMAP Connector, Import Module, iPlanet
Connector, KeyView, KVS Connector, Legato Connector, LiquidOffice, LiquidPDF, LiveLink Web Content Management Connector, MCMS
Connector, MediClaim, Meridio Connector, Meridio, Moreover Fetch, NNTP Connector, Notes Connector, Objective Connector, OCS Connector,
ODBC Connector, Omni Fetch SDK, Open Text Connector, Oracle Connector, PCDocs Fetch, PLC Connector, POP3 Fetch, Portal-in-a-Box,
RecoFlex, Retina, SAP Fetch, Schlumberger Fetch, SharePoint 2003 Connector, SharePoint 2007 Connector, SharePoint 2010 Connector,
SharePoint Fetch, SpeechPlugin, Stellent Fetch, TeleForm, Tri-CR, Ultraseek, Verity Profiler, Verity, VersiForm, WebDAV Connector, WorkSite
Connector, and all related titles and logos are trademarks of Autonomy Corporation plc and its affiliates, which may be registered in certain
jurisdictions.
Microsoft is a registered trademark, and MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, Windows NT, SharePoint, and other Microsoft products referenced
herein are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
AvantGo is a trademark of AvantGo, Inc.
Epicentric Foundation Server is a trademark of Epicentric, Inc.
Documentum and eRoom are trademarks of Documentum, a division of EMC Corp.
FileNet is a trademark of FileNet Corporation.
Lotus Notes is a trademark of Lotus Development Corporation.
mySAP Enterprise Portal is a trademark of SAP AG.
Oracle is a trademark of Oracle Corporation.
Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Novell is a trademark of Novell, Inc.
Stellent is a trademark of Stellent, Inc.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Notice to Government End Users
If this product is acquired under the terms of a DoD contract: Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set
forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of 252.227-7013. Civilian agency contract: Use, reproduction or disclosure is subject to 52.227-19 (a) through
(d) and restrictions set forth in the accompanying end user agreement. Unpublished-rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Autonomy, Inc., One Market Plaza, Spear Tower, Suite 1900, San Francisco, CA. 94105, US.

04 November 2011

Contents

Procedures ....................................................................................................................................19
Preface ............................................................................................................................................23
Documentation Updates...............................................................................................................23
Conventions .................................................................................................................................23
Notational Conventions .........................................................................................................24
Command-line Syntax Conventions ......................................................................................25
Notices ..................................................................................................................................26
Related Documentation................................................................................................................26
Autonomy Product References ....................................................................................................26
Autonomy Customer Support .......................................................................................................27
Contact Autonomy........................................................................................................................27

Part 1 Getting Started
Chapter 1 
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 31
TeleForm Product Suite ...............................................................................................................31
Autonomy’s IDOL Platform...........................................................................................................32
TeleForm Architecture..................................................................................................................32
TeleForm Components.................................................................................................................33
TeleForm Designer ...............................................................................................................33
TeleForm IDR Designer ........................................................................................................34
TeleForm AutoMerge Publisher ............................................................................................34
TeleForm Scan Station .........................................................................................................34
TeleForm Reader ..................................................................................................................34
TeleForm Verifier ..................................................................................................................34
TeleForm Control Center ......................................................................................................34

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 3
•
•
•

Contents

TeleForm Utilities ................................................................................................................. 35
TeleForm Tiers ............................................................................................................................ 36
TeleForm Desktop ................................................................................................................ 36
TeleForm Workgroup ........................................................................................................... 37
TeleForm Enterprise ............................................................................................................ 37

Chapter 2 
Prepare for Installation ........................................................................................................... 39
Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 40
System Requirements ................................................................................................................. 40
OS and Hardware Wizards ................................................................................................... 41
VMWare Support .................................................................................................................. 41
Server Hardware .................................................................................................................. 42
Domain Controllers ........................................................................................................ 42
Web Server for Web Capture Option ............................................................................. 42
Workstation Hardware .......................................................................................................... 43
Workstation Limits ......................................................................................................... 43
Run Reader and AutoMerge Publisher as Services ....................................................... 44
Remote Capture Station Workstations ........................................................................... 44
Web Capture Option Workstations ................................................................................. 45
Network Requirements ......................................................................................................... 45
Network Protocols .......................................................................................................... 46
LDAP ............................................................................................................................. 46
MS SQL Database....................................................................................................................... 46
Non-TeleForm Software Installation ............................................................................................ 46
Installation Permissions and Operating Rights ............................................................................ 47
Mapped Drives and UNC Paths................................................................................................... 47
Software Compatibility ................................................................................................................. 48
Microsoft Office 2007 ........................................................................................................... 48

Chapter 3 
Install TeleForm ......................................................................................................................... 49
Preliminary Steps ........................................................................................................................ 49
Other Installation Instructions ...................................................................................................... 50
Remote Capture and Web Capture Options .................................................................. 50
Connect Agents ............................................................................................................. 50
Intelligent Classification Server ...................................................................................... 50
Create Windows Users for TeleForm........................................................................................... 50
Create Windows Administrator ............................................................................................. 51

•
•
4 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Contents

Create TeleForm Users ........................................................................................................51
Create a TeleForm User Group ............................................................................................51
Share TeleForm’s Parent Directory ..............................................................................................51
Install TeleForm to the Server ......................................................................................................53
Specify the Location of the TeleForm Server ........................................................................53
Mapped Drives ...............................................................................................................53
UNC Paths .....................................................................................................................54
Update Files During Install ....................................................................................................54
Run the Setup Program ........................................................................................................54
Fax Server and Scanners.............................................................................................................56
Fax Server ............................................................................................................................57
Scanner ................................................................................................................................57
Install Workstations ......................................................................................................................57
Activation .....................................................................................................................................59
Identification Information ..............................................................................................................59
License Code .................................................................................................................60
Machine ID .....................................................................................................................60
Activation Code ..............................................................................................................60
Activation Process ................................................................................................................60
Restore Activation .................................................................................................................60

Chapter 4 
Upgrade and Migrate ................................................................................................................ 61
Upgrade Versus Migrate ..............................................................................................................61
Upgrade TeleForm .......................................................................................................................62
Check Your Current Version .................................................................................................62
Check Your System Requirements .......................................................................................63
Stop TeleForm Processing ...................................................................................................63
Back Up Data ........................................................................................................................63
Install TeleForm 10.5 to Your Existing TeleForm Server .......................................................64
Install TeleForm Workstations ..............................................................................................64
Migrate TeleForm.........................................................................................................................65
Install TeleForm Server .........................................................................................................65
Install One TeleForm Workstation .........................................................................................65
Restore Settings From Older TeleForm System ...................................................................66
Install Remaining TeleForm Workstations .............................................................................67

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 5
•
•
•

Contents

Chapter 5 
Connect Modules to Multiple TeleForm Systems......................................................... 69
Configured Per Module................................................................................................................ 70
TeleForm System dialog box ....................................................................................................... 70
Add a TeleForm System ....................................................................................................... 71
Batch Routing .............................................................................................................................. 72

Chapter 6 
Manage Licenses ...................................................................................................................... 75
Introduction to License Codes ..................................................................................................... 75
Licensed Modules ................................................................................................................ 76
Unlicensed Modules ............................................................................................................. 76
Licensed Options ................................................................................................................. 76
Using License Manager ............................................................................................................... 76
View License Information ..................................................................................................... 76
View License Specifics ......................................................................................................... 77
Delete a License .................................................................................................................. 77
Add a New License Code ..................................................................................................... 78

Chapter 7 
TeleForm Remote Verification ............................................................................................. 79
Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 79
System Requirements ................................................................................................................. 80
Installation Process ..................................................................................................................... 80
Install Software Prerequisites ............................................................................................... 81
Log Off Users ....................................................................................................................... 81
Install TeleForm to XenApp Server ...................................................................................... 81
Upgrade TeleForm on Citrix XenApp........................................................................................... 82
Administration ............................................................................................................................. 83
Citrix Delivery Services Console .......................................................................................... 83
Confirm the Session Station Name ...................................................................................... 83
Use TeleForm Control Center to Delete Stations ................................................................. 84
TeleForm License Errors ...................................................................................................... 84

Chapter 8 
Security ......................................................................................................................................... 85
Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 85
Enterprise Security Options .................................................................................................. 86
Purpose of Security ..................................................................................................................... 86

•
•
6 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Contents

Security Rights .............................................................................................................................87
Available Security Rights ......................................................................................................87
Form & Image Access ....................................................................................................88
Verify (Basic) ..................................................................................................................88
Verify (Advanced) ...........................................................................................................88
Verify (QC) .....................................................................................................................89
Evaluate .........................................................................................................................89
Design ............................................................................................................................89
Scan ...............................................................................................................................90
Utilities ............................................................................................................................90
Administration .................................................................................................................90
Group Rights and Individual Rights .......................................................................................91
Rights Structure ..............................................................................................................91
Individual Rights .............................................................................................................91
Group Rights ..................................................................................................................92
Enable Security ............................................................................................................................92
Security Providers .................................................................................................................93
Internal ...........................................................................................................................94
LDAP ..............................................................................................................................94
Windows .........................................................................................................................95
Single Sign-on ......................................................................................................................95
Create a New User.......................................................................................................................96
Internal Security ....................................................................................................................96
External Security ...................................................................................................................98
Configure Users ...........................................................................................................................99
Manually Configure a User ...................................................................................................99
Copy User Settings .............................................................................................................101
Settings Available for Copying ......................................................................................102
Change User Info ................................................................................................................103
Change Password ..............................................................................................................104
Delete Users .......................................................................................................................105
Security Groups .........................................................................................................................106
Batch Security, Not Source Security ...................................................................................106
Pre-Defined Security Groups ..............................................................................................107
Create a Security Group .....................................................................................................108
Add Users to a Security Group .....................................................................................110
Log In ......................................................................................................................................... 111
Log on to a Current Session ............................................................................................... 111
Change Logon Passwords ..................................................................................................112

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 7
•
•
•

Contents

Log Off ............................................................................................................................... 112
Switch Security Providers .......................................................................................................... 113
External to Internal ............................................................................................................. 113
Internal to External ............................................................................................................. 113
External to External ............................................................................................................ 114

Part 2 TeleForm Customization
Chapter 9 
Change the System Configuration ................................................................................... 117
Open the Configuration controls ................................................................................................ 118
Global System Tab .................................................................................................................... 118
Global System > General Tab ............................................................................................ 119
Default Language ........................................................................................................ 119
Minimal tracking ........................................................................................................... 120
Stall time ...................................................................................................................... 120
Lock timeout ................................................................................................................ 120
WYSIWYG Text Options .............................................................................................. 120
Collect Verifier Statistics .............................................................................................. 121
Global System > Security Tab ............................................................................................ 121
Enable user security .................................................................................................... 122
Provider ....................................................................................................................... 122
Single sign-on .............................................................................................................. 122
Remember last login .................................................................................................... 122
Global System > Image Storage Tab ................................................................................. 122
Internal storage format ................................................................................................. 122
JPEG Compression Quality ......................................................................................... 123
Backup directory .......................................................................................................... 123
NonForm image directory ............................................................................................ 123
Image zone format ....................................................................................................... 123
Save without processing .............................................................................................. 124
Treat PDF as color ....................................................................................................... 124
Resolution .................................................................................................................... 124
Global System > Export Tab .............................................................................................. 124
Export/Commit retries .................................................................................................. 124
Maximum field name length ......................................................................................... 125
Minimum VARCHAR length ......................................................................................... 125
Choice field separator .................................................................................................. 125

•
•
8 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Contents

Don't allow a batch to be committed until it is in the 'Ready to be committed' state ......125
When mapping fields, only allow compatible types .......................................................125
Global System > Read Only Tab ........................................................................................125
Global System > Resource Checker Tab ............................................................................126
Option ...........................................................................................................................127
Check every _ seconds ................................................................................................128
Disk level ......................................................................................................................128
Memory level ................................................................................................................128
Retry .............................................................................................................................128
Local System tab........................................................................................................................129
Designer Tab .............................................................................................................................130
Designer > Local Tab ..........................................................................................................130
Create a “New” form at startup .....................................................................................130
Sticky cursors ...............................................................................................................130
Show full grid ................................................................................................................131
Show Form ID and state in title .....................................................................................131
Existing form background color ....................................................................................131
Spell check language ...................................................................................................131
Spell Checking Options ................................................................................................131
Master selection color ...................................................................................................131
Group selection color ....................................................................................................132
Selection handle size ....................................................................................................132
Designer > Advanced Tab ..................................................................................................132
Form ID Assignment .....................................................................................................133
Designer > Defaults Tab .....................................................................................................133
Reader Tab ................................................................................................................................134
Reader > Local Tab ............................................................................................................135
Tasks ...........................................................................................................................135
Load Engines at Startup. ...........................................................................................136
Do evaluations in background thread .......................................................................136
Display All Evaluation Zones .....................................................................................136
Reader > Identification Tab .................................................................................................137
Existing/VersiForm confidence .....................................................................................137
Limit ..............................................................................................................................138
Check for Flipped Forms ..............................................................................................139
Enable NCS style forms ...............................................................................................139
Use Drop-In identification .............................................................................................139
Evaluate all forms as ....................................................................................................140
Evaluate NonForms as .................................................................................................140

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 9
•
•
•

Contents

Reader > Recognition tab .................................................................................................. 140
Character Recognition ................................................................................................. 141
Skip blank constrained print fields and image zones .................................................... 142
Disable single line extraction ....................................................................................... 142
OMR Recognition ........................................................................................................ 142
Low confidence character ............................................................................................ 143
Location lattice use ...................................................................................................... 143
Mark all forms for review .............................................................................................. 143
Reader > OCR Performance tab ........................................................................................ 144
Reader > Image Handling tab ............................................................................................ 144
Page link rule ............................................................................................................... 145
Only link pages that are in same image or scan .......................................................... 146
Only link forms with page link and/or user ID fields ...................................................... 146
Print forms with missing pages .................................................................................... 146
NonForm image handling ............................................................................................. 146
Save unattached .......................................................................................................... 147
Print if not attached ...................................................................................................... 147
Reader > General Tab ....................................................................................................... 148
Collect Reader statistics .............................................................................................. 148
Collect Reader field statistics ....................................................................................... 148
Form ............................................................................................................................ 148
Collect NonForm identification information ................................................................... 149
Leave NonForm faxes in the fax queue (if supported) ................................................. 149
Distribute all evaluations (file/evaluate) ........................................................................ 149
Evaluation override format ........................................................................................... 149
Merge/Print Tab......................................................................................................................... 150
Enable print and send .................................................................................................. 150
Enable merges ............................................................................................................. 150
High speed merge ....................................................................................................... 150
Priority based queuing ................................................................................................. 151
Batch merging .............................................................................................................. 151
Multiuser Features Tab.............................................................................................................. 151
Multiuser Features > General Tab ...................................................................................... 152
Single Reader per batch .............................................................................................. 153
Cache the auto-assign queue ...................................................................................... 153
Auto-assign queue refresh ........................................................................................... 153
Maximum users per batch ............................................................................................ 153
Enable script caching ................................................................................................... 153
Compress .RES file ..................................................................................................... 153

•
•
10 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Contents

Do ALL non-batch exports from Reader .......................................................................153
Multiuser Features > Revision Control Tab .........................................................................154
Multiuser Features > Server Cluster Support ......................................................................154
SQL Cluster Support ....................................................................................................155
File Server Cluster Support ..........................................................................................155
Diagnostic Logging .......................................................................................................156
Multiuser Features > Compliance Support ..........................................................................156
Security Settings ..........................................................................................................156
Audit Log Settings ........................................................................................................157
Report Settings .............................................................................................................157
Synching Live and Offline Databases ...........................................................................157
Multiuser Features > Encryption .........................................................................................158
Image zone output ........................................................................................................159
Multiuser Features > Remote Settings Tab .........................................................................159
Multiuser Features > Web Settings Tab ..............................................................................160
Configuration Options tab...........................................................................................................162
Batch Auto Assign Skip Flags ......................................................................................162
Clear And Key Virtuals .................................................................................................163
Disable Background Form Loads .................................................................................163
Enable BasicScript Editor .............................................................................................163
Enable scripts ...............................................................................................................163
Explicit ID Performance ................................................................................................163
Form Selection Config Override ...................................................................................164
Generate Wallpaper Resolution ....................................................................................164
Hide Default Job ...........................................................................................................164
Right Justify Numerics ..................................................................................................164
Capture Entry Font Name .............................................................................................164
Stacked Config Pages ..................................................................................................164
Verifier Preloads ...........................................................................................................164

Chapter 10 
Remote Capture Option ........................................................................................................ 167
Important Remote Capture Station Concepts.............................................................................167
Remote batch directory .......................................................................................................168
Synchronization directory ....................................................................................................168
DSS Files ............................................................................................................................168
Remote Capture Stations and TeleForm ....................................................................................168
Configuration Steps....................................................................................................................169
Add a Remote Capture Station License ..............................................................................170

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 11
•
•
•

Contents

Define Your Connection Protocol ....................................................................................... 170
Create Directories .............................................................................................................. 171
Synchronization Directory Setup ........................................................................................ 172
Determine Which Readers Process Remote Capture Station Batches ............................... 173
Configure the Remote Batch Setup Connect Agent ........................................................... 174
Inform RCS Operators of Configuration Settings ................................................................ 177
Job Settings and Remote Capture Stations ............................................................................... 177

Chapter 11 
Web Capture Option .............................................................................................................. 179
Web Capture Stations and TeleForm ........................................................................................ 179
Web Capture Concepts ............................................................................................................. 180
Concurrent Users ......................................................................................................... 181
DSS Files ..................................................................................................................... 181
Data Transfer Methods ................................................................................................ 181
Web capture directory .................................................................................................. 183
Synchronization directory ............................................................................................. 183
Firewall ........................................................................................................................ 184
Install the Web Capture Server.................................................................................................. 185
Older Files .......................................................................................................................... 186
Net 2.0 / FIPS Requirement ............................................................................................... 186
Install the Web Capture Server .......................................................................................... 187
Create Directories ........................................................................................................ 188
Configure The Web Capture Server ............................................................................. 189
Choose Reader Stations .............................................................................................. 190
Configure the Web Capture Connect Agent ................................................................. 191
Configure Synchronization Directory ............................................................................ 192
Install the Web Capture Client ................................................................................................... 194
Manage the Web Capture Option .............................................................................................. 194
Synchronize Job Settings ................................................................................................... 194
Limit Web Capture Job Settings ......................................................................................... 195
Web Settings Tab ........................................................................................................ 196
Job Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 196
Web Capture Server Administration ................................................................................... 197
Configuration Settings Page ........................................................................................ 198
License Info Page ........................................................................................................ 199
Session Info Page ........................................................................................................ 200

•
•
12 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Contents

Chapter 12 
Customize Verifier for Your Operators............................................................................ 203
Access Configuration Controls ...................................................................................................204
Correction Options .....................................................................................................................206
Field Character Threshold Options .....................................................................................206
Keyboard Options ......................................................................................................................207
Form Mode Options ..................................................................................................................209
Correction Options Tab .......................................................................................................210
Appearance Tab .................................................................................................................211
Image Positioning Tab ........................................................................................................212
Image Positioning .........................................................................................................212
Default Image Scaling ..................................................................................................212
Field Mode Options ....................................................................................................................213
General Options Tab ..........................................................................................................213
Appearance Tab .................................................................................................................214
Character Mode Options ............................................................................................................215
General Options Tab ..........................................................................................................215
Appearance Tab .................................................................................................................217
Manage Confusable Characters in Character Mode .....................................................217
Add Extended Characters ............................................................................................219
Restore Default Character Exclusion Settings ..............................................................220

Part 3 TeleForm Maintenance
Chapter 13 
Run and Manage TeleForm .................................................................................................. 223
License Monitoring .....................................................................................................................223
TeleForm License Service ..................................................................................................223
Run Modules ..............................................................................................................................224
Run Reader and AutoMerge Publisher as Services ...................................................................224
System Requirements .........................................................................................................225
User Interface .....................................................................................................................225
Global Configuration of Services .........................................................................................225
Configure Services .............................................................................................................225
Control Center............................................................................................................................227
Control Center Branches ....................................................................................................228
Outline of the Control Center Tree ................................................................................228
Customize Your Control Center window .......................................................................229

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 13
•
•
•

Contents

Graph Colors ............................................................................................................... 230
Workflow Analysis .............................................................................................................. 231
Recommended Statistic Settings ................................................................................. 232
Statistics Parameters ................................................................................................... 232
Reader Statistic Collection ........................................................................................... 234
Verifier Statistic Collection ........................................................................................... 235
Alerts .................................................................................................................................. 236
Alerts in Control Center ................................................................................................ 236
Email Alerts ................................................................................................................. 237
E-Mail Alert Setup ........................................................................................................ 239
Configure TeleForm with Control Center ............................................................................ 240
Global Settings ............................................................................................................ 241
Station Settings ............................................................................................................ 242
User Settings ............................................................................................................... 243
Batch Control ..................................................................................................................... 244
Log on to Control Center .................................................................................................... 244
Use Control Center to Resolve Inefficiency ........................................................................ 245
TeleForm Monitor ...................................................................................................................... 246
TeleForm Monitor Overview ............................................................................................... 246
Start TeleForm Monitor ...................................................................................................... 246
Monitor Active Tasks .......................................................................................................... 247
Monitor Queued Images ..................................................................................................... 248
Bad Images ................................................................................................................. 248
Bad Evaluations ........................................................................................................... 249

Chapter 14 
Maintain System Performance ........................................................................................... 251
General Maintenance Tips......................................................................................................... 251
Run Windows Utilities ................................................................................................................ 252
Use the Purge Log..................................................................................................................... 252
Manual Purge With the Purge Log ..................................................................................... 253
Scheduled Purges .............................................................................................................. 253
Purge Events ..................................................................................................................... 254
Completed Tracking Records ...................................................................................... 254
Stored Images ............................................................................................................. 255
Other Events ................................................................................................................ 255
Use Database Utilities ............................................................................................................... 255
Archive Images.......................................................................................................................... 256
Delete Old Image Zone Files ..................................................................................................... 257

•
•
14 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Contents

Chapter 15 
Revision Control ...................................................................................................................... 259
Prerequisites ..............................................................................................................................260
Set Up Revision Control With SourceSafe .................................................................................260
Configure SourceSafe .........................................................................................................261
Enable TeleForm Security ..................................................................................................261
Configure TeleForm ............................................................................................................262
Revision Control Tasks ..............................................................................................................264
Precautionary Notes ...........................................................................................................266
Use Revision Control in TeleForm..............................................................................................266
Revision Control in Designer ..............................................................................................266
Revision Control in the Shape Library .................................................................................268
Revision Control Tasks .......................................................................................................268
Add Items to Revision Control ............................................................................................269
Add form folders to revision control ..............................................................................269
Previously Removed Files ............................................................................................270
Check out ...........................................................................................................................270
Undo check out ............................................................................................................271
Check in ..............................................................................................................................271
Difference ...........................................................................................................................272
History ................................................................................................................................272
Validate Files ......................................................................................................................273
Validate Command .......................................................................................................273
Remove from Revision Control ...........................................................................................275
Remove forms and library files from revision control ....................................................275
Remove Folders from Revision Control ........................................................................275

Chapter 16 
Analyze Form Design ............................................................................................................ 277
Overview ...................................................................................................................................278
Form Statistics ....................................................................................................................279
General Procedure for Analyzing Form Design ...................................................................279
Analyze Your Forms on an Application Level .............................................................................280
Readers ........................................................................................................................280
Verifiers ........................................................................................................................280
Viewing Evaluation Statistics for Your Forms ...............................................................281
Reader Chart ................................................................................................................282
Verifier Charts ..............................................................................................................283
View Verification Statistics for Your Form .....................................................................286

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 15
•
•
•

Contents

Analyze Your Form on a Current Workload Level...................................................................... 287
View Current Workload Statistics for Your Form ................................................................ 287
Generate Form Reports ..................................................................................................... 289
Form Correction Summary Report ..................................................................................... 290
Form Detail Report ............................................................................................................. 292

Chapter 17 
Analyze Your System Throughput ................................................................................... 295
Overview of Throughput Analysis .............................................................................................. 296
General Procedure for Analyzing Throughput............................................................................ 296
Analyze Throughput on a Global Level ...................................................................................... 297
View Your Global Statistics ................................................................................................ 298
View Your License Statistics .............................................................................................. 300
Analyze Throughput on an Application Level............................................................................. 301
View Your Reader Station Statistics ................................................................................... 301
View Verifier Statistics ........................................................................................................ 303
Analyze Throughput on a Batch Level ....................................................................................... 308
Available Workload Statistics ............................................................................................. 309
View Batch Statistics .......................................................................................................... 310
View Batch Chart ............................................................................................................... 311
Generate System Throughput Reports ...................................................................................... 313
Available Reports ...................................................................................................................... 314
Crystal Reports Controls .................................................................................................... 315
System Performance Report ..................................................................................................... 316
User Performance Report.......................................................................................................... 318
Verifier Productivity Charts ........................................................................................................ 321
Batch Summary Report ............................................................................................................. 323
Form Evaluation Summary Report............................................................................................. 324
Form Correction Summary Report............................................................................................. 326
Form Detail Report .................................................................................................................... 328
Reader Usage Chart.................................................................................................................. 329

Part 4 TeleForm Enterprise
Chapter 18 
Redundancy and High Availability Settings ................................................................. 333
Hardware Components.............................................................................................................. 334
Cluster Server Monitoring .......................................................................................................... 336

•
•
16 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Contents

Failover Process .................................................................................................................336
Failure Notification for Cluster Servers .........................................................................337
Cluster Server for MS SQL .................................................................................................338
Cluster Server for File Servers ............................................................................................338
Enable Server Cluster Support ...........................................................................................339
Redundant License Service .......................................................................................................341
Warning Messages and Alerts ............................................................................................341
Restart the License Service ................................................................................................341
Transfer the License Service to a Different Machine ...........................................................341

Chapter 19 
Regulatory Compliance ......................................................................................................... 343
Double Key Data Entry...............................................................................................................344
Enable Double Key Validation ............................................................................................344
Set up Double Key Validation for a Field .............................................................................345
Process Batches With Double Key Validation .....................................................................346
Compliance Security ..................................................................................................................347
Set Up Form Folder Security ..............................................................................................348
Set Up Windows Security ...................................................................................................349
Enable Account Impersonation ...........................................................................................350
Compliance Reporting and Audit Logging ..................................................................................352
Digital Signature .................................................................................................................352
Audit Logging Level ............................................................................................................353
Data Warehouse/Off-line Database ....................................................................................354

Appendixes
Glossary .......................................................................................................................................359
Index ..............................................................................................................................................371

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 17
•
•
•

Contents

•
•
18 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Procedures

To use the online requirements wizard.......................................................................................... 41
To create a Windows Administrator for TeleForm ......................................................................... 51
To create a TeleForm user group .................................................................................................. 51
To install TeleForm on workstations .............................................................................................. 57
To migrate to TeleForm 10.5 from an older TeleForm system....................................................... 65
To add a TeleForm system ............................................................................................................ 71
To view your license information ................................................................................................... 77
To view the details of a license...................................................................................................... 77
To delete a TeleForm license ........................................................................................................ 78
To find the online wizard................................................................................................................ 80
To install TeleForm to the XenApp server ..................................................................................... 81
To upgrade TeleForm on Citrix XenApp ........................................................................................ 82
To determine your current session name ...................................................................................... 83
To enable security ......................................................................................................................... 92
To create a new user with internal security ................................................................................... 96
To create a new user with external security .................................................................................. 98
To manually configure a user ........................................................................................................ 99
To copy user settings .................................................................................................................. 101
To change user information......................................................................................................... 103
To change the password of a user .............................................................................................. 104
To delete a user........................................................................................................................... 105
To set up security in the example manufacturing business......................................................... 107
To create a new group................................................................................................................. 108
To add users to a security group ..................................................................................................110
To log on to a current session ......................................................................................................112
To log off TeleForm.......................................................................................................................112
To switch from Windows to LDAP or from LDAP to Windows......................................................114
To open the Global & Local TeleForm Settings dialog box.......................................................118
To create a directory for the TeleForm Remote Capture Station ................................................. 171
To configure directory synchronization........................................................................................ 172

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
•
• 19
•
•

Procedures

To configure the Remote Batch Setup Connect Agent ................................................................174
To use ASP.Net and .NET 2.0 with Web Capture Server ............................................................186
To install Web Capture Server .....................................................................................................187
To create the required installation directories ..............................................................................188
To configure the Web Capture Connect Agent ............................................................................191
To configure the synchronization directory ..................................................................................193
To install the Web Capture Client ................................................................................................194
To select the Job Settings available to Web Capture Clients ......................................................196
To include a job in the Web Capture Service...............................................................................196
To add a Web Capture Option license .........................................................................................199
To reset a license.........................................................................................................................200
To access the Verifier configuration of an operator .....................................................................204
To assign a New Keystroke to a Command.................................................................................207
To remove a Keystroke Assignment ............................................................................................209
To restore Default Keystroke Assignments..................................................................................209
To modify the behavior and appearance of Verifier during Form Mode correction ......................209
To change Field Mode options.....................................................................................................213
To change Character Mode options.............................................................................................215
To add or remove characters from the default Look-Alike settings..............................................218
To restore the default character exclusion settings .....................................................................220
To start the TeleForm License Service.........................................................................................224
To launch a module .....................................................................................................................224
To configure the TeleForm AutoMerge Publisher or TeleForm Reader services .........................225
To change the graph colors .........................................................................................................230
To set the statistics parameters ...................................................................................................232
To change which statistics are collected from TeleForm Reader.................................................234
To collect Verifier statistics...........................................................................................................235
To specify the conditions of Control Center alert messages........................................................236
To set Alert Properties for a given event......................................................................................237
To set up e-mail delivery ..............................................................................................................239
To view a user’s settings..............................................................................................................243
To perform an action on a batch ..................................................................................................244
To log on as a different user while TeleForm Control Center is open ..........................................244
To diagnose inefficiency between your Verifier operators and Reader stations. .........................245
To run TeleForm Monitor on the same workstation as Control Center.........................................246
To remove a bad image ...............................................................................................................249
To open the purge log..................................................................................................................253
To create a purge schedule .........................................................................................................254
To archive forms ..........................................................................................................................256

•
•
20 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Procedures

To review archived images.......................................................................................................... 256
To configure TeleForm to work with Microsoft Visual SourceSafe............................................... 260
To add network logon names to SourceSafe .............................................................................. 261
To link SourceSafe to TeleForm .................................................................................................. 262
To access the revision control commands in Designer ............................................................... 267
To check in forms ........................................................................................................................ 271
To trigger the Validate Files command ........................................................................................ 275
To generate a report in TeleForm Control Center........................................................................ 314
To install MS SQL to a cluster server .......................................................................................... 338
To enable server cluster support in TeleForm ............................................................................. 339
To restart the TeleForm License Service..................................................................................... 341
To use Double Key data entry ..................................................................................................... 344
To enable double key validation .................................................................................................. 344
To set up double key validation ................................................................................................... 345
To enable Data Review ............................................................................................................... 346
To set up form folder security ...................................................................................................... 348
To set up Network Security for TeleForm Compliance ................................................................ 349
To notify your users that their actions are logged........................................................................ 352
To set up reporting with Report Generator .................................................................................. 354

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 21
•
•
•

Procedures

•
•
22 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Preface

This guide is for users who must manage a TeleForm WorkGroup or Enterprise
installation.


Documentation Updates



Conventions



Related Documentation



Autonomy Product References



Autonomy Customer Support



Contact Autonomy

Documentation Updates
The information in this guide is current as of TeleForm version 10.5. The content
was last modified 04 November 2011 . You can retrieve the latest available
product documentation from Autonomy’s Knowledge Base on the Customer
Support Site:
https://customers.autonomy.com
A document in the Knowledge Base has a version number (for example, version
7.5) and may also have a revision number (for example, revision 3). The version
number applies to the product that the document describes. The revision number
applies to the document. The Knowledge Base contains the latest available
revision of any document.

Conventions
The following conventions are used in this document.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 23
•
•
•

Preface

Notational Conventions
This guide uses the following conventions.
Convention

Usage

Bold

User-interface elements such as a menu item or button.
For example:
Click Cancel to halt the operation.

Italics

Document titles and new terms. For example:
 For more information, see the IDOL Server
Administration Guide.
 An action command is a request, such as a query or
indexing instruction, sent to IDOL Server.

monospace font

File names, paths, and code. For example:
The FileSystemConnector.cfg file is installed in
C:\Autonomy\FileSystemConnector\.

monospace bold

monospace italics

Data typed by the user. For example:


Type run at the command prompt.



In the User Name field, type Admin.

Replaceable strings in file paths and code. For
example:
user UserName

•
•
24 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Conventions

Command-line Syntax Conventions
This guide uses the following command-line syntax conventions.
Convention

Usage

[ optional ]

Brackets describe optional syntax. For example:
[ -create ]

|

Bars indicate “either | or” choices. For example:
[ option1 ] | [ option2 ]
In this example, you must choose between option1
and option2.

{ required }

Braces describe required syntax in which you have a
choice and that at least one choice is required. For
example:
{ [ option1 ] [ option2 ] }
In this example, you must choose option1, option2,
or both options.

required

Absence of braces or brackets indicates required
syntax in which there is no choice; you must type the
required syntax element.

variable

Italics specify items to be replaced by actual values. For
example:

<variable>

-merge filename1
(In some documents, angle brackets are used to denote
these items.)
...

Ellipses indicate repetition of the same pattern. For
example:
-merge filename1, filename2 [, filename3
... ]
where the ellipses specify, filename4, and so on.

The use of punctuation—such as single and double quotes, commas, periods—
indicates actual syntax; it is not part of the syntax definition.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 25
•
•
•

Preface

Notices
This guide uses the following notices:

CAUTION A caution indicates an action can result in the loss
of data.

IMPORTANT An important note provides information that is
essential to completing a task.

NOTE A note provides information that emphasizes or
supplements important points of the main text. A note supplies
information that may apply only in special cases—for example,
memory limitations, equipment configurations, or details that
apply to specific versions of the software.

TIP A tip provides additional information that makes a task
easier or more productive.

Related Documentation
The following documents provide more details on TeleForm:


Autonomy Product References
This document references the following Autonomy products:



•
•
26 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Autonomy Customer Support

Autonomy Customer Support
Autonomy Customer Support provides prompt and accurate support to help you
quickly and effectively resolve any issue you may encounter while using
Autonomy products. Support services include access to the Customer Support
Site (CSS) for online answers, expertise-based service by Autonomy support
engineers, and software maintenance to ensure you have the most up-to-date
technology.
To access the Customer Support Site, go to
https://customers.autonomy.com
The Customer Support Site includes:


Knowledge Base: The CSS contains an extensive library of end user
documentation, FAQs, and technical articles that is easy to navigate and
search.



Case Center: The Case Center is a central location to create, monitor, and
manage all your cases that are open with technical support.



Download Center: Products and product updates can be downloaded and
requested from the Download Center.



Resource Center: Other helpful resources appropriate for your product.

To contact Autonomy Customer Support by e-mail or phone, go to
http://www.autonomy.com/content/Services/Support/index.en.html

Contact Autonomy
For general information about Autonomy, contact one of the following locations:
Europe and Worldwide

North and South America

E-mail: [email protected]

E-mail: [email protected]

Telephone: +44 (0) 1223 448 000
Fax: +44 (0) 1223 448 001

Telephone: 1 415 243 9955
Fax: 1 415 243 9984

Autonomy Corporation plc
Cambridge Business Park
Cowley Road, Cambridge, CB4 0WZ, UK

Autonomy, Inc.
One Market Plaza, Spear Tower, Suite 1900
San Francisco, CA. 94105, US

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 27
•
•
•

Preface

•
•
28 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

PART 1

Getting Started

This section provides information for getting started with
TeleForm WorkGroup and TeleForm Enterprise. It includes the
following chapters:


“Introduction” on page 31. A brief introduction to the
TeleForm system.



“Prepare for Installation” on page 39. Outlines the server,
workstation, and network requirements for running
TeleForm.



“Install TeleForm” on page 49. Instructions on setting up
the TeleForm software.



“Upgrade and Migrate” on page 61. Information and
instructions for upgrading or migrating your TeleForm
installation.



“Connect Modules to Multiple TeleForm Systems” on
page 69. Describes how to connect individual TeleForm
modules to multiple TeleForm servers.



“Manage Licenses” on page 75. As your system changes,
you may need to add new licenses to support more
workstations.



“TeleForm Remote Verification” on page 79. Provides
instructions on running TeleForm through Citrix XenApp.



“Security” on page 85. Describes the available security
features.

Part 1 Getting Started

•
•
30 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide


Introduction

CHAPTER 1

This chapter describes TeleForm and its components. It includes the following
topics:


TeleForm Product Suite



Autonomy’s IDOL Platform



TeleForm Architecture



TeleForm Components



TeleForm Tiers

TeleForm Product Suite
TeleForm offers the capability to capture unstructured as well as semi-structured
data. Whether you process loan applications or clinical information, simple forms
or complex sets, TeleForm version 10.5 provides an easy-to-use, scalable
platform that equips your organization to capture data from most any source in a
secure, dependable environment; and then to track, audit, and search the process
behind the form giving you maximum efficiency and ensuring compliance to
organization and government regulation.
TeleForm version 10.5 enables you to:


Automatically capture and index any form or document type

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 31
•
•
•

Chapter 1 Introduction



Easily and rapidly fold information from paper into electronically-based
workflows from both distributed and centralized locations



Embed intelligence within the form to navigate the business process



Enforce internal and external regulatory compliance requirements



Increase productivity across a disparate, global enterprise



With the addition of Citrix Metaframe, you can also use the TeleForm Designer
and Verifier remotely.

Autonomy’s IDOL Platform
TeleForm integrates with Autonomy’s Intelligent Data Operating Layer (IDOL).
IDOL gathers and processes unstructured, semi-structured, and structured
information in any format from multiple repositories using IDOL connectors and a
global relational index. It can automatically form a contextual understanding of the
information in real time, linking disparate data sources together based on the
concepts contained within them. For example, IDOL can automatically link
concepts contained in an e-mail message to a recorded phone conversation,
which can be associated with a stock trade. This information is then imported into
a format that is easily searchable, adding advanced retrieval, collaboration, and
personalization to an application that integrates the technology.
For more information on IDOL, refer to the IDOL Getting Started Guide.

TeleForm Architecture
With TeleForm, individual Clients (workstations) communicate with the Server in a
Client/Server environment. This architecture means that workstations connected
to the Server are set up to run TeleForm applications from the server. Within this
environment, the system administrator can modify configuration settings to create
a custom-made capture processing system. The following diagram illustrates a
typical TeleForm Workgroup system:

•
•
32 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

TeleForm Components

TeleForm Components
TeleForm includes the following components:

TeleForm Designer
TeleForm Designer’s drag-and-drop interface make it easy to create templates to
collect any type of data. Toolbar buttons let you add fields and drawing objects
with a click of the mouse. Special dialog boxes enable you to add business rules.
You can also add logos and artwork created in other graphics programs.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 33
•
•
•

Chapter 1 Introduction

TeleForm IDR Designer
IDR is the process of classifying documents (defined as one or more related
images or pages) into categories and extracting values that can vary by location.
The TeleForm IDR Designer provides a graphical interface for creating the IDR
templates to use to classify scanned documents and extract information from
those documents based on the location of content and content-based rules.
TeleForm IDR Designer allows you to produce XML templates without using XML
code.

TeleForm AutoMerge Publisher
The AutoMerge Publisher is the built-in distribution module for TeleForm.
Beginning with TeleForm 9.0, the AutoMerge Publisher took on the routine print
and fax functions previously served by TeleForm Print Manager, while maintaining
the ability to merge customized information onto documents and distribute them
by print, fax, and e-mail.

TeleForm Scan Station
TeleForm’s Scan Station turns completed pages and files into batches that can be
processed by Reader and Verifier. Using Scan Station is the first step in taking
advantage of TeleForm’s powerful batch processing feature, which handles large
groups of items efficiently and accurately.

TeleForm Reader
TeleForm Reader evaluates image files automatically, eliminating the need for
manual sorting. TeleForm Reader classifies and evaluates image files by
comparing them to templates created in Designer.

TeleForm Verifier
TeleForm Verifier allows users to check or correct any data entry fields that were
not evaluated with sufficient confidence by TeleForm Reader, perform Quality
Control on batches, and collect information in Capture Zones.

TeleForm Control Center
TeleForm Control Center allows provides an overview of the working of your entire
TeleForm system. Statistics in the System branch can be used to manage the
throughput of files and identify bottlenecks in the TeleForm system. The Workload
branch contains global statistics that apply to the TeleForm system as a whole.

•
•
34 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

TeleForm Components

You can customize the global, user, and local settings of your TeleForm system.
You can also set alerts that appear when an administrator-specified condition
occurs.

TeleForm Utilities
TeleForm Utilities provide additional functionality beyond creating, distributing,
and reading forms. The utilities include:


TeleForm Database Utilities. Use TeleForm’s Database Utilities (DBUTIL)
occasionally to optimize your system's integrity and to help maintain the
database files that TeleForm uses in its daily operation. Using these utilities
ensures that databases and associated files are synchronized. If you
experience problems with a particular file, you can re-index and compress a
file to help you restore a corrupt file and recover any "good" records
remaining. You can also delete a number of temporary files by using the same
utility.



TeleForm License Manager. The TeleForm License Manager allows you to
manage the licenses for your TeleForm installations and workstations.



TeleForm Monitor. TeleForm Monitor tracks the TeleForm applications on
workstations that make up the Workgroup or Enterprise system.

NOTE The TeleForm Monitor is available only for
TeleForm WorkGroup and TeleForm Enterprise.



TeleForm Service Monitor. The TeleForm Service Monitor Application allows
you to monitor the status of all active TeleForm services. You can filter the list
of services by server or application name and can start, pause, resume, and
stop each service. The TeleForm Service Monitor Service allows you to use a
single service to start and stop all registered TeleForm service instances.

NOTE The TeleForm Service Monitor Service and
Application are available only for TeleForm Enterprise.



TeleForm Report Generator. Compared to the TeleForm Stats function used
by Desktop and Workgroup, the Report Generator offers an Audit Trail report
for compliance tracking and the ability to save customized reports and run
them as often as needed.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 35
•
•
•

Chapter 1 Introduction

NOTE The Report Generator is available only for
TeleForm Enterprise.



TeleForm Stats. TeleForm Stats gives you access to complete workflow
analysis, including extensive system and operator statistics. Statistics cover
specific things such as the number of images in a batch that are waiting to be
evaluated by Reader stations. They also cover more general things such as
the average time it takes to evaluate one image in TeleForm Reader. Using
these statistics, you can manage and optimize the entire data collection
process: from scanning form images to final data output.



TeleForm Viewer. TeleForm Viewer allows you to view Form Templates (TFT
files) and supported image files. Once a Form Template or image is opened in
Viewer, you can also print it.



TeleForm Service Monitor. The TeleForm Service Monitor Application allows
you to monitor the status of all active TeleForm services. You can filter the list
of services by server or application name and can start, pause, resume, and
stop each service.

TeleForm Tiers
There are three system tiers of TeleForm. Each tier is created to fulfill the needs of
a certain business environment. The TeleForm tier you are using determines the
features available to you.
To change the TeleForm tier that you are using, contact your Autonomy Customer
Service representative. See “Autonomy Customer Support” on page 27.

TeleForm Desktop
TeleForm Desktop is designed for a small business or limited use environments.
TeleForm Desktop installs all components on a single machine which performs the
functions of the TeleForm server as well as the Scanning, Reader and Verifier
station.
With the Desktop tier you are limited to a single machine and a single instance of
each module, one Designer, one Reader, one Scan Station and one Verifier.
There is absolutely no multi user capability with the Desktop tier.

•
•
36 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

TeleForm Tiers

With that said the Desktop tier is still a fully functional system. As long as there is
no need for multiple users to work on the system and the workload is roughly
4,000 images processed per day or less Desktop may be a suitable version for
your environment. Let’s look at the extended features that are available in the
other TeleForm tiers before we go anywhere else.

TeleForm Workgroup
The workgroup tier is designed for small to medium sized businesses that either
have outgrown the single user nature of the Desktop tier, need to process more
than the 4,000 images a day or specifically need some of the additional features
available in the Workgroup tier.
The Workgroup tier provides much more processing power because it allows for a
distributed architecture. The multi-user configuration allows for multiple designers,
scanners (personnel scanners, specifically use of scan station), readers and
verifiers to again increase the efficiency and capability of the system.
TeleForm Workgroup includes all the features available in TeleForm Desktop and
several additional features:


Assign user rights and permissions



Run TeleForm License Manager as a service



Support for Microsoft Windows Universal Naming Convention (UNC)



Revision Control



Distributed Web Capture option (available at additional cost)

TeleForm Enterprise
TeleForm Enterprise is designed for large scale and high volume processing
demands of larger companies or deployments. Enterprise provides functionality
geared towards higher end, more robust deployments.
TeleForm Enterprise includes all the features available in TeleForm Desktop and
Teleform Workgroup, and several additional features:


LDAP integration with Microsoft Active Directory



Form folder, Batch subdirectory, and Batch owner group security



Auditing and custom reporting



Clustering support



TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 37
•
•
•

Chapter 1 Introduction

•
•
38 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide


Prepare for Installation

CHAPTER 2

Before you install TeleForm WorkGroup or TeleForm Enterprise on your Server, it
is important to note the relationship between the TeleForm Server and TeleForm
Clients (workstations).


The TeleForm Server should only be used as an information and operations
hub.

IMPORTANT Do not run TeleForm applications on
your server (this includes TeleForm Control Center).



TeleForm Clients (workstations) must only be used to run TeleForm
applications.
IMPORTANT Do not use one of your workstations as
a TeleForm Server. TeleForm is not certified or
supported to operate in a peer-to-peer networking
environment.

TeleForm operates in a Client/Server networking environment. In order to properly
install and set up your network, you must know how your Clients and your Server
communicate with each other. You should also know what other software is
installed on your network and how this software is affected by the TeleForm
Workgroup installation.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 39
•
•
•

Chapter 2 Prepare for Installation

This chapter contains information you should be familiar with before you install
TeleForm.


Overview



System Requirements



MS SQL Database



Non-TeleForm Software Installation



Installation Permissions and Operating Rights



Mapped Drives and UNC Paths

Overview
Before you begin your TeleForm installation, you must know the following
information:


Your server and workstations meets the system requirement.



Whether you need to migrate from one server Operating System to another (if
you have a previous TeleForm installation).



Which workstations are be used as:
 Designer stations.
 Reader stations.
 Verifier stations.
 Scan Stations.
 AutoMerge Publisher stations.
 Control Center stations.



How many total workstations you need for your capture processing, and how
many TeleForm licenses this requires.

System Requirements
See the following sections for information on determining if your servers and
workstations are appropriate for running TeleForm:


•
•
40 ••
•
•

“OS and Hardware Wizards” on page 41

TeleForm Administration Guide

System Requirements



“VMWare Support” on page 41



“Server Hardware” on page 42



“Workstation Hardware” on page 43



“Network Requirements” on page 45

OS and Hardware Wizards
TeleForm requirements are subject to change. Consult our online wizard for the
latest information.
To use the online requirements wizard
1. Go to https://customers.autonomy.com/support/login.jsp and log into the
customer service site.
2. If you do not already have a support account, you are prompted to create one.
3. After you have logged in and the Support Index page is shown, open the
Wizards tab.
4. Under the TeleForm section, click the appropriate Wizard.

VMWare Support
TeleForm 10.0 and later supports VMWare Server ESX. Earlier versions of
TeleForm do not support VMWare. The following limitations apply:


Only TeleForm Reader and TeleForm AutoMerge Publisher (AMP) can run on
VMWare.



Other TeleForm modules (Designer, Verifier, Control Center, Scan Station, and
Utilities) do NOT run on VMWare.



The operating system for the server used with TeleForm must be supported by
both TeleForm and VMWare.



You may experience a decrease in performance when running on VMWare.
Autonomy recommends that you deploy TeleForm / VMWare in a test
configuration to determine if any loss of performance is acceptable.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 41
•
•
•

Chapter 2 Prepare for Installation

Server Hardware
TeleForm is designed for a Client/Server network environment. You cannot use a
Windows workstation as your TeleForm Server. TeleForm does not support a
peer-to-peer networking environment.
Processor

Pentium 2.42 GHz or higher

Hard Drive

1.5 GB free disk space (installation space plus room for
production images and data)

RAM

1 GB

Network Card

100 Mbps TCP/IP network card

Operating System

Microsoft Windows 2003 Enterprise Server (Service Pack 2)
Microsoft Windows 2008 Server (32-bit or 64-bit)
Microsoft Windows 2008 Server R2 (64-bit)

Other

DVD-ROM drive

NOTE Processor and Server memory has the greatest
impact on database activities. Hard drive speed and
available space has the greatest impact on TeleForm
applications.

Domain Controllers
You do not need to install TeleForm on the Primary Domain Controller (PDC) or
the Backup Domain Controller (BDC) Server. However, your network must have a
PDC to install TeleForm.

Web Server for Web Capture Option
If you intend to use the Web Capture Option, the Web Server that hosts the Web
Capture client page must meet these requirements:
Operating System

Microsoft Windows 2003 Enterprise Server (Service Pack 2)
Microsoft Windows 2008 Server (32 or 64-bit)
Microsoft Windows 2008 Server R2 (64-bit)

•
•
42 ••
•
•

Hard Drive

500 MB free disk space (installation space plus room for
production images and data)

RAM

1 GB

TeleForm Administration Guide

System Requirements

Internet Information
Server

6.0, 7.0, 7.5

.NET

.NET Framework 1.1
Web Services Enhancements for Microsoft .NET (WSE)

Other

DVD-ROM drive

See “Web Capture Option” on page 39 for more information on the Web Capture
option.

Workstation Hardware
Your TeleForm system can contain a mixture of workstations with different
configurations, as long as all the workstations within the system meet these
minimum requirements.
Processor

Intel Pentium III running at 800MHz or higher

Hard Drive

500 MB Free Space

RAM

1GB

Network Card

100 Mbps TCP/IP network card

Operating System

Microsoft Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 3)
Microsoft Windows Vista (Service Pack 2)
Microsoft Windows 7 (Service Pack 1) (32-bit and 64-bit)

Monitor

VGA color or better
17” recommended for Verifier stations

Other

DVD-ROM drive
Mouse or other interface tool
Compatible fax server, scanner, or Web Server, depending on
workstation function within TeleForm

Workstation Limits
You can configure as many workstations as necessary to run your TeleForm
applications. However, the number of licenses limits the number of TeleForm
workstations that you can run simultaneously.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 43
•
•
•

Chapter 2 Prepare for Installation

You cannot run more workstations with TeleForm than the total sum of licenses
you have purchased. For example, (1) TeleForm 10.5 system (1 Designer, 1
Reader, 1 Verifier, 1 Scan Station and 1 AutoMerge Publisher) with (1) additional
Verifier license, and (1) additional Reader license would allow you to run any
combination of these licenses on a maximum of (7) workstations.

Run Reader and AutoMerge Publisher as Services
When run as a service, Reader and AutoMerge Publisher (AMP) can run on the
same operating systems as the TeleForm Server. See Operating System in
“Server Hardware” on page 42.
IMPORTANT Reader and AutoMerge Publisher cannot be
run as a service on the TeleForm Server, or on any member
of a cluster if that cluster is acting as the TeleForm Server.

See “Run Reader and AutoMerge Publisher as Services” on page 224 for more
information on running Reader and AMP as services.
NOTE Reader and AMP can only be run as services using
TeleForm Enterprise. See “TeleForm Tiers” on page 36 for
more information on TeleForm Tiers.

NOTE Reader and AMP can also be run as regular
applications on these server operating systems.

Remote Capture Station Workstations
This table outlines the minimum system needed to run Remote Capture Station.
RCS workstations are not formally “within” the TeleForm system.

•
•
44 ••
•
•

Processor

Intel Pentium III running at 600 MHz or higher

Hard Drive

500 MB Free Space

RAM

1 GB

TeleForm Administration Guide

System Requirements

Operating System

Microsoft Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 2)
Microsoft Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit)

Monitor

VGA color or better

Other

DVD-ROM drive
Mouse or other interface tool
Compatible fax server, scanner, or Web Server, depending on
workstation function within TeleForm

Web Capture Option Workstations
Computers that run the Web Capture Client do not have the same requirements
as workstations in the core TeleForm system. Any Web Capture client workstation
must meet only these requirements:


Internet Explorer 8.0



Windows XP Professional, Windows Vista, or Windows 7



TWAIN (for scanners and other input devices). If any Web Capture Module
client creates batches strictly from images in directories, TWAIN is not
required.

Network Requirements
To install and use TeleForm, you must have a functional local area network (LAN)
that consists of the following basic components:


Hardware. Server and workstations, all with Ethernet network cards. Refer to
the server and workstation requirements earlier in this chapter for more
details.



Software. Windows 2003 Enterprise Server, Windows 2008 Enterprise
Server, or Windows 2008 R2 Enterprise Server, all running with the TCP/IP
protocol. Refer to “Server Hardware” on page 42 for more details.



Connections between the workstations and the server, including network
cables, hubs, routers, etc.



CAT5 (or better) network cabling.



100 MBPS high quality network cards

NOTE Token Ring is not supported.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 45
•
•
•

Chapter 2 Prepare for Installation

Network Protocols
A network protocol is a set of rules describing how to transmit data across a
network. By default, TeleForm uses TCP/IP to transmit data across the network. If
both your clients and your Server are configured for TCP/IP communication, and
they are communicating properly, TeleForm automatically selects TCP/IP as your
protocol.

LDAP
TeleForm Enterprise can work with Active Directory to provide security functions.
No other LDAP directories are supported.
See “LDAP” on page 94 for information on using TeleForm with LDAP.
NOTE LDAP is supported only in TeleForm Enterprise. See
“TeleForm Tiers” on page 36 for more information on
TeleForm Tiers.

MS SQL Database
Before installing TeleForm, you must have a working MS SQL database
application. You are prompted to identity this database application during the
TeleForm installation. You must also have a valid user name and password.
Supported versions include:


MS SQL Server 2005



MS SQL Server 2008 (64-bit)



MS SQL Express 2008 (option for single-user installations)

The TeleForm install program can create a new database in your MS SQL
application or link to an existing database. You are given this option during the
TeleForm installation.

Non-TeleForm Software Installation
TeleForm can work with many software and hardware items created by other
vendors. The software for these products is not included with TeleForm. You must
install and configure them separately, and at the correct time, in order for them to
be used with TeleForm. See the following table for more information

•
•
46 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Installation Permissions and Operating Rights

Item /Software

When Installed

VMWare

Before TeleForm.

Scanner

Before TeleForm

Fax

Before TeleForm

SourceSafe

Before or after TeleForm. See “Revision Control” on page 259
for more information.

Installation Permissions and Operating Rights
Before you begin the TeleForm installation procedure, you must have the
appropriate permissions for installing TeleForm. After installing TeleForm, your
users must have the appropriate rights to run TeleForm.


Installation Permissions. You must have Administrator permissions to install
TeleForm.



Operating Rights. In order to run TeleForm, all users must have the modify
rights to the TeleForm directory.

Mapped Drives and UNC Paths
TeleForm supports Universal Naming Convention (UNC) paths (\\servername\
volume\path) and mapped Drives.
IMPORTANT You must decide how you want to specify the
location of the TeleForm server (mapped drive or UNC)
before you begin installing TeleForm.


If you want to use a mapped drive, see “Mapped Drives” on page 53.



If you want to use a UNC path, there are no prerequisites. When the TeleForm
Setup Program asks you for the location of the TeleForm Server, simply
specify that location via a UNC path.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 47
•
•
•

Chapter 2 Prepare for Installation

Upgrade Customers
If you are upgrading to TeleForm 10.5 from a previous version, and you want to
switch to UNC paths, we recommend that you migrate your TeleForm system
rather than upgrading your current installation. See “Upgrade Versus Migrate” on
page 61 for more information.

Software Compatibility
Microsoft Office 2007

•
•
48 ••
•
•



View Word 2007, Excel 2007, and PowerPoint 2007



Export to Access 2007 and Excel 2007



Merge from Access 2007 and Excel 2007

TeleForm Administration Guide

CHAPTER 3



Install TeleForm
This chapter describes all the information needed to install TeleForm.


Preliminary Steps



Other Installation Instructions



Create Windows Users for TeleForm



Share TeleForm’s Parent Directory



Install TeleForm to the Server



Fax Server and Scanners



Install Workstations



Activation



Identification Information

Preliminary Steps
Read “Prepare for Installation” on page 39 before proceeding with the installation
steps in this chapter.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 49
•
•
•

Chapter 3 Install TeleForm

Other Installation Instructions
Remote Capture and Web Capture Options
See “Remote Capture Option” on page 167 and “Web Capture Option” on
page 179 for information on setting up these two modules.

Connect Agents
For information on installing Export Connect Agents, see the Getting Started with
TeleForm guide.

Intelligent Classification Server
For information on installing the Cardiff Intelligent Classification Server, see the
Getting Started with TeleForm guide.

Create Windows Users for TeleForm
You must have a user with administrative rights and log on as this user to perform
the following tasks:


Install TeleForm on the server.



Install TeleForm on the workstations.



Perform administrative duties for the TeleForm system.



Set up Remote Capture Stations.

This user must be a member of the Domain Admins user group. If you do not have
a user account with these specifications, you must create one.
You should also have a unique user account for each TeleForm workstation. Use
this user account to run TeleForm on the workstation after TeleForm is installed
and configured by the TeleForm administrator. These users must have at least
Change rights to the parent directory of the Teleform installation directory. If you
do not have enough user accounts in your environment, or if your existing user
accounts do not meet these specifications, follow the steps in “Create TeleForm
Users” on page 51. See “Create a TeleForm User Group” on page 51 to create a
user group for your TeleForm users.

•
•
50 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Share TeleForm’s Parent Directory

NOTE All elements of an NTFS volume have two layers of
security (in addition to the Sharing tab, there is also a
Security tab). If you are going to install TeleForm to an
NTFS volume, make sure that the TeleForm administrator
and TeleForm users have sufficient security permissions.

Create Windows Administrator
The procedure for your Server may be different. Refer to your Server
documentation for more information on creating user accounts.
To create a Windows Administrator for TeleForm
1. Create a New User account in Windows.
2. Add this new user to the Domain Admins group for your domain.

Create TeleForm Users
Create a New User account (if one does not already exist) for each of your
TeleForm Users. Refer to the Server’s documentation for more information.

Create a TeleForm User Group
When you create a global group that includes all of your TeleForm users, you can
simplify the task of sharing TeleForm’s parent directory.
To create a TeleForm user group
1. Create a New Group on your Domain.
2. Add all of the previously created TeleForm User accounts to this new group.

Share TeleForm’s Parent Directory
The parent directory of TeleForm is the directory that contains the TeleForm folder.
For example, if the TeleForm directory is:
\\[Server_Name]\Apps\TeleForm

then the parent directory of TeleForm is:
\\[Server_Name]\Apps\

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 51
•
•
•

Chapter 3 Install TeleForm

This parent directory must be shared, and you must give permission to the
TeleForm user group that you set up earlier (described on “Create a TeleForm
User Group” on page 51).
1. Create the parent directory (e.g. “Apps”).
2. Create the TeleForm directory under the parent directory.
3. Right-click the parent directory and choose Sharing.
4. The Properties dialog box for the parent directory opens.
5. Click on the Sharing tab, if it is not already selected.
6. Click the Share this folder radio button.
7. Click the Permissions button.
8. The Permissions dialog opens. Click Add. The Select Users or Groups
dialog is displayed.

9. Select the TeleForm user group and click Add.
10. Select the TeleForm Administrator and click Add.
11. Click OK. The TeleForm user group and Administrator are shown in the Share
Permissions list.
12. Select the TeleForm group and click the Allow box for Change Permission.
13. Select the TeleForm Administrator and click the Allow box for Full Control
Permission. This gives the TeleForm Administrator account administrative
privileges to the shared parent directory of TeleForm.

•
•
52 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Install TeleForm to the Server

14. Click OK to save these permission settings and return to the Properties
dialog box.
15. Click OK.

Install TeleForm to the Server
You are now ready to install TeleForm to the TeleForm Server. See the following
sections for detailed information:


Specify the Location of the TeleForm Server



Update Files During Install



Run the Setup Program

Specify the Location of the TeleForm Server
TeleForm 10.0 and later supports UNC paths. You can now specify the location of
the TeleForm Server via a UNC path or mapped drive.

Mapped Drives
If you want to use a mapped drive to specify the location of the TeleForm Server
during installation, you must map a drive to TeleForm’s parent directory. See
“Share TeleForm’s Parent Directory” on page 51 for information on this directory.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 53
•
•
•

Chapter 3 Install TeleForm

The TeleForm Server and each TeleForm workstation MUST use the same drive
letter for the mapped drive. Be sure to select a map letter that is free on all the
TeleForm workstations.

UNC Paths
If you want to specify the location of a UNC path, there are no prerequisites. When
the TeleForm Setup Program asks you for the location of the TeleForm Server,
simply specify that location via a UNC path.

Update Files During Install
Some systems may require updated MDAC and PDF driver files before TeleForm
can be installed. The TeleForm installation program automatically detects whether
these upgrades are needed and prompts you to:


Accept the update of older files;



Remove obsolete files, if necessary;



Reboot the computer after the tasks have been performed.

Run the Setup Program
Follow this procedure to install the TeleForm software to your TeleForm Server.
1. Read “Prepare for Installation” on page 39 for important pre-installation
information.
2. Make sure that all applications, including anti-virus software, are closed.
3. Insert the TeleForm DVD into the drive of the TeleForm server.
a. If the TeleForm installation program does not automatically begin, run
Setup.exe on the DVD.
4. The Cardiff TeleForm dialog box opens. Select Install TeleForm.
5. The Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for TeleForm screen is shown. Click
Next.
6. The License Agreement screen is shown. Select I accept the terms of the
license agreement and click Next.
7. The TeleForm eForm Option is no longer supported as of TeleForm 10.3.
Installing TeleForm 10.3 or later results in the loss of the following functions:
 Exporting forms to HTML and PDF
 Merging forms to HTML and as eForm versions of PDF. The AutoMerge

Publisher is still able to create “static” PDF files.

•
•
54 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Install TeleForm to the Server

 To install TeleForm 10.3 or later, click Yes. Click No to retain your current

TeleForm system with eForm functionality.
8. If you are installing TeleForm for the first time on this server, the License Code
dialog box opens. Type your license code in the fields provided and click Next.
9. The License Information Summary dialog box opens.
a. Check this information carefully and click Next.
b. Contact your Cardiff sales representative if you find a discrepancy.
10. The Choose TeleForm Server Directory dialog box opens.
a. If you are specifying the server location via a UNC path (see “Specify the
Location of the TeleForm Server” on page 53), type the path here.
i.

Specify the TeleForm Parent Directory you created earlier.

ii. Use the format \\servername\volume\path.
b. If you are specifying the server location via a mapped drive, make sure
that you add TeleForm to the drive you mapped before running the setup
program.
i.

For example, if the mapped drive is J:\, enter:

J:\TeleForm

ii. See “Specify the Location of the TeleForm Server” on page 53 for
information on mapping a drive to the TeleForm parent directory.
c. If you are installing TeleForm to a cluster server, you must type the name
of the server. The installation program cannot automatically detect cluster
servers.
11. The Choose TeleForm Local Directory dialog box opens.
12. The Setup Type dialog box opens. Select a setup type and click Next.
a. Complete. TeleForm is installed with all features. This option is
recommended for most users.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 55
•
•
•

Chapter 3 Install TeleForm

b. Custom. Allows you to choose the options that are installed. This choice is
recommended only for advanced users.
13. The Database Server dialog box opens. Select an SQL server and type your
login information. You can either select an existing database if you are
upgrading or type a name for a new database, which is created by the
installation program.
14. The TeleForm License Service dialog box opens. This screen prompts you for
the settings under which the License Service should run.
15. The Select Program Folder screen opens. You can usually accept the
defaults.
16. The Start Copying Files dialog box opens. If you are satisfied with the current
settings, click Next.
17. The Setup Status screen displays the progress of the installation.
18. For new installations, when installation completes, a reminder opens for to
activate TeleForm via the License Manager.

19. Click OK. The InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box opens. Click Finish
to exit the TeleForm Setup.
20. Reboot your machine if prompted to do so.

Fax Server and Scanners
The TeleForm workstation setup program asks you to type information about
faxes and servers to be used with TeleForm. These must be installed to the
appropriate machines BEFORE you run the TeleForm Workstation Setup program
on those workstations.
Not all fax servers and scanners can be used with TeleForm. Consult our online
wizards for the latest information.

•
•
56 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Install Workstations

1. Go to https://customers.autonomy.com/support/login.jsp and log into the
customer service site.
2. If you do not already have a support account, you are prompted to create one.
3. Once you have logged in and the Support Index page is shown, open the
Wizards tab.

Fax Server
1. Before installing TeleForm, your fax server must be installed and configured
correctly. During the TeleForm install, you need to type certain information
during install to properly configure your fax server to work with TeleForm.
2. Make sure you select the correct fax server during installation. While you can
change your settings within TeleForm, you need to run a TeleForm workstation
install to select a different fax server. A generated Fax Setup dialog box is
illustrated below.
3. After you install TeleForm, you may need to perform additional steps if
necessary. The steps you follow depend on what type of fax server you have
installed on your system. Follow the appropriate steps below as they apply to
your fax server.

Scanner
It is important to install and test your scanner before you install TeleForm;
otherwise, there may be errors because of driver conflicts. In addition, there are a
few scanner settings that need to be configured after both your scanner and
TeleForm have been installed.

Install Workstations
IMPORTANT The TeleForm user on any workstation must
have administrative rights to that workstation during
installation.

To install TeleForm on workstations
1. Close all other applications, including anti-virus programs.
2. Log on as the user who will be operating TeleForm on the workstation.
This ensures that the workstation operator has access to the TeleForm
applications after installation.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 57
•
•
•

Chapter 3 Install TeleForm

3. If you are using mapped drives, map a drive to the TeleForm network directory
(the directory that you installed TeleForm to on the TeleForm Server) on each
workstation where you plan to set up TeleForm.

IMPORTANT Use the exact same letter for the
workstation mapped drive as you did for the server.

4. Run the TeleForm Workstation Setup Program.
a. Browse to the Install\Workstation subdirectory on the TeleForm
server. Do NOT use the TeleForm DVD.
For example, browse to:
J:\TeleForm\Install\Workstation

b. Double-click the Setup.exe program to begin the installation.
5. The Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for TeleForm dialog box opens. Click
Next.
6. The License Agreement screen is shown. Select I accept the terms of the
license agreement and click Next.
7. The License Information Summary dialog box opens. Click Next.
8. The Choose Destination screen is shown. Choose a local location (on the
workstation, not the server) for the TeleForm application and click Next.
NOTE The TeleForm installer installs non-executable files
in the local disk/ProgramData/ folder during new
installations on Windows 7 machines for UAC compatibility.
This is by default and does not need to be specified.

9. The Setup Type dialog box opens. Select a setup type and click Next:
 Complete. TeleForm is installed with all features. This setup is

recommended for most users.
 Custom. You may choose the options you want to install. This setup is

recommended only for advanced users.
10. In the Scanning Interface Selection dialog box, indicate whether you will be
scanning from this workstation and click Next.

•
•
58 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Activation

Refer to “Fax Server and Scanners” on page 56 for more information on
setting up your fax server.
11. In the Fax Options dialog box, select your fax server and click Next. If you will
not be using a fax server on this workstation, select None.
 You must have your fax software installed and functioning correctly on this

workstation before installing TeleForm.
 Refer to “Fax Server and Scanners” on page 56 for more information on

setting up your fax server.
12. The Select Program Folder dialog box opens. You can usually accept the
default value and click Next.
13. Review the Start Copying Files screen and click Next.
14. The installation program copies files to the workstation from the server. When
finished, the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box opens.
15. Click Finish. If prompted to do so, restart your workstation.
16. Repeat these installation procedures on each workstation on which you plan
to run TeleForm.
17. Proceed to “Activation” on page 59.

Activation
Activation adds a specific code to the TeleForm License Database which allows
you to use the TeleForm product. TeleForm does not function until you have
entered a valid Activation Code via the Activation Wizard
See the following sections for information about activation:


Identification Information



Activation Process

Identification Information
To activate TeleForm, you need several pieces of identification information.


License Code

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 59
•
•
•

Chapter 3 Install TeleForm



Machine ID



Activation Code

The Machine ID and Activation Code are automatically determined when you
run the Activation Wizard.

License Code
The License Code is unique to each customer. You are prompted to type it during
the installation process. The License Code determines what features are enabled
in TeleForm. It ships in your TeleForm product box.

Machine ID
The Machine ID is a combination of letters and numbers that identifies the
computer from which you launch the Activation Wizard.
The Activation Wizard automatically determines the Machine ID when you
activate the product.

Activation Code
The Activation Code is a unique combination of letters and numbers generated
during the activation process. After Autonomy Cardiff determines that your
System Code and Machine ID are valid, an Activation Code is delivered to you.

Activation Process
1. From the Windows Start menu, click Programs Cardiff TeleForm >
TeleForm Utilities > TeleForm License Manager.
2. From the File menu, click Activation Wizard.
3. The Activation Wizard launches.
4. Follow the prompts in the wizard.

Restore Activation
The Activation Wizard can re-send you the original Activation Code. This feature
would be used in two situations:

•
•
60 ••
•
•



You choose to receive your Activation Code by email, then deleted the email
before entering it;



You successfully activated TeleForm, but a problem forced you to reinstall
TeleForm and your Activation Code was not retained in the License Database.
This problem might occur if the computer suffered a serious crash or the
License Database was severely compromised.

TeleForm Administration Guide


Upgrade and Migrate

CHAPTER 4

This chapter provides information for existing TeleForm customers who want to
move to v9. It covers the following topics:


Upgrade Versus Migrate



Upgrade TeleForm



Migrate TeleForm

Upgrade Versus Migrate
Upgrading and migrating are two different processes for installing TeleForm10.5
when you are currently running an older version of TeleForm.
Upgrade
Upgrading is the process of installing TeleForm directly over an existing TeleForm
system. You can upgrade a server and workstations or the server alone, with
TeleForm10.5 installed to new workstations. In the latter situation you lose any
workstation-specific settings, but any templates and/or images on the older server
are retained.
When you upgrade, TeleForm processing must be halted for the duration of the
TeleForm installation. Any information and images that are currently processing
are retained for processing by the TeleForm installation.See “Upgrade TeleForm”
on page 62 for instructions.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 61
•
•
•

Chapter 4 Upgrade and Migrate

Migrate
Migrating is the process by which you install TeleForm on a “fresh” computer or
network while your current TeleForm system continues to process documents.
Once the new system is ready, you move your TeleForm settings from the older
system to the new one. To move the information, you take a “snapshot” of the
older system and then apply it to the TeleForm10.5 installation.
Any data and images that are being processed by the older system when the
snapshot is taken are not captured.
See “Migrate TeleForm” on page 65 for instructions.

Upgrade TeleForm
Upgrading to 10.5 from an existing TeleForm system is a six-step process:
1. “Check Your Current Version” on page 62
2. “Check Your System Requirements” on page 63
3. “Stop TeleForm Processing” on page 63
4. “Back Up Data” on page 63
5. “Install TeleForm 10.5 to Your Existing TeleForm Server” on page 64
6. “Install TeleForm Workstations” on page 64

Check Your Current Version
You can directly upgrade to TeleForm 10.0 and later from the following older
versions of TeleForm:

•
•
62 ••
•
•



v8



v8.1



v8.2



9.0



9.1

TeleForm Administration Guide

Upgrade TeleForm

Check Your System Requirements
Even if you are currently running a version of TeleForm that can be directly
upgraded to 10.5, you must be sure that your server, workstations, and network
protocol meet the system requirements for 10.0 and later. See “System
Requirements” on page 40 for detailed information.
If your existing server hardware does not meet the minimum system requirements
for 10.5, you should migrate instead of upgrading. See “Migrate TeleForm” on
page 65 for instructions on migrating.
It is possible to upgrade the server and then install 10.5 to new workstations, in
which case you lose any workstation-specific settings but your templates and
images remain (because they are stored on the server).

Stop TeleForm Processing
Stop all TeleForm processes and services.

IMPORTANT To perform a direct upgrade, you MUST be
able to stop TeleForm processing COMPLETELY.

If you cannot stop processing for the time needed to install TeleForm to your
server and workstation, you should migrate to a a fresh TeleForm system instead
of directly upgrading.

Back Up Data
After you have stopped all TeleForm applications, you should back up the
Pervasive server used for your existing TeleForm application, as well as the
TeleForm server itself. This step is a precaution in case of a major error during the
upgrade installation. In the unlikely event of an error, you can follow the
instructions in “Migrate TeleForm” on page 65. During the migration process you
can restore your backed-up settings.
1. Run tfmigutl.exe, located in the root folder of your existing TeleForm
system.
2. The Migration Utility dialog box opens:

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 63
•
•
•

Chapter 4 Upgrade and Migrate

3. Choose Save snapshot from the Operation drop-down list.
4. Select all of the items in the Categories display pane.
5. Click Start.
6. You are prompted to define the name and location for the snapshot file. This
snapshot is saved as a ZIP file.
7. After the file has been saved, click Close on the Migration Utility.

Install TeleForm 10.5 to Your Existing TeleForm Server
Install TeleForm 10.5. Follow the instructions found in “Run the Setup Program”
on page 54.

NOTE Autonomy recommends that you install TeleForm
10.5 to same location as your existing TeleForm system.

Install TeleForm Workstations
Run the Setup.exe program, found in your new 10.5 TeleForm\Install\
Workstation folder, as described on “Install Workstations” on page 57. You can
install 10.5 directly over existing TeleForm workstations or to new workstations.
If you install 10.5 to new workstations, you should remove the older version of
TeleForm from the older workstations.

•
•
64 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Migrate TeleForm

Migrate TeleForm
As described earlier, migrating involves installing TeleForm on a clean server and
workstations, then moving the settings from your older TeleForm system to the
new installation. Data and images that are in-process on the existing system when
you switch to the new one are not retained by the snapshot that captures the
settings from the existing system.
NOTE Migrating from an older TeleForm system to
TeleForm 10.5 shares some of the same steps as
upgrading.

To migrate to TeleForm 10.5 from an older TeleForm system
1. “Check Your Current Version” on page 62
2. “Check Your System Requirements” on page 63
3. “Back Up Data” on page 63
4. “Install TeleForm Server” on page 65
5. “Install One TeleForm Workstation” on page 65
6. Restore Settings From Older TeleForm System
7. “Install Remaining TeleForm Workstations” on page 67

Install TeleForm Server
Follow the instructions found in “Run the Setup Program” on page 54 to install
TeleForm to your new server.

Install One TeleForm Workstation
Run the Setup.exe program, found in your new TeleForm\Install\
Workstation\ folder, as described on “Install Workstations” on page 57. You
can install TeleForm10.5 directly over an existing TeleForm workstation or to a
new workstation.
If you install TeleForm10.5 to a new workstation, you should remove the older
version of TeleForm from the older workstations afterwards.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 65
•
•
•

Chapter 4 Upgrade and Migrate

Restore Settings From Older TeleForm System
1. Run tfmigutl.exe from the TeleForm TeleForm10.5 workstation you
installed in Step 6. Do NOT run the Migration Utility from your older version of
TeleForm.
2. The following dialog box opens:

3. Choose Restore from snapshot from the Operation drop-down list.
4. Select all of the items in the Categories display pane.
5. Click Start.
6. You are prompted to select the snapshot file. This snapshot is saved as a ZIP
file. Select the snapshot file you saved earlier and click Open.

7. After the snapshot settings have been extracted to your TeleForm10.5 system,
click Close on the Migration Utility.

•
•
66 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Migrate TeleForm

Install Remaining TeleForm Workstations
Run the Setup.exe program, found in your new TeleForm\Install\
Workstation\ folder, as described on “Install Workstations” on page 57. You
can install TeleForm10.5 directly over existing TeleForm workstations or to new
workstations.
If you install TeleForm10.5 to new workstations, you should remove the older
version of TeleForm from the older workstations afterwards.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 67
•
•
•

Chapter 4 Upgrade and Migrate

•
•
68 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide


Connect Modules to Multiple
TeleForm Systems

CHAPTER 5

This chapter describes how to connect modules to multiple TeleForm systems.
Although this option is available to all customers, it may be particularly useful in
the following situations:


You have a separate test or development TeleForm system and a production
TeleForm system. When you are testing modifications, rather than devoting
modules full-time to the test system, you can target it with a particular set of
modules. When the new or modified options are ready for production, it's easy
to switch the modules back to the production system.



You have multiple production systems and your Verifier operators are not
running at peak efficiency on one or more of them. The Verifier operators can
be instructed to connect to another system when appropriate.

This chapter includes the following sections:


Configured Per Module



TeleForm System dialog box



Batch Routing

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 69
•
•
•

Chapter 5 Connect Modules to Multiple TeleForm Systems

Configured Per Module
This feature must be enabled for each individual module that needs the ability to
connect to multiple systems.
NOTE Configuring multiple systems using the Select
TeleForm System dialog box on a Verifier station does NOT
automatically give a Reader module on a different
workstation the option to connect to the same systems.

CAUTION If you switch Reader stations between TeleForm
systems, Autonomy recommends that you do NOT switch
any Readers that are configured to perform critical tasks,
such as Batch commit.

TeleForm System dialog box
This dialog box can be used to connect to a TeleForm system and to add or
remove TF systems.
By default, all TeleForm installations have a System Count of 1. To add systems,
see “Add a TeleForm System” on page 71.

Name
Shows the name of each system currently configured. These systems can be
added by clicking the button.

•
•
70 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

TeleForm System dialog box

Directory
Shows the TeleForm Server directory.
+ (plus) Button
Click this button to add a new TeleForm system to the list. The Add New System
dialog box opens, which allows you to specify the new system.
- (minus) Button
This button deletes the currently selected system from the TELEFORM.INI file.
You are prompted to confirm the decision.
Make this the default
Specifies the default TeleForm system. Only one system listed in the Select
TeleForm System dialog box can be the default.
Only show this dialog if <Ctrl> + <Alt> keys are pressed at startup
When this option is enabled, the Select TeleForm System dialog box opens only
when an operator presses the CTRL and ALT keys simultaneously and
immediately after launching the module on the current workstation.
If this option is disabled, the Select TeleForm System dialog box opens
automatically when the module is launched.

Add a TeleForm System
This system does not need to be a fresh installation. It could be a TeleForm
system that has been in service for some time, but that has never been connected
to the module you are currently working on.
To add a TeleForm system
1. Start the TeleForm module.
2. Immediately press the CTRL and ALT keys simultaneously.
3. The Select TeleForm System dialog box opens.
4. Click the + button.
5. The Add New System dialog box opens.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 71
•
•
•

Chapter 5 Connect Modules to Multiple TeleForm Systems

6. Specify the Name and Directory (TeleForm Server Directory) of the new
TeleForm system.
7. Click OK.
8. The new system is listed on the Select TeleForm System dialog box.
9. Repeat for any other TeleForm modules that need the ability to connect to
multiple systems.

Batch Routing
If you connect a single Scan Station to multiple TeleForm systems, you may
experience problems with batches intended for one system being routed to the
other system. The problem can occur when the batches are saved to the Local
Batch Directory (the Workstation Base Batch Directory entry in the workstation INI
file) and are not accepted by the Scan Station operator before the module is
switched to a second TeleForm system.
Depending on the settings used by the incorrect TeleForm system, these batches
may have serious identification, recognition, and/or export failures.
The default configuration of TeleForm does not use the Local Batch Directory. You
must manually configure a TeleForm system to create batches in this directory on
a workstation. Ordinarily batches are saved to a batch directory on the TeleForm
Server.
There are two solutions:


•
•
72 ••
•
•

Ensure that all Scan Station operators accept (or delete) all batches from the
local batch directory before switching to the other TeleForm system.

TeleForm Administration Guide

Batch Routing



Use the TeleForm Database Utilities program (DBUTIL) to set the batch
numbers for System1 to a range that does not overlap the batch numbers for
System2.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 73
•
•
•

Chapter 5 Connect Modules to Multiple TeleForm Systems

•
•
74 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide


Manage Licenses

CHAPTER 6

This chapter provides instructions on managing the license codes that control how
many workstations your TeleForm system can use and what modules can be run
on those workstations.


Introduction to License Codes



Using License Manager

Introduction to License Codes
When you installed TeleForm, you entered a license code that enabled at least
one of the TeleForm Designer, Reader and Verifier modules.
The license code controls:


Your base license, which determines what version and platform (Desktop,
Enterprise, or Workgroup) you are running.



How many TeleForm modules you can run.



What type of TeleForm modules you can run.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 75
•
•
•

Chapter 6 Manage Licenses

Licensed Modules
The core TeleForm modules are restricted by a license. You cannot run Designer,
Reader, Verifier, Scan Station, or AutoMerge Publisher if you do not have a
license that enables those modules. These modules also require the TeleForm
License Service to be running.
Although TeleForm Enterprise can run Reader and AutoMerge Publisher as
services, those services are included in the licensed number of modules.

Unlicensed Modules
Other portions of TeleForm, such as License Manager itself, Database Utilities,
Stats, Monitor, and the TeleForm documentation, are not licensed. They can run
even if the TeleForm License Service is stopped and are not restricted by a
license code.

Licensed Options
Many TeleForm options are also controlled by license codes. These options are
not always “modules.” Some of them simply expand the capabilities of the core
modules.
The Remote Capture Option, Web Capture Option, and MediClaim Option are
controlled by license codes. Many Image Export Connect Agents are also
license-controlled.

Using License Manager
TeleForm License Manager is a utility that helps you maintain and upgrade your
TeleForm licenses.

View License Information
The License Summary section of the License Manager dialog box lists:

•
•
76 ••
•
•



Product (Enterprise or Workgroup)



Number of licenses for each licensed TeleForm module. For example, your
license may specify 5 Readers, which means you can run as many as 5
instances of Reader.



Number of workstations on which TeleForm modules can run.

TeleForm Administration Guide

Using License Manager

To view your license information
1. From the Windows Start menu Applications > TeleForm > Utilities >
License Manager.
2. The License Manager application opens.
3. Click File > License Info.
4. The License Manager dialog box opens. A summary of the installed licenses
is shown in the License Information section.

View License Specifics
To view the details of a license
1. In the License Manager dialog box, double-click a license. The License
Specifics dialog box opens.
2. To close the License Specifics dialog box, click OK.
3. Click Close on the License Manager dialog box.

Delete a License
In certain instances, you may need to remove a TeleForm license from your
system. Delete a TeleForm license only under the advice of an Autonomy Cardiff
Technical Support Representative, or your Autonomy Cardiff sales representative.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 77
•
•
•

Chapter 6 Manage Licenses

To delete a TeleForm license
1. Start TeleForm License Manager.
2. Click File > License Info.
3. The License Manager dialog box opens.
4. Select a license and click the Delete button.
5. You are prompted to confirm your decision.
 Click Yes to delete the license.
 Click No to retain the license.

6. Click Close on the License Manager dialog box.

Add a New License Code
1. Start TeleForm License Manager.
2. In the File menu, select Add License.
OR
In the License Manager dialog box, click Add.
3. Type the new license code in the Add License Code dialog box.
4. Click OK.

•
•
78 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide


TeleForm Remote Verification

CHAPTER 7

Autonomy has certified TeleForm for use within a Citrix environment, so that you
can use TeleForm for remote verification.
This chapter describes what you need to get started with the TeleForm Designer
and Verifier modules in a Citrix XenApp environment. It includes the following
sections:


Overview



System Requirements



Installation Process



Upgrade TeleForm on Citrix XenApp

For information about Citrix XenApp, refer to the Citrix documentation.

Overview
TeleForm is supported for Citrix XenApp, a thin client and web browser-based
application delivery system with robust features.
Combining Citrix XenApp and TeleForm allows the XenApp Server to host a
number of sessions concurrently while clients execute TeleForm Designer and
Verifier remotely.
With the Citrix ICA Client, off-site users can run TeleForm through a client window
with the look and feel of a local TeleForm session.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 79
•
•
•

Chapter 7 TeleForm Remote Verification

System Requirements
To run TeleForm with Citrix XenApp, you need the following:
XenApp Server (MFS)

Refer to XenApp documentation for a list of supported
server configurations.

TeleForm Server (TFS)

See “System Requirements” on page 40 for information.
The TeleForm Server cannot be the same machine as the
XenApp Server.

Citrix ICA Client

ICA Client installed on a workstation that runs TeleForm via
the MFS.

TeleForm requirements are subject to change. Consult our online wizard for the
latest information.
To find the online wizard
1. Go to https://customers.autonomy.com/support/login.jsp and log into the
customer service site.
2. If you do not already have a support account, you are prompted to create one.
3. After you have logged in and the Support Index page is shown, open the
Wizards tab.
4. Under the TeleForm section, click the OS Wizard.
TIP You can use Citrix Web Interface Management to
ensure that workstations have the most recent version of the
XenApp client when logging in to the XenApp server using a
Web browser.

Installation Process
The installation process can be broken into several steps:
1. “Install Software Prerequisites” on page 81
2. “Log Off Users” on page 81
3. “Install TeleForm to XenApp Server” on page 81

•
•
80 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Installation Process

Install Software Prerequisites
Make sure the following steps have been taken before proceeding with the
installation:
XenApp Server
Microsoft Windows 2003 Server, 2008, or 2008 R2 should be installed first.
TIP Autonomy recommends the following configuration:
 A Raid 5 drive array
 3 active disks
 1 hot spare disk
Set the system page file to 2.5 times the amount of physical
memory. Locate the system page file on the data drive.

TeleForm Server
Your TeleForm Server should be configured and running on the LAN before you
begin the TeleForm/Citrix XenApp installation.

IMPORTANT Citrix XenApp and TeleForm are not certified
to run on the same Server.

Log Off Users
Before beginning the installation procedure, make sure that no users are logged
on to the XenApp Server. Any open or disconnected sessions must be terminated.

Install TeleForm to XenApp Server
To install TeleForm to the XenApp server
1. Use Add/Remove Programs to install TeleForm Enterprise Workstation on
XenApp.
Add/Remove Programs places the computer in install mode and returns the
computer to execute mode when the installation is complete.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 81
•
•
•

Chapter 7 TeleForm Remote Verification

IMPORTANT The TeleForm version that you install on the XenApp
server must exactly match the version of TeleForm installed on the
Enterprise system. You must install all TeleForm Service Packs to
match the TeleForm Enterprise Server before you finish the
Administrator Install.
You can use the Add/Remove Programs method multiple times if you
clear the Finish dialog too soon, or if the server needs to restart.

TIP You can also switch the terminal server to install mode using the
change user /install command. This method ensures that the
software is available to all users after installation.
After the installation is complete, you must set the terminal server back
to runtime mode using the change user /execute command.
For more information about this command, refer to the following
Microsoft knowledge base article (especially the Additional Notes at the
bottom of the article): http://support.microsoft.com/kb/q186504/

2. During the install, when asked if you would like to include Scanning Support
you must select No. Scanning is not supported through Citrix and can cause
problems in some cases when included.
3. When the Finish Admin Install dialog box opens, wait for the installation
process to complete, then click Finish.
4. Restart the XenApp server.

Upgrade TeleForm on Citrix XenApp
To upgrade TeleForm on Citrix XenApp
1. Install the latest TeleForm build or patch to the TeleForm Server.
2. Install the latest TeleForm build or patch to the XenApp Server via Add/
Remove Programs, as described on “Install TeleForm to XenApp Server” on
page 81.

•
•
82 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Administration

Administration
Before users can use TeleForm modules through XenApp, you must give them
access rights to:


the TeleForm executable directory on the XenApp server



the Application Data\Cardiff\TeleForm directory where user
configuration files are stored

Citrix Delivery Services Console
The Delivery Services Console publishes and maintains applications on XenApp
servers. You install published applications on a Citrix server and configure them
for multi-user access from remote workstations.
Publishing an application allows a user at an ICA Client workstation to start the
application without knowing details of the application's directory, executable name
or server name.

Confirm the Session Station Name
Every instance of TeleForm Workstation running in XenApp must have a unique
session name. You can determine if the current session has a valid station name
stored in the USER.DAT file.
To determine your current session name
1. Launch the TeleForm Verifier through a Citrix client.
2. access the Utilities > Configuration window.
Your station name is displayed in the title bar. For example:

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 83
•
•
•

Chapter 7 TeleForm Remote Verification

Use TeleForm Control Center to Delete Stations
To remove unwanted configuration settings from the TeleForm Enterprise System
using the TeleForm Control Center, right click the station and then click Delete
Station.

TeleForm License Errors
Your Enterprise system must have one TeleForm license available for each
concurrent TeleForm Verifier, independent of how the Verifier is connected. If you
do not have enough licenses, you receive an error indicating that no license is
available. See “Manage Licenses” on page 75 for more information on license
codes.

•
•
84 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide


Security

CHAPTER 8

This chapter discusses the security options available to both TeleForm Enterprise
and TeleForm Workgroup users.


Overview



Purpose of Security



Security Rights



Enable Security



Create a New User



Configure Users



Security Groups



Log In



Switch Security Providers

Overview
You can enable Security from TeleForm Control Center. You can also access
security from most TeleForm modules, if you have the required rights.
Administrators can set up different operators with different levels of access to your
TeleForm system, ensuring that less-trained users do not have access to critical
functions.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 85
•
•
•

Chapter 8 Security

TeleForm provides pre-defined groups with default rights to simplify the process.
For example, users who belong to the Designer group automatically have the right
to run and configure Designer.
Administrators can also create custom groups. Specific rights can be enabled or
disabled by the Administrator for particular needs. Enabling one right can enable
other required rights. Disabling a right, in turn, disables rights that require it.

Enterprise Security Options
TeleForm Enterprise supports several security options that are not supported in
TeleForm Workgroup.


External Security Providers. Enterprise customers can take advantage of
external security providers. Enterprise systems rely on the improved internal
TeleForm security protocol.



Copying User Rights. Copying user rights from one operator to another is
now faster and easier. As your system grows, you can simply apply tested,
proven user rights to new operators.



Image Security. This feature is a Job-level setting and thus applies only to
batches. When enabled, the batch images are saved to subdirectories in the
TELEFORM\BAT\ folder. For example, you might set up a “Loan” subdirectory
in the BAT folder. All batches processed with the “Loan” job setting would be
saved to subdirectories in the “Loan” subfolder. Your system administrator
would be responsible for setting the Windows access rights to the “Loan”
subfolder so that unauthorized users could not view the images.

Purpose of Security
TeleForm Security serves several purposes:

•
•
86 ••
•
•



Restrict Access. Since Enterprise and Workgroup systems use multiple
operators and workstations, the problem of an operator gaining inappropriate
access to other modules is somewhat lessened. However, the Security
function does allow you to specify exactly what tasks an operator can perform
within the various TeleForm modules. Many operators should not be given the
permission to delete image files or see batches created by Security Groups to
which they do not belong, even though they should be allowed to run the
TeleForm modules that perform these tasks.



Track. TeleForm's statistical reports are more valuable when broken down by
operator rather than raw totals, and operator information comes directly from
the security log-in function. By enabling Security, your reports show how each
operator is performing.

TeleForm Administration Guide

Security Rights



Increase Efficiency. Security's payoff in operator efficiency is perhaps its
most powerful application. By using a combination of Security and the
Auto-Batch Assign function, you can feed your Verifier operators with tasks
for which they are best suited, thereby improving overall accuracy and
throughput.



Route. Security lets TeleForm know which operators are working, which in
turn enables the routing feature. When security is enabled, a Verifier operator
can forward a problematic item to another operator or to a supervisor. The
supervisor role is defined in a user's security rights, so without security you
have neither a name nor an organizational target for routing problematic
items.



Batch Security. This Enterprise-only feature is a Job-level setting and thus
applies only to batches. When enabled, the batch files are saved to
subdirectories in the TELEFORM\BAT folder.Your system administrator would
be responsible for setting the Windows access rights to the subfolder so that
unauthorized users could not view the files.

Security Rights
Enabling the proper security rights is a key aspect of managing an Enterprise
system. Another important consideration is HOW you assign rights to users: at the
individual or group level. See the following topics for detailed information:


Available Security Rights



Group Rights and Individual Rights

Available Security Rights
Security Rights are organized into the following categories:


Form & Image Access



Verify (Basic)



Verify (Advanced)



Verify (QC))



Evaluate



Design



Scan



Utilities

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 87
•
•
•

Chapter 8 Security



Administration

Form & Image Access
These rights define access to form and document files in multiple TeleForm
modules. Some of these rights are not useful unless rights in other categories are
also enabled. For example, the Create right does NOT automatically select the
Run Designer right in the Design category:


Create



Open



Modify



Delete



Import/Export



View Images



Print & Save Images

Verify (Basic)
These rights give a user the ability to perform verification. They can be contrasted
to the Verify (Advanced) rights, which allow a user configure the Verifier module
and other more complex tasks.


Run Verifier



Use Batch Management



Use Image Management



Use Auto-Assign



Use Form Selection



Use Template Mode



Use Field Mode



Use Character Mode



Use Capture Mode

Verify (Advanced)
These rights allow a Verifier operator to use more powerful features than the
Verify (Basic) rights. In most cases, an advanced Verifier operator should have all
of the Basic rights along with whatever Advanced rights are appropriate.

•
•
88 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Security Rights



Configure Verifier



Supervisor



Override Validations



Delete Images



See Batches of Other Groups



Process Research Queue

Verify (QC)
These rights allow a Verifier operator to use the Quality Control features of
Verifier. In most cases, a QC Verifier operator should have all of the Basic and
Advanced rights along with whatever QC rights are appropriate.


Use Classification QC



Use Image QC



Use Extraction QC



Use Anytime QC (edit)



Use Anytime QC (view)



Add items in QC



Classify/Unclassify

Evaluate
These rights apply primarily to TeleForm Reader, although Recognition Sets can
also be configured in Designer.


Run Reader



Configure Reader



Configure Template Sets



Evaluate Images

Design
These rights apply strictly to TeleForm Designer.


Run Designer



Configure Designer



Debug Scripts

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 89
•
•
•

Chapter 8 Security



Shape Library (Add/Modify)



Run IDR Designer

Scan
These rights apply strictly to the Scan Station. Other methods of creating a batch,
such as Automated Batch Creation, are not constrained by these rights.


Run Scan Station



Configure Scan Station:



Create Batch



Discard Batches After Accept



Configure Scanners



Configure Jobs

Utilities
These rights provide access to accessory TeleForm modules.


Run Viewer



Run Control Center



Run Statistics Reports



Run AutoMerge Publisher



Configure AutoMerge Publisher

Administration
These rights allow access to administrative programs and tasks. A user who is
defined as an Administrator via the Administrator checkbox on the Rights tab of
the User Configuration dialog box enjoys additional rights that are not individually
specified and cannot be selected from the Administration category. These rights
are hidden to prevent non-Administrator users from accidentally being given
certain permissions.

•
•
90 ••
•
•



Run Monitor



Purge Statistics Log



Configure Monitor



Configure Advanced Settings



View Log/Tracking

TeleForm Administration Guide

Security Rights



Run Service Monitor



Configure Service Monitor

Group Rights and Individual Rights
You can assign Security rights to a TeleForm user on an individual or group level.
You can also use both methods in combination, assigning some rights to a user on
an individual basis but using Security Group membership to define others.
The needs of your organization determine the best way to assign rights.


Group Rights. Assigning rights through Security Group memberships makes
it easy to change rights for multiple operators. change the rights that pertain to
a Security Group and all the members immediately have the new permissions,
with no need to update individual rights. See “Group Rights” on page 92.



Individual Rights. Group rights may be too broad for your needs. Certain
users may require unique rights that do not lend themselves to a specific
Security Group. See “Individual Rights” on page 91.



Group and Individual Rights. You can use both methods in combination.
Assign rights that are unlikely to need modification through Security Group
membership, then change other rights on the individual level.

Rights Structure
Rights, both individual and group, are organized in a tree structure. Individual
rights are displayed in the left pane. Aggregate rights are displayed in the right
pane. Use the left pane to modify user rights.
Enabling the rights for a branch also enables the rights for all the nodes contained
in that branch. You may enable or disable the individual nodes to customize the
rights for a given operator, but disabling a right that other rights require disables
the associated rights. Conversely, enabling a right that requires other rights,
enables those other rights.
There are three states for each aggregate right: some rights
have been
enabled; all rights
have been enabled; or no rights
have been enabled.

Individual Rights
Rights assigned to the user as an individual pertain only to that user and are
retained despite any changes in that user's Security Group memberships.
For example, You give “Pete” all the Designer rights as an individual and also add
him to the Designer Security group. If you removed him from the Designer
Security group, he would still have all the available Designer rights, since they
were assigned to him as an individual. The Aggregate Rights pane of the User

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 91
•
•
•

Chapter 8 Security

Configuration > Rights dialog box would show that Pete has all the Designer
rights; the pane would only show that he did not have those rights if you removed
them from him at the individual level.

Group Rights
When you assign a user to a Security Group, that user immediately enjoys all the
rights that belong to that group. Even if the user is assigned none of these rights
on an individual basis, that user is allowed to perform all the tasks that his or her
Security Group memberships allow.
The Individual Rights pane of the User Configuration > Rights dialog box is never
updated based on group memberships. It's possible for a user to have NO
individual rights but to belong to the Administrator Security Group and thus enjoy
ALL of the possible TeleForm permissions.
For example, You assign Heather, Pete, and Sam to the Scanners > Advanced
Security group. You never enable any Scanner rights, Basic or Advanced, for
them on an individual level. If you change the rights that pertain to the Scanners >
Advanced Security group, there is no need to update any group member's
individual scanning rights. Their scanning rights are completely contained within
their Security Group membership.

Enable Security
To enable security
1. Launch TeleForm Control Center.
2. In the Control Center tree, expand the Configuration Settings branch and
click the Global Settings branch.
3. Double-click the Global System setting. The Global TeleForm Settings dialog
box opens.
4. Select the Security sub-tab.

•
•
92 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Enable Security

5. Check the Enable user security box.
See “Security Providers” on page 93 for information on the Provider option.
IMPORTANT There are no external providers for
security in TeleForm Workgroup. You must run
TeleForm Enterprise to access the Provider option.

6. See “Single Sign-on” on page 95 for information on the Single sign-on option.
7. Remember last login: When security is enabled, this option causes the
TeleForm Login dialog box to remember the name of the last user to login and
places the input focus on the Password field. This option is enabled by
default.
8. Click OK.

Security Providers
NOTE There are no external providers for security in
TeleForm Workgroup. You must run TeleForm
Enterprise to access the Provider option.

When you enable security, you can choose from three Provider options:

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 93
•
•
•

Chapter 8 Security



Internal



LDAP



Windows

Although LDAP and Windows determine the log-in security method, an operator's
rights within TeleForm are always defined by the application's own security
settings. For example, a user may have rights to delete files under Windows, but if
the appropriate Delete rights are not granted through the TeleForm Security
function, that user cannot delete files from within TeleForm.

Internal
This option is the regular TeleForm security method for logging in to the system.

LDAP
Links TeleForm to an existing LDAP protocol. After selecting LDAP in the Provider
list, click the Setup button. The LDAP Provider Setup dialog box configures the
LDAP system that provides external security to TeleForm.
TeleForm works only with Active Directory. No other LDAP directory is supported.
Server

Name of the LDAP Server to be used.

Port

Access port for the LDAP Server.

Group

LDAP Group to which the TeleForm system belongs.

User

Generally, this field does not need to contain any
information. If the User is not specified the credentials for
the user currently logged onto the computer are used. The
only time this information must be provided is if the user
who is logged onto the computer does not have access to
the LDAP Server.
NOTE With LDAP enabled, you must setup TeleForm to
connect with a user who has rights to pull all attributes for
other users. TeleForm cannot work properly if the user only
has Browse rights.

Password

•
•
94 ••
•
•

Generally, this field does not need to contain any
information. If the User and Password are not specified
the credentials for the user currently logged onto the
computer are used. The only time this information must be
provided is if the user who is logged onto the computer
does not have access to the LDAP Server.

TeleForm Administration Guide

Enable Security

Windows
Links TeleForm to an existing LDAP protocol. After selecting Windows in the
Provider list, click the Setup button. The Windows Provider Setup dialog box
allows you to configure the Windows system that provides external security to
TeleForm.
Domain

Name of the Windows domain to be used.

Group

Windows Group to which the TeleForm system belongs.

User

Generally, this field does not need to contain any
information. If the User is not specified the credentials for
the user currently logged onto the computer are used.

Password

Generally, this field does not need to contain any
information. If the User and Password are not specified
the credentials for the user currently logged onto the
computer are used.

Single Sign-on
Single sign-on is available only when security is enabled. It can be used with any
security provider, although the function is somewhat different when used with
TeleForm's internal security rather than LDAP or Windows. The following topics
explain the different aspects of the Single sign-on option:


Internal Security. If you use TeleForm's internal security, Single sign-on
allows a logged-in user to open another TeleForm module without logging in to
that new module. If Single sign-on is not enabled, a user must log into to
each module that is opened on a workstation.



External Security Providers. Using Single sign-on with an external security
provider automatically logs a user into TeleForm modules when that user is
already logged in to the workstation via LDAP or Windows protocols.

NOTE There are no external providers for security in
TeleForm Workgroup.



Error handling. If TeleForm cannot verify that the user is already logged in
through an external security provider or encounters another error, the regular
TeleForm Login dialog box is displayed. Users can log into TeleForm using this
tool.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 95
•
•
•

Chapter 8 Security



Logging out. If a user logs out from a TeleForm module but not from the
workstation, logging into TeleForm again requires the regular TeleForm login
procedure.



Administrator log in. Single sign-on does not log a user in as a TeleForm
administrator. There are two ways to log in as an administrator when Single
sign-on is enabled AND TeleForm is using an external security provider:
 Start a TeleForm module on a workstation with a user name that is not a

valid TeleForm user, then login manually.
 Run TeleForm on a workstation that does have a valid TeleForm user

name, then log off and log back in manually.

Create a New User
The methods used to create new TeleForm users depends on what Security
Provider was selected when you enabled security (“Security Rights” on page 87).


Internal Security



External Security

Internal Security
To create a new user with internal security
1. Launch TeleForm Control Center.
2. In the Control Center tree, expand the Configuration Settings branch and
click the Global Settings branch.
3. Double-click the Security setting. The Security dialog box opens.

•
•
96 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Create a New User

4. To add a new user, right-click in the Users pane and select New User. The
Add New Operator dialog opens.

5. Enter the following information:
 Login Name: The new operator needs to type this name to log into a

TeleForm application.
 Display Name: This name identifies the operator in TeleForm reports.
 Password and Verify Password: A password can be any combination of

letters or numbers, up to 24 characters. Passwords are not case sensitive,
so the words “secret”, “SECRET”, and “sEcReT” are all considered to be
the same.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 97
•
•
•

Chapter 8 Security

6. You may set rights and configuration settings instantly by selecting another
user from the Copy from user drop-list. When this option is selected, you may
choose which settings to copy from the following checkboxes:
 Group Memberships
 Rights
 Configuration Settings

7. Click OK to add the new operator.
8. See “Configure Users” on page 99 for instructions on changing the rights,
group memberships, and display name for a user.

External Security
NOTE There are no external providers for security in
TeleForm Workgroup. You must run TeleForm
Enterprise to use external security.

If your system uses an External Security Provider, you must create a user using
the External Security protocol, then synchronize TeleForm with the external
system.
To create a new user with external security
1. Create new users in the Windows Domain/Group or the LDAP Server/Group.
See your Windows or LDAP documentation for information on creating new
users.
2. Launch TeleForm Control Center.
3. In the Control Center tree, expand the Configuration Settings branch and
click the Global Settings branch.
4. Double-click the Security setting. The Security dialog box opens.
5. Right-click inside the Users window and select Synchronize.

•
•
98 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Configure Users

6. The users you created in the Windows or LDAP system is added to TeleForm.
See “Configure Users” on page 99 for instructions on changing the rights, group
memberships, and display name for a user.

Configure Users
You can configure a user manually, copy the user settings, change the user
information or password, or delete the user.
You can also change a user’s display name and password without modifying the
more important security rights and group memberships.

Manually Configure a User
To manually configure a user
1. Log into a TeleForm module as an administrator.
2. From the Utilities menu, click Security or use Control Center,
Configuration Settings, Global Settings, Security.
3. On the Security dialog box, open the Users tab.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 99
•
•
•

Chapter 8 Security

4. Right-click the operator and select Properties.
5. On the Rights tab of the User Configuration dialog box, define the Rights for
the operator.

6. Open the Memberships tab.

•
•
100 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Configure Users

7. Define the security groups to which the operator belongs.
8. Click OK on the User Configuration dialog box.
9. Click OK on the Security dialog box.

Copy User Settings
To copy user settings
1. Log on to a TeleForm module as an administrator.
2. From the Utilities menu, click Security.
3. On the Security dialog box, open the Users tab.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 101
•
•
•

Chapter 8 Security

4. Right-click the user whose settings you want to change and select Copy
Settings from User....
5. The Copy User Settings dialog box opens.

6. The Copy from user list lets you select an existing user as a “template.”The
check boxes below determine what aspects of the existing user's configuration
profile are be copied. See
7. Click OK on the Copy User Settings dialog box.
8. Click OK on the Security dialog box.

Settings Available for Copying
You can copy any or all of the following settings from an existing user.

•
•
102 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Configure Users



Group Memberships. The user being modified belongs to the same Security
Groups as the copied user.



Rights. The user being modified has the same Security Rights as the copied
user.



Configuration Settings. The user being modified has the same configuration
settings as the copied user.

Change User Info
To change user information
1. Log into a TeleForm module as an administrator.
2. From the Utilities menu, click Security.
3. On the Security dialog box, open the Users tab.

4. Right-click the operator and select Properties.
5. On the User Info tab of the User Configuration dialog box, change the user’s
Display Name. You cannot change the Login Name. To create a new Login
Name for an existing user, you should delete the existing operator and create
a new one.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 103
•
•
•

Chapter 8 Security

Change Password
To change the password of a user
1. Log into a TeleForm module as an administrator.
2. From the Utilities menu, click Security.
3. On the Security dialog box, open the Users tab.

•
•
104 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Configure Users

4. Right-click on the user and select Set Password. The Set Password dialog
opens.

5. Enter and confirm the new password.
6. Click OK.

Delete Users
To delete a user
 Right-click on the Login Name of the user in the user’s list and select Delete.

IMPORTANT There is no confirmation prompt when you
delete a user. The user is deleted instantly.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 105
•
•
•

Chapter 8 Security

Security Groups
The Security Groups function plays an important role in TeleForm Enterprise
systems. It allows you to create groups of users who share the same rights. When
used in conjunction with the Batch Processing and AutoBatch Assign functions,
Security Groups give you precise control over which Verifier operators are allowed
to process a specific batch.
The Security Groups feature can be used to ensure that:


Verifier operators who have not been trained to process (Image QC,
Classification QC, Correction, or Data Review) a specific form, document, or
group of items, are not asked to do so;



Images that contain business-critical information are routed to employees who
have been cleared to see such data;



Personal information collected from and documents (medical history, credit
rating, financial situation) is shown only to approved users.

Batch Security, Not Source Security
The Security Groups function works in conjunction with TeleForm’s Batch
Processing feature to restrict access to batches of images. It cannot prevent
unauthorized access to physical copies of documents, nor to network folders that
store TeleForm data. You should institute policies to restrict access to hard copy
documents and network directories.
Furthermore, if the batch contains items that it should not (that is, if you had
intended to restrict the batch to one group, but it contains items that you did not
want that group to see) the Security Group feature does not prevent them from
viewing the “unauthorized” items. When the batch is created, whether from
scanned documents or items in a directory, you must be sure that the source
pages or images are appropriate for the Security Group to whom the batch is
assigned.
Example
You are a manager of the capture processing department of a large home
appliance manufacturer. Company policy restricts access to prospective sales
information (which could influence stock prices, product pricing, and other critical
factors) to individuals who have been with the company for at least two years.
However, field sales personnel provide warning of future commitments by mailing
Sales Notification to your department.

•
•
106 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Security Groups

To set up security in the example manufacturing business
1. The notification should be given to a scanner operator who has been with the
company for at least two years. This step cannot be controlled by TeleForm,
and must be enforced by a department policy.
2. Enable the Security function for TeleForm, which requires that all your
TeleForm operators log-in when they begin work.
3. Create a Security Group named “Future Sales.”
4. Assign Verifier operators to this group. These operators should also have at
least two years of experience with the company.
5. Set up a batch processing Job named “Future Sales.” This Job must restrict
the handling of “Future Sales” batches to the “Future Sales” Security Group.
This Job can enable any of the Quality Control modes.
6. When the scanner operator starts a new batch of Possible Sales Notification,
he MUST select the “Future Sales” Job.
7. After the Sales Notification are scanned, the batch is proceed to the QC
modes defined by the Job Setting. Only Verifier operators who are logged-in
and belong to the “Future Sales” Security Group can process this batch.

Pre-Defined Security Groups
TeleForm provides the following pre-defined Security Groups:
Group

Rights

Administrators

All rights

All

No rights

Designers

Run and configure Designer, all form and document related rights, all shape
library rights, run and configure Reader, Auto Merge Publisher and Viewer,
evaluate images, configure Recognition Sets, use Form Log.

Scanners - Advanced

Run Scan Station, configure Scan Station, create batches, configure scanners,
configure jobs, print and save images.

Scanners - Basic

Run Scan Station, create batches.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 107
•
•
•

Chapter 8 Security

Group

Rights

Verifiers - Advanced

Run Verifier, Batch Management, Image Management, Auto-assign, Form
select, Form Mode, Field Mode, Character Mode, Capture Mode, QC Modes,
batch image viewing, process research queue, override validations, configure
Verifier, run Image Viewer.

Verifiers - Basic

Run Verifier, Batch Management, Image Management, Auto-assign, Form
select, Form Mode, Field Mode, Character Mode, Capture Mode.

Verifiers - Supervisors

Run Verifier, Batch Management, Image Management, Auto-assign, Form
select, Form Mode, Field Mode, Character Mode, Capture Mode, QC Modes,
batch image viewing, process research queue, override validations, configure
Verifier, run Image Viewer, configure Verifier, delete images, supervisor, purge
statistics log, run statistics reports, run Image Viewer, debug scripts, run Control
Center, run and configure Auto Merge Publisher, run and configure Reader, view
batches of others, configure advanced settings, configure jobs, configure
Recognition Sets, user form log, print and save images.

Create a Security Group
To create a new group
1. Launch TeleForm Control Center.
2. In the Control Center tree, double-click Configuration Settings and click the
Global Settings sub-folder.
3. Double-click Security. The Security dialog box opens.
4. Click on the Groups tab.

•
•
108 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Security Groups

5. Right-click on the Security Groups folder icon and select New group.
6. Type a name for the new group.
NOTE User-defined groups are shown in the Security
Groups tree in black text.
Pre-defined groups are shown in blue text.

7. To set the rights for your new group, right-click on the group name and select
Properties. The Security Groups > Rights tab opens.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 109
•
•
•

Chapter 8 Security

8. Select individual or aggregate rights by clicking on the appropriate nodes.
9. You can rename or delete a user-defined Security Group by right-clicking on it.
10. See “Add Users to a Security Group” on page 110 for instructions on
populating a Security Group.
NOTE Pre-defined Security Groups cannot be
renamed or deleted. You can alter the rights of
predefined groups by right-clicking and selecting
Properties.

Add Users to a Security Group
To add users to a security group
1. From the Groups tab, select group “All”.
2. In the display pane, click on the Login name of the user and drag it onto the
group name.
3. Click on the new group folder to confirm that the user is a member of that
group.
OR
4. From the Users tab, double-click on a user’s Login name.
5. Click the Memberships tab.

•
•
110 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Log In

6. Select the new group from the Groups list.

Log In
If the security option has been enabled, users must log on to the TeleForm
modules to which they have been given access. When a user launches a
TeleForm application, the TeleForm Login dialog opens. If the Remember last
login box was checked on the Global System - Security tab, the Name field is
filled in automatically with the last user to login to this workstation.

If a user’s rights are restricted in a given module, they only have access to those
options that are permitted under their individual and aggregate rights. For
example, if a user has the right to run Designer but no right to delete forms, the
Delete option on the File menu is grayed out.
The current user’s name is displayed at the bottom of the application window.
NOTE If the Single sign-on box was checked on the
Global System > Security tab, a single user on the
workstation may log on once to run any application to which
they have rights. But if multiple users are logged into the
workstation, each user must login to each module, even if all
users currently logged in have rights to the given module.
For example, if User1 has Designer rights and no one else
is logged in to the workstation, User1 can open the
TeleForm Viewer without logging in a second time. If User2
has Advanced Verifier rights and both User1 and User2
are logged in to the same workstation, then both users must
log on to TeleForm Viewer, even though they both have the
rights to run it.

Log on to a Current Session
If a module is already open and you wish to login as another user, you may do so
without having to exit and reopen the program.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 111
•
•
•

Chapter 8 Security

To log on to a current session
1. On the Utilities menu, click Log In. The TeleForm Login dialog box opens.
2. Type your user name in the Name box.
3. Type your password in the Password box and click OK.
4. You are now logged into the module and all actions performed from this
workstation are tracked under your user name.

Change Logon Passwords
Operators may change their password at any time.
To change a logon password
1. Log on using your current password.
2. On the Utilities menu, click Change Password.
3. The Set Password dialog box opens.

4. Type the new password once in the Password box and again in the Confirm
Password box.
NOTE
 A password can be any combination of letters or
numbers, up to 24 characters.
 Passwords are not case sensitive, so the words
secret, SECRET, and sEcReT are all considered to
be the same.

5. Click OK to activate the new password.

Log Off
To log off TeleForm
 click Utilities > Log Off.

•
•
112 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Switch Security Providers

NOTE Logging off from a module does not close that
module.

Switch Security Providers
If needed, you can switch from an external security provider to TeleForm’s internal
security system. You can also switch from internal security to an external provider
or from one external provider to another.
NOTE There are no external providers for security in
TeleForm Workgroup. You must run TeleForm
Enterprise to use external security.

External to Internal
If you switch from Windows or LDAP to TeleForm’s internal security protocol, all
the TeleForm users remain in the system. Rights and Security Group
memberships are retained as well. However, you need to create a new password
for each TeleForm user, since the password link between TeleForm and the
external security provider is no longer active. See “Change Password” on
page 104 for instructions.

Internal to External
If you switch from TeleForm’s internal security protocol to Windows or LDAP, all
users are deleted from the TeleForm user list unless they are mapped to users
provided by the external provider. A mapping interface opens automatically if
necessary:

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 113
•
•
•

Chapter 8 Security

User rights and Security Group memberships are retained, but the TeleForm user
names are renamed if they differ from the names used by the external security
provider.

External to External
To switch from Windows to LDAP or from LDAP to Windows
1. Open the Global TeleForm Settings > Security dialog box.
2. Select the new external security Provider and click the Setup button.
3. See “LDAP” on page 94 and “Windows” on page 95 for instructions on
configuring the security provider connections.

•
•
114 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

PART 2

TeleForm
Customization

This section describes the different customizations available
for TeleForm. It includes the following chapters:


“Remote Capture Option” on page 167. Instructions on
configuring TeleForm to accept batches from Remote
Capture Stations.



“Web Capture Option” on page 179. Instructions on
installing the Web Capture Server and configuring
TeleForm to accept batches from this server.



“Customize Verifier for Your Operators” on page 203.
Customizing the individual Verifier workstations can
substantially increase the efficiency of your system.

Part 2 TeleForm Customization

•
•
116 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide


Change the System
Configuration

CHAPTER 9

This chapter tells you how to set custom options of TeleForm such as the location
of TeleForm directories, the amount of disk space available, character recognition
thresholds, and various other initialization settings.
Most of these settings are controlled using the Global & Local TeleForm
Settings dialog box, which gives you access to the many configuration settings
that define TeleForm's default behavior.


Open the Configuration controls



Global System Tab



Local System tab



Designer Tab



Reader Tab



Merge/Print Tab



Multiuser Features Tab



Configuration Options tab

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 117
•
•
•

Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration

Open the Configuration controls
Some Global and Local TeleForm Settings tabs are not visible if the appropriate
module is not installed on the workstation from which you open the Global and
Local TeleForm Settings dialog box.
To open the Global & Local TeleForm Settings dialog box
1. Start a TeleForm module.
2. From the Utilities menu, select Configuration.
3. The Global and Local TeleForm Settings dialog box opens.
4. Change the needed settings and click Apply.
5. Click OK to save the settings and close the dialog box.

Global System Tab
The Global System tab defines how TeleForm collects statistical information and
what type of form tracking is employed. The statistical information collected can
then be viewed using TeleForm’s reporting function, described in “Analyze Your
System Throughput” on page 295.

•
•
118 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Global System Tab

Global settings apply to every form and workstation. Be careful when you change
a global setting, because it can affect your TeleForm system dramatically.
The Global System tab includes these sub-tabs:


Global System > General Tab



Global System > Security Tab



Global System > Image Storage Tab



Global System > Export Tab



Global System > Read Only Tab



Global System > Resource Checker Tab

Global System > General Tab

Default Language
This value indicates the default language for your TeleForm system. The default
language is used to determine recognition character sets as well as regional
settings for currencies, times and dates. For more information regarding
languages and character sets, see the TeleForm User Guide.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 119
•
•
•

Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration

Minimal tracking
Select Minimal Tracking if you want TeleForm to collect only the most
fundamental statistics. When minimum tracking is used, intermediate records
such as receives, sends or prints are deleted automatically (after the receive or
print is completed). If you are processing a large number of forms per day, you
may want to use Minimal Tracking to maximize the system’s speed.
Disable Minimal tracking if you want TeleForm to collect all statistics. If full
tracking is used, all intermediate records (such as receives, sends, or prints) need
to be purged or deleted manually. This is the default setting.

Stall time
This value specifies the time allowed to pass before TeleForm Monitor detects one
of the TeleForm programs has stalled. The default is 5 minutes (300 seconds).
TeleForm Reader can cause invalid stall warnings if the Stall time is not long
enough. if you set this time to 1 minute and you have forms that take 2 minutes to
evaluate or print, Monitor reports that Reader is stalled even though it is actually
evaluating a form. Set the Stall time large enough to accommodate such cases.

Lock timeout
The period before an attempt to lock a file or record times out. Type a value, from
1 to 60 seconds. The default value is 20 seconds.

WYSIWYG Text Options
The WYSIWYG text options can be updated to change the way your text boxes,
field titles and labels are shown on your form in the Designer workspace and
when they are printed.

•
•
120 ••
•
•



Use fax as formatting device: Your default fax server is used to control the
formatting of text on forms. Incompatible with a selection of Use printer as
formatting device.



Use printer as formatting device: Your default printer is used to control the
formatting of text on forms. Incompatible with a selection of Use fax as
formatting device.



Enable for Pre v4.0 forms (labels and titles): Incompatible with a selection
of Disable for all forms.



Disable for all forms (labels and titles): Incompatible with a selection of
Enable for Pre v4.0 forms.



Use fixed character positioning in text fields: This option can be useful
when you are designing a form with fonts that are not supported by TeleForm,

TeleForm Administration Guide

Global System Tab

such as postscript fonts. By enabling this option, you allow Designer to assign
fixed spacing values for these fonts so they can be seen more clearly.


Font size modification: This option can be useful when you are designing a
form with fonts that are not supported by TeleForm, such as postscript fonts.
By enabling this option, you allow Designer to assign fixed size values for
these fonts so they can be seen more clearly.

Collect Verifier Statistics
When enabled, your TeleForm Statistics module collects statistics on Verifier
performance and usage. You can then use this data to generate charts for
evaluating your Verifier operators.

Global System > Security Tab
This tab controls the TeleForm security protocol.
Enterprise Security
Enterprise security is a complex subject. For detailed information on setting up
security for an Enterprise system, see “Security” on page 85.
Workgroup Security
TeleForm Workgroup offers only internal security. See the following paragraphs
for information on the available settings.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 121
•
•
•

Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration

Enable user security
Click this checkbox to turn on user security. For details regarding security settings,
see “Enable Security” on page 92.

Provider
TeleForm Workgroup provides internal security only. See “Enable Security” on
page 92 for TeleForm Enterprise security options.

Single sign-on
If you select this option, a single operator on a workstation only needs to log on
once.

Remember last login
If you select this option, TeleForm automatically fills in the name of the last user to
log on in the TeleForm Login dialog box when a new module is opened or when
the Login command is started from an already-open module.

Global System > Image Storage Tab

Internal storage format
Defines the graphic format for stored form images:

•
•
122 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Global System Tab



Cardiff Image Format



DCX



TIFF Uncompressed



TIFF Group 3 ID (Mod Huffman)



TIFF Group 3 Fax



TIFF Group 4



TIFF Packbits

JPEG Compression Quality
This setting determines the quality of JPEG files relative to their size
(compression). Values closer to 1 result in smaller files of lesser quality. Values
closer to 100 result in larger files of higher quality. The default value is 90.

Backup directory
Defines where archived images are stored. By default, archived images are stored
in the BAK directory.

NonForm image directory
Defines where NonForm images are stored after processing. If this field is blank,
NonForm images are stored in the default directory.

Image zone format
Defines the file type for saved Image Zones. The default value is TIF. Acceptable
formats:


BMP



DCX



PCX



TIFF Group 3 Fax



TIFF Group 3 ID (Mod Huffman)



TIFF Group 4



TIFF Packbits



TIFF Uncompressed

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 123
•
•
•

Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration

Save without processing
When saving Image Zone images during evaluation, you can save the image
without the preprocessing. This option is disabled by default.

Treat PDF as color
When checked, TeleForm stores PDF files in color.

Resolution
You can choose to store PDF files at 200 or 300 DPI. This setting is not dependent
on the Treat PDF as color option.

Global System > Export Tab

Export/Commit retries
This setting allows you to change the number of times the Reader automatically
retries a batch commit or non-batch export if the commit/export fails.

•
•
124 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Global System Tab

Maximum field name length
Sets a limit on the length of Field IDs for data entry fields. If you use primarily one
database format for all of your exports, form merges and field lookups, the value
of this parameter should reflect the field name length limit for that format. Type a
value, from 1 to 127. The default value is 30.

Minimum VARCHAR length
If you are exporting data to a VARCHAR format, this setting defines the minimum
allowed length for the data exported from any one data entry field or virtual field.

Choice field separator
This value is used to separate the choices in a multiple-choice Choice Field. It is
independent of the separator used to separate each field in the record.

Don't allow a batch to be committed until it is in the 'Ready to be
committed' state
This option was known as the “strict commit rule” in previous versions of
TeleForm. When enabled, it prevents any batch that is not “Ready to be
committed” from being committed, even if a supervisor attempts to override the
batch status.

When mapping fields, only allow compatible types
This setting affects the Fields tab of the Auto Export Setup dialog box. When
enabled, you can only map form fields to database fields that are compatible with
the data collected in the form field. When disabled, you can map form fields to
database fields that are not strictly compatible with the data collected in the form
field.

Global System > Read Only Tab
This tab shows the currently enabled directories for various TeleForm functions.
This tab reflects any changes that have been made to the default configuration.
These settings cannot be altered.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 125
•
•
•

Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration

Global System > Resource Checker Tab
This tab controls the monitoring and warning options for disk and memory space.
The Resource Checker is automatically displayed in open TeleForm applications
when there is insufficient disk or memory space, with the thresholds determined
by the settings on this tab.
The Resource Checker is also used to warn users of a cluster server failure
event. Cluster servers are supported only for Enterprise systems. There are no
settings on the Global System > Resource Checker tab that affect the function
of the Resource Checker in regard to cluster server events.

•
•
126 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Global System Tab

Option
This list specifies what happens if either the Disk level or the Memory level are
not met:


Warn and retry. An insufficient resources warning message opens in all open
TeleForm applications. TeleForm automatically checks the levels against the
thresholds at the Retry interval. If the user clicks Close, the application shuts
down. No other tasks can be initiated on the application while the warning/
check process is underway.



Warn. A warning message opens in all open TeleForm applications stating
that the threshold has been exceeded. No other tasks can be performed in the
applications until the user acknowledges the warning message. TeleForm
automatically checks the levels against the thresholds 30 seconds later. The
user can use that time to perform other tasks, such as shutting down
applications or freeing up resources.



Ignore. No warning message is displayed and no new check of the levels
performed. An audible beep is generated each time the check fails. In Reader
and AutoMerge Publisher, a low memory/disk space message is written to the
log.



Close when idle. TeleForm attempts to close any module that is idle when the
level is not met. An idle module is defined as a module which is performing no
tasks. The type of shut down that occurs depends on the module:

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 127
•
•
•

Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration

 Modules that require user confirmation to close (Designer, Verifier, and

Scan Station) generates a prompt asking the user to confirm the
shutdown.
 Modules that do not require user confirmation (Reader and AutoMerge

Publisher) automatically shut down without any intervention by the user.
These modules do not close in the middle of a task, but close as soon as
the task is completed. The batch merge feature, if enabled, treats all the
jobs in the batch as a single task, so an AutoMerge Publisher station could
conceivably remain open for some time after the automatic shutdown is
triggered.

Check every _ seconds
The time interval at which TeleForm checks the disk and memory levels.
Default

30

Range

5-300

Disk level
When TeleForm finds that there is not at least this much free disk space available,
it performs the action specified in the Option list.
Default

200

Range

20-20000

Memory level
When TeleForm finds that there is not at least this much free memory space
available, it performs the action specified in the Option list.
Default

50

Range

5-1000

Retry
If you specify Warn and retry in the Option list, this field determines how long
after the original attempt the retry is performed.

•
•
128 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Local System tab

Local System tab
The Local System tab defines how the specific TeleForm workstation on which
you are viewing the Global & Local TeleForm Settings dialog box functions. The
functions controlled by the Local System tab are not specific to a certain
TeleForm module, such as Designer or Reader, but are common to every module
that is installed on this workstation.



Disable audible alerts. Turns off warning beeps for TeleForm modules.



Disable fax capabilities. Makes the TeleForm workstation capable or
incapable of transmitting and receiving faxes directly. This option has no effect
on hard-copy faxes that are scanned into TeleForm.



Form cache size. This setting determines the maximum number of forms that
can be stored in the form cache. The default value is 4, and the allowed range
is 1-10.



ODBC connection cache size. This setting defines how many ODBC
connections TeleForm keeps open simultaneously on this workstation.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 129
•
•
•

Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration

Designer Tab
The Designer tab controls functions specific to TeleForm Designer. It includes
these sub-tabs:


Designer > Local Tab



Designer > Advanced Tab



Designer > Defaults Tab

Designer > Local Tab
This tab defines how Designer works if it is launched on the local workstation.

Create a “New” form at startup
When enabled, a blank Traditional form is created every time Designer is
launched.

Sticky cursors
Retains the last Shape tool that was used. For example, if you click the Choice
Field toolbar button and create a Choice Field, the cursor is still the Choice Field
tool when you exit the Choice Field dialog box.

•
•
130 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Designer Tab

Show full grid
This option fills the entire workspace grid with dots. It should only be used on
powerful computers.

Show Form ID and state in title
With this option enabled, the Designer workspace title bar displays the Form ID
and the form activation state (Draft or Activated).

Existing form background color
This button allows you to select the default background color for Existing forms.
The default Existing form background color is gray.

Spell check language
Defines what “root” language dictionary is used to check the spelling on your
forms. This list defines only the spell checking dictionary, not any Recognition Aid
dictionaries. The default is English (American).

Spell Checking Options
The Options button launches a dialog box that allows you to change how the
spell checker functions.

Master selection color
This setting controls the display color for the dominant object when multiple
objects are selected.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 131
•
•
•

Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration

Group selection color
This setting determines the color of the “box” drawn to indicate the boundary of
the selection area when multiple objects are selected.

Selection handle size
This setting determines the size of the “grab handles” that are shown when an
object or multiple objects are selected.

Designer > Advanced Tab

•
•
132 ••
•
•



Copy bitmaps / metafiles to clipboard with Edit/Copy. When enabled,
Designer permits the copying of bitmaps and/or metafiles to the Windows
clipboard.



Skip 'Save As' dialog for activated forms. When enabled, you are able to
edit and save an activated form without giving it a new name or assigning it a
new Form ID, even if the changes you made would ordinarily have required
you to save it with a different name and Form ID. The new form would then
need to be activated.



Validate files at next startup. When enabled, TeleForm runs the Validate
Files command the next time Designer is started. This command is designed
to fix some common user and system errors. For details on what Validate
Files does, see “Validate Files” on page 273.

TeleForm Administration Guide

Designer Tab



Default Shape library. This field defines the default Shape Library file.



Maximum undos. You can limit the number of steps that can be undone in
Designer by typing a value in this field. Limiting the number of steps that can
be undone can improve system performance, since fewer steps must be
stored in memory. A value of 0 places no limits on the number of steps that
can be undone.



Show selection changes in undo. When enabled, this option includes
Selection commands in the Undo/Redo queue. For example, if you selected
a Constrained Print Field and deleted it, clicking the Undo button twice would
undo both the deletion of the field and the selection of it.
This option is disabled by default, since storing Selection commands
consumes additional memory.

Form ID Assignment
These fields determine how TeleForm assigns Form ID values to new forms.


Random: TeleForm automatically assigns non-sequential Form ID values to
new forms.



Sequential: Each new form of the same type (Traditional, VersiForm,
Existing) has a Form ID that is incremented sequentially from the last form
created of that type.



User Entry: When this option is selected, form designers can type a Form ID
value in the Save As dialog box. This Form ID must conform to the applicable
ID range (standard or extended) that is in effect. TeleForm provides a Form ID
by default, but the Designer can override this value.

Standard ID Range
These numbers define the valid Form ID range for Traditional forms and
VersiForms. The valid range is 2 to 65,000.
Extended ID Range
These numbers define the acceptable Form ID values for Traditional and Existing
forms that are created with the Extended Form ID Range option enabled. The
valid range is 100,000 to 16,000,000.

Designer > Defaults Tab
This dialog box defines Designer settings that are automatically used for new
forms. If you find yourself continually changing these settings on a 
form-by-form basis, you can save time in the future by modifying the start-up
defaults.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 133
•
•
•

Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration



Constrained print dimensions. These settings affect the size of Constrained
Print Fields when they are created. You can still modify the size of any specific
CPF after it is created.



Line Width. The width of lines/boxes/ovals in evaluation objects.



Entry/Choice shape. This option allows you to set the shape of the bubbles
that make up the global entry/choice field when the default is selected in draw
options. By default, TeleForm sets this value to an oval.



Reference mark margins. These settings apply only to Traditional forms,
which use solid cornerstones as Form ID marks. They specify the distance
from the edge of the paper to the outermost edge of the cornerstones.

Reader Tab
The Reader tabs control functions specific to TeleForm Reader. This tab includes
these sub-tabs:

•
•
134 ••
•
•



Reader > Local Tab



Reader > Identification Tab



Reader > Recognition tab



Reader > OCR Performance tab

TeleForm Administration Guide

Reader Tab



Reader > Image Handling tab



Reader > General Tab

Reader > Local Tab
This tab defines how Reader works if it is launched on the workstation from which
the tab is opened.

Tasks
After you select an option from the Tasks list, you must also click the Enable
check box and set a time period (or a Schedule). The Check every __ seconds
value is the maximum time between checks. When a task finishes its current job,
the task is scheduled to begin again almost immediately. The brief delay allows
other tasks to be run in the interim (this delay is typically less than a second, but
depends upon the task). If a task is run but finds nothing to do (e.g. the evaluation
queue is empty), it schedules the next start using the Check every __ seconds
period.
The tasks include:


Evaluation/Identification. Enables or prevents a Reader from evaluating and
identifying forms. Disabling evaluations and form identification can be useful if
you want to stack-up images in the receive log for later processing.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 135
•
•
•

Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration



Distribution. Specifies how often Reader station checks its internal queue for
new images to distribute. Only one Reader station should have the Batch
distribution feature enabled. It should be disabled on all other Readers.



Batch commit. Allows Reader to automatically commit batches when they
have been flagged as “Ready for Commit.” This setting eliminates the need for
Verifier workstations to manually commit batches, which can slow down the
verification process.



Batch page link. Allows Reader to automatically attempt to link missing page
forms within batches.



Non-batch export. Reader, rather than Verifier, exports data from non-batch
forms with a status of “Evaluated OK.”



Missing page export. This option forces Reader to export non-batch
processed forms with missing pages after a specific period of time has
elapsed. With this option enabled, TeleForm does not wait for the remaining
pages to be received.
Choose your missing page export time carefully. If it is set to one day, it might
be two days before data export (if a form comes in late in the day).
In the Form section, you can specify a certain form that uses this feature. If
you do not choose a form, TeleForm exports all forms with missing pages.



Missing page batch commit. This option allows your TeleForm system to
define a batch as being “Ready to commit” even if it contains multiple page
forms that are missing pages.

Load Engines at Startup.
When enabled, Reader loads its recognition engines when the program is
launched, rather than waiting for an image to identify/evaluate.

Do evaluations in background thread
This option is enabled by default.

Display All Evaluation Zones
This feature shows the results of image preprocessing in each field, which can
help you determine if your global or field-level image preprocessing settings are
appropriate.
You can change the time to display the evaluation zone by entering a value in the
Zone display time (sec.) field. The default is 2 seconds.

•
•
136 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Reader Tab

You can also set the scale in the Zone display mode field. This setting affects
how each zone is displayed in Reader. The default is 1:1. Acceptable ranges are:
1:1, 1:2, 1:4, 1:8, Fit Horizontally, or Fit Vertically.
NOTE Using the Display all evaluation zones setting
during normal processing slows the evaluation process
considerably. Autonomy Cardiff recommends that this
option be used for form design testing purposes.

Reader > Identification Tab

Existing/VersiForm confidence
There are two settings that determine how confident TeleForm Reader must be
before it can identify an image either as a specific form or as a NonForm.

IMPORTANT Changing the NonForm confidence affects
the identification of ALL Existing forms and VersiForms.



NonForm if confidence less than this. This setting defines how confident
Reader must be that an Existing or VersiForm form image matches a form
template in the Recognition Set. If the confidence is less than this value when

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 137
•
•
•

Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration

compared against all the forms in the Recognition Set, it is classified as a
NonForm. If the confidence is greater than this value, it is identified as the
form that has the highest confidence value. The default setting is 50.
If an image is frequently classified as a NonForm when it is really a form, you
can lower the NonForm confidence. Doing so may increase the number of
images that are identified as the wrong form.
If a NonForm is frequently identified as a form, then you can increase the
NonForm confidence to reduce the number of incorrectly identified forms.
Doing so may increase the number of valid form images that are classified as
NonForms.


Match if confidence is greater than this. This value determines how
confident Reader must be of the relationship between a form image and a
form template before it can identify the form image as the specific form. The
match confidence percentage is based on how many Identification Lines and
Reference Blocks are found on the image. For example:
 If no lines/blocks are found, the form has a zero confidence rating;
 If all lines/blocks are found, the form has a confidence rating of 100.

If the forms in your Recognition Set are similar, you could raise this value to
reduce the chance that an image is classified as the wrong form. The
downside of increasing this value is that the identification process takes longer
because the image must be compared against more forms before it is
identified.

Limit
The Limit list defines the maximum number or percentage for the following
functions:


Maximum enabled forms. Maximum number of forms that can be enabled in
the Recognition Set at one time. The default is 80.



Maximum horizontal and vertical offset and shrink. These values
determine how far the data entry fields and objects on a form can shift and still
be found and identified by Reader.
 Max Offset. This value is the largest distance that the text and fields can

shift together from their original location and still be found. The default
setting is 1.0 inch.
 Shrink Factor. This value is the maximum amount of shrinkage that the

objects on the form can undergo and still be recognized. This is measured
as a percentage of the original size, as based on the form template. The
default is 10 percent.

•
•
138 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Reader Tab



Max reference marks per quadrant. This setting designates the maximum
number of identification blocks that TeleForm assigns to any quadrant
(quarter) of the form page. The default is 3. This number can be increased to
create more blocks in case any had to be disabled on the form because they
were drawn around data fields.



Minimum bars (NCS style forms). Defines the minimum number of bar
marks, or “ticks,” that Reader must find on an Existing form to identify it as an
NCS-style form.



Reference mark tolerance. This setting applies to Traditional forms only. It
determines the maximum distance (in 1/1000's of an inch) of a reference mark
from its expected location. If the reference marks are found further away from
their expected locations than the Reference Mark Tolerance, the image is
treated as a NonForm.
Range: 200-3000 (1/1000’s of an inch)
Default: 1500 (1/1000’s of an inch)



Explicit ID Location Padding. This setting determines how far an Explicit ID
field can be from its anticipated location before Reader defines the image as a
NonForm.



Maximum size error for Traditional ID blocks. This setting defines how
different in size a Traditional form ID block can be from its expected size
before Reader identifies the image as a NonForm.

Check for Flipped Forms
Enables checking for flipped VersiForms or Existing forms. Should only be
disabled if you are sure that all forms are evaluated top edge first.

Enable NCS style forms
Enable the recognition engine to identify the tick marks found in NCS or Scantron
style forms. If enabled, tick mark columns or rows are grouped into identification
blocks.

Use Drop-In identification
This list determines when Reader uses any drop-in identification system to identify
a form, rather than its normal method of identifying forms by ID marks.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 139
•
•
•

Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration

Evaluate all forms as
Select a form from the list if you want to force all images to be identified as page 1
of the selected form. This option is designed primarily for complete dropout forms.
If you select a form, all Attachment options are disabled and all images are
evaluated as page one of the form. Forms must be scanned top-first.

Evaluate NonForms as
Select a form from the list if you want all NonForm images to be evaluated as
page 1 of the selected form. You should only select this option if you want every
NonForm image to be evaluated using a specific form template.
Any images being evaluated that are not identified as being associated with a
particular form are evaluated as if they were the first page of the form with this ID.
One purpose for this entry is to allow a script to run each time a NonForm is
processed. The value of 'Keep Pages Together' affects whether such a script is
run once for each page or once for a group of NonForm pages processed
together.
If an image does not match the template of any of the Traditional forms or one of
the forms in the recognition set, that image is identified as a NonForm/
Attachment.

Reader > Recognition tab
This tab affects the behavior of TeleForm Reader and Verifier.

•
•
140 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Reader Tab

Character Recognition
You can modify the following Character Recognition thresholds.


Confidence threshold. The system-level threshold value at or above which
characters are considered to have been evaluated correctly. The default
confidence threshold used when you first install TeleForm is 80.The
acceptable range is from 1 to 99. You can experiment with different levels to
find the optimal value for your particular purpose.
 Setting a higher confidence threshold reduces the incidence of substitution

characters, but rejects a higher percentage of characters as ambiguous
and needing verification.
 Setting a lower confidence threshold rejects fewer characters (holding for

verification less often) but may have more substitution errors.


Best guess threshold. This option allows you to set the system-level
threshold at which a character's best guess is used if the character did not
interpret OK. This is the difference between seeing a “~” and a guess for the
character. The default threshold value is 10. The acceptable range is from 1 to
99.



Constrained print fill threshold. This setting defines the number of pixels in
a Constrained Print Field box needed to consider the box filled. The default
value is 10. The allowable range is 1-1000.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 141
•
•
•

Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration



Image zone fill threshold. Configures the maximum number of pixels that
can be detected in an Image Zone for it to be considered blank. The default
value is 32 pixels.



Image extraction tolerance. This setting affects the precision of the Extract
Bitmap feature in Designer. The allowable range is 2 (1/2 inch) to 64 (1/64
inch).



Character extraction tolerance. This setting affects the precision of the
Extract Text feature in Designer. The allowable range is 2 (height of character
divided by 2) to 64 (height of character divided by 64).

Skip blank constrained print fields and image zones
Skips evaluation of Constrained Print fields when all characters have a pixel count
less than the Constraint print fill threshold value, described above. Also skips
evaluation of Image zones when they have a pixel count less than the Image zone
fill threshold described above.

Disable single line extraction
Image Zones can be configured to extract only a single line of text. The single line
extraction function is required for some special Image Zone formatting features,
but may be unnecessary for TeleForm applications that do not require Image Zone
values to be formatted in these ways. Also, single line Image Zone extraction can
slow the recognition process, as TeleForm Reader must search for the “most
centered” line of text in an Image Zone.

OMR Recognition
These options allow you to set up the OMR (mark), recognition settings for all
forms in your TeleForm system. These settings maintain how “filled” a bubble has
to be in order to be considered marked. OMR Recognition settings are used only
when field and form level settings are not specified.
You can modify the following OMS settings:

•
•
142 ••
•
•



Mark fill low. This setting defines the percentage BELOW which a response
mark is considered EMPTY. By default, response marks that are less than
25% covered is considered empty. However, you can modify this threshold if
needed.



Mark fill high. This setting defines the percentage ABOVE which a response
mark is considered MARKED. By default, any Response Mark covered by
more than 40% is considered marked. However, you can modify this threshold
if needed.



Mark fill adjustment. If the Entry Field uses the Value in bubble option, the
Mark Fill Adjustment determines how much of these internal values to remove.

TeleForm Administration Guide

Reader Tab

This option only takes effect if the values are printed in non-dropout ink,
because dropout values does not result in unmarked responses being
evaluated as marked.


Mark fill maximum threshold. The system can be configured to determine
which response mark should be recognized as the right answer if two marks
have been covered. Such an event would normally happen if someone
chooses an incorrect answer, scribbles it out, and then marks the correct
answer. The incorrect answer is typically more covered than the correct one.
The setting at which a mark is considered “scribbled out” is the Mark Fill Max
Threshold.



Mark size tolerance. This threshold is controlled only from the Global
Settings > Reader > Recognition tab. It defines the maximum and minimum
difference between the expected size of a response mark and the actual size
of the mark as evaluated by TeleForm Reader. The default value is 15, which
means:
 The maximum expected size of any response mark is 15% larger in every

dimension
 The maximum expected size of any response mark is 15% smaller in

every dimension

Low confidence character
This option allows you to set the character that is substituted for unrecognizable
characters by the recognition engine. This character should be a special character
that indicates to the Verifier operator that it must be reviewed. You can choose any
printable ASCII character.

Location lattice use
The Location lattice feature uses detailed information from the found location of
each line and field on the form to help locate additional fields more accurately. The
lattice is built as lines and fields are found on the form. New fields that are being
searched for query the lattice to fine-tune the start location used for detailed
location and preprocessing functions.
By default, the Location lattice is enabled for Traditional and VersiForms. It is an
option for Existing forms.

Mark all forms for review
When this option is enabled, TeleForm holds all returned forms for review in
TeleForm Verifier, regardless of whether or not they are interpreted with errors.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 143
•
•
•

Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration

Reader > OCR Performance tab
This tab affects how TeleForm Reader evaluates fields that require OCR (Optical
Character Recognition). The technology used to read and convert
machine-printed text from a graphical image format to an editable text format.
evaluation, such as Constrained Print Fields and Image Zones that collect
machine print characters.

The three performance settings allow you to balance speed and accuracy. The
Optimized for speed setting can reasonably be expected to result in more errors
but to require less time. The Balance speed and accuracy setting (default)
strives to achieve a mix of speed and accuracy. The Optimized for accuracy
setting is the slowest of the three, but can reasonably be expected to result in the
fewest errors.

Reader > Image Handling tab
This tab determines what happens to multi-page forms and NonForms when they
are received.

•
•
144 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Reader Tab

Page link rule
When linking pages with Page Link fields, you can select the best method that
each character matches a particular threshold. Only one can be selected at a
time.
Page linking is based on the concept of “character pairs.” A character pair is
formed by taking one character from the same position in the field on each page
being compared. For instance, if page one has a value of XYZ and page 2 has a
value of ?YZ the character pairs are (X, ?), (Y, Y), and (Z, Z).
You can choose from these Page link rule options:


All Characters match, evaluated OK. If all character pairs match and the
confidence of all characters is greater than the defined confidence threshold,
the pages are linked.



All characters match, best guess OK. If all character pairs match and the
confidence of all characters is greater than the defined best guess threshold,
the pages are linked. The best guest threshold is defined in the Character
recognition section on the Recognition tab.



High confidence characters must match. Characters above the confidence
threshold must match, but characters below the confidence threshold can be
different.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 145
•
•
•

Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration

Only link pages that are in same image or scan
Choose this option if you want to link pages only when they are part of the same
image or scan. If used with batch processing, this setting prevents any pages from
linking within batches.

Only link forms with page link and/or user ID fields
Choose this option if you do not want TeleForm to link pages that don't have a
page link or User ID field.

Print forms with missing pages
Enabling this option forces TeleForm to print forms with missing pages. If this
option is enabled when a form is initially evaluated as “missing pages,” and that
form later becomes complete, a portion of the form may get printed twice. Note
that AutoMerge Publisher must be open in order for the NonForms to print.

NonForm image handling
If an image does not match the template of one of the forms in the Recognition
Set, that image is identified as a NonForm\Attachment. The Non-batch options
list defines how TeleForm handles such NonForms. These options ONLY take
effect when the NonForm is not part of a batch. The NonForm handling for batch
images is controlled by the Form ID Attachments settings of the job that is used
for the batch.
Choose from these options:


Do not save. Select this option if you want TeleForm to discard images that
are identified as NonForms. If you are not using batch processing, NonForms
are discarded as soon as they are identified. If you are using batch
processing, NonForms are discarded when the batch is committed.
If you enable this option, TeleForm automatically prints any NonForms in your
system, just in case one or more of these NonForms comes from your fax
server. Note that AutoMerge Publisher must be open in order for the NonForm
images to print.

•
•
146 ••
•
•



Save each page separately. Select this option to store NonForms in a
separate file. NonForms are not attached to forms.



Save adjacent pages together. Select this option to store adjacent
NonForms in a single image file. These images are separate from the form
images and are not attached to any forms.



Attach to adjacent forms. Enable this option if NonForm pages are to be
kept together with form pages in the same image file.

TeleForm Administration Guide

Reader Tab

NOTE This setting is primarily designed for forms that
are faxed into TeleForm. If the form is faxed with a cover
sheet, this setting links the cover sheet to the form.

To save NonForms even if they are not adjacent to forms choose Attach
NonForms to adjacent forms and select the Save unattached option. If you are
using batch processing, this setting saves all NonForm images, even those
that are attached to forms.

Save unattached
This option forces TeleForm to save all NonForm images that are not attached to
forms. It is only available if you select the Attach to adjacent forms option from the
Non-batch option list.

Print if not attached
Enable this option to print NonForms that are not attached to forms. Note that
AutoMerge Publisher must be open in order for the NonForm images to print.

NOTE If you are using batch processing, this setting prints
all NonForm images, even those that are attached to forms.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 147
•
•
•

Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration

Reader > General Tab

Collect Reader statistics
If you want to collect Reader statistics, you must enable this option.

Collect Reader field statistics
If you need to collect detailed field statistics, make sure that you only do so while
you are optimizing a single form. In addition, make sure that you clear the Collect
Reader field statistics check box when you are done optimizing that form.
Collecting these statistics can greatly slow down form evaluation in your Reader
stations.
NOTE Remember that you only want to collect Reader field
statistics while optimizing a form or forms, not while
processing.

Form
If you enable the Collect Reader field statistics option, Autonomy recommends
that you specify a single form on which this option is performed. Collecting
detailed field statistics for all your forms can slow down your system considerably,
and may require a large amount of disk space.

•
•
148 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Reader Tab

Collect NonForm identification information
When enabled, Reader saves debugging information for NonForm images in the
file named TELEFORM.NFS. This feature applies to Traditional forms only.

Leave NonForm faxes in the fax queue (if supported)
When enabled, TeleForm leaves NonForm faxes in the fax server queue after
evaluation. This option has no effect in multi-user TeleForm systems.

Distribute all evaluations (file/evaluate)
When enabled, files selected for evaluation are queued in the form log
(distributed). When disabled, images are queued in memory. This setting is
ignored in an TeleForm system with more than one workstation license. In this
case, all file evaluations are distributed.

Evaluation override format
Reader uses this format to evaluate an image if the “true” identity of the image
cannot be determined from the file's extension. For example, if Reader is
attempting to evaluate a file named 123.X, it cannot determine the format of the
file from the X extension. The Evaluation override format is used similarly to
proxy file identification.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 149
•
•
•

Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration

Merge/Print Tab
This tab defines how forms and images are printed from AutoMerge Publisher. It
also controls certain aspects of the merge function.

Enable print and send
This option allows TeleForm applications to print and fax forms and images.
The speed of the printing and sending function is defined by the Forms to print &
send every _ seconds setting in the Queues section.

Enable merges
This option allows you to enable the AutoMerge Publisher form merges. When
enabled, you can distribute merged forms and documents.
By default, AutoMerge Publisher can initiate a merge every 20 seconds. You can
change this range to be anywhere from 5 to 3600 seconds in the Forms to merge
every _ seconds setting in the Queues section.

High speed merge
The High Speed Merge option can decrease the time needed to merge forms. If
you enable this option, the AutoMerge Publisher keeps merging forms until there
are no more records. It also pre-loads forms in the queue to reduce waiting time.

•
•
150 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Multiuser Features Tab

The number of pre-loaded merge forms is defined by the Preload up to _ forms
per merge check cycle setting in the Queues section.

Priority based queuing
Merges can be created with different priorities, ranging from 0 (highest priority) to
255 (lowest priority). This option bases the merge queue on the merge job priority
set in AutoMerge Publisher.

Batch merging
This function works with printed merge jobs. It combines several forms into one
print job, rather than treating each form as a separate job.
You must also define a Maximum batch size at the bottom of the dialog box. The
allowable range is 2 to 100 forms.
If your merge job uses a cover sheet, each cover sheet is treated as 1 item in the
batched print job. For example, if you set your Maximum batch size to 100, but
the merge job uses a cover sheet, you print only 50 merged forms per batched
print job. Your merge is still faster than if you did not enable Batch Merging, but
you do not output as many forms as you might anticipate.
The size of batch merge jobs is constrained by the Maximum batch size setting
in the Queues section. Allowable values are 2 to 100. This setting DOES NOT
affect batch processing in Reader and Verifier.
IMPORTANT Certain form templates are not eligible for
batch merging and will always be sent as separate print
jobs.
Templates are excluded for the following reasons:
 The template has an image zone that has the "store
image" property checked
 The template has a non-standard page definition (i.e.
variable or multiple copies)

Multiuser Features Tab
The Multiuser Features tab controls functions specific to Enterprise and
Workgroup systems. It includes these tabs:


Multiuser Features > General Tab



Multiuser Features > Revision Control Tab

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 151
•
•
•

Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration



Multiuser Features > Server Cluster Support



Multiuser Features > Compliance Support



Multiuser Features > Encryption



Multiuser Features > Remote Settings Tab



Multiuser Features > Web Settings Tab

Conditional Tabs
 The Server Cluster Support tab is available only for Enterprise systems,
since TeleForm Workgroup does not operate in a cluster server environment.


The Remote Settings tab is only visible if you are using the Remote Capture
Option.



The Web Settings tab is only visible if you are using the Web Capture Option.

Multiuser Features > General Tab

•
•
152 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Multiuser Features Tab

Single Reader per batch
When multiple Readers are evaluating images from the same batch at the same
time, multi-page forms may be linked incorrectly. This situation can be avoided by
only allowing one Reader to evaluate the batch. The Reader evaluates each page
in the order in which it was scanned, so each page is linked to the nearest page of
the same form.

Cache the auto-assign queue
When the Auto Batch Assign function is being used to provide Verifier operators
with batches to process, some lag between when a batch has finished one
processing stage and when it is available for another may result, since TeleForm
must scan the auto-assign queue for “fresh” batches. By enabling the Cache the
auto-assign queue option, all batches that are ready for further processing are
loaded into the queue, resulting in more “ready” batches. The queue is reloaded
at the interval specified in the Auto-assign queue refresh field.

Auto-assign queue refresh
This field is only editable when the Cache the auto-assign queue option is
enabled. It defines how often TeleForm re-examines the list of batches that
require processing, so that operators who are using the auto-assign function can
be provided with “fresh” batches.

Maximum users per batch
This setting defines how many Verifier operators are allowed to perform correction
on any given batch at the same time.

Enable script caching
Selecting the Enable script caching check box speeds up the processing of forms
if they contain form scripts.This check box should always be selected.

Compress .RES file
Choosing this option compresses the files that contain the results of the Reader
evaluation, which reduces the size of files that need to be transferred over the
Server and network. For faster processing this option should always be enabled.

Do ALL non-batch exports from Reader
This setting allows Verifier workstations to cue non-batch forms for export by
Reader. Your Verifier stations is not slowed by the need to export data from
non-batch forms.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 153
•
•
•

Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration

Multiuser Features > Revision Control Tab
This dialog box connects your TeleForm system to revision control software. Your
revision control software must already be installed and functional before you can
link it to TeleForm. When enabled, you can save different versions of forms and
Shape Library files (.GLS) to your revision control system.
Revision control in TeleForm is a complex subject. See “Revision Control” on
page 259 for detailed instructions.

Multiuser Features > Server Cluster Support
This tab is available only for TeleForm Enterprise systems. It is not available on
the Global & Local TeleForm Settings dialog box for Workgroup systems.
If a monitored cluster server notifies TeleForm that a failure event has occurred,
the Resource Checker is automatically displayed at all TeleForm modules. This
warning notifies TeleForm operators that processing has been paused because
the cluster is switching to a backup node. The Resource Checker automatically
closes when the failure has been addressed and the server is online.

•
•
154 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Multiuser Features Tab

SQL Cluster Support
This option should be enabled if you have installed the TeleForm MS SQL
database on a cluster server. It should NOT be enabled if your SQL database is
deployed in a non-cluster environment.
When this option is enabled, TeleForm automatically displays the Resource
Checker dialog box when a failure event occurs at the cluster server hosting the
TeleForm MS SQL database.
The Resource name field identifies the resource name assigned by the SQL
cluster server. By default, this field reads “SQL Server.” This field cannot be
edited.

File Server Cluster Support
This option should be enabled if you have installed the TeleForm application itself
to a cluster server. It should NOT be enabled if you have installed TeleForm in a
non-cluster environment.
When this option is enabled, TeleForm automatically displays the Resource
Checker dialog box when a failure event occurs at the cluster server on which
TeleForm was installed.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 155
•
•
•

Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration

Diagnostic Logging
The Diagnostic Logging feature tracks cluster events for the monitored cluster
servers (both SQL and file servers) and TeleForm commands related to those
events.
Tracked events are written to the relevant application log file (tfdesign_01.log,
tfreader_01.log, etc.).
Level
0

No logging (except for an initial error if no
cluster is detected or trouble connecting to the
cluster).

1

Basic logging, which covers these Success
events:
 Logging the start/stop of the TeleForm
monitoring thread
 Logging which resources are monitored

2

Cluster server events.
IMPORTANT Autonomy recommends that
Level 2 be avoided unless you are attempting
to diagnose problems. Logging can interfere
with the actual processing of the events.

Multiuser Features > Compliance Support
Enterprise-only.
This dialog box controls TeleForm's compliance-related settings.
Refer to the Enterprise System Management Guide for detailed information on
creating a compliant TeleForm system.

Security Settings


Enable double key validation. Compliance systems should ensure that the
same Verifier operator does not perform Double Key Validation on a data entry
field, form, or batch that the operator has already processed. In other words,
one Verifier operator should not be responsible for performing the original
work and double-checking it.
When you select this option, any one Verifier operator is prevented from
performing Data Review on a batch that the operator has already corrected.
Data Review is the Verifier Mode in which Double Key Validation takes place.

•
•
156 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Multiuser Features Tab

If this option is cleared, TeleForm allows a Verifier operator to perform Data
Review on a batch that the operator has already corrected.


Enable digital signature warning. If you want to warn TeleForm operators
that you are treating their TeleForm Login as a digital signature, select this
option and type an appropriate message in the Warning text field.



Warning text. You must provide appropriate warnings that you are treat a
login as a digital signature if you select the Enable digital signature warning
option. This warning opens when a module is launched even if you select
Single sign-on.

Audit Log Settings
The Audit Trail is a report available only for Enterprise customers. The Audit
logging level determines how much logging activity is performed. High audit levels
may impact system performance.


No Logging. No logging is performed. You cannot generate an Audit Trail
report.



Minimal Logging. Module start up and shut down, operator login and logoff.



Optimal Logging. Minimal logging plus all user and system actions, except
changing individual data elements in the fields.



Maximum Logging. Optimal logging plus tracks data changes made in
Verifier. Maximum Logging can negatively impact system performance,
especially in large systems.

Report Settings
Report Generator can pull data from the live TeleForm database as well as an
off-line (Archive) database. The synch operation between the live TeleForm
database and the off-line database usually do not have a discernible performance
effect. Refer to the Enterprise System Management Guide for more information on
this option.

Synching Live and Offline Databases
1. Open Report Generator at least once to create the required tables. Using Data
Transformation Services, create a DTS Package with the following tables from
the TeleForm database:
 Tfuser
 Tfvfstat
 Tfrdstat
 Tfrfstat

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 157
•
•
•

Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration

 Tfbatmt
 Tfidtbl
 Tfauditbatch
 Tfauditform
 Tfaudituser
 Tfauditworkstation
 TfauditImage
 Tfauditlog

2. Log in to TeleForm as an administrator and configure the Data warehouse
connect string.
 ODBC Data Source
Provider=MSDASQL;DSN=MyDSN;UID=MyUID;PWD=MyPassword
 ODBC Data Source with SQL Integrated Security:
Provider=MSDASQL;DSN=MyDSN;Trusted_Connection=Yes
 OLEDB (Direct Server) connection
Provider=SQLOLEDB;Data Source='MyServer';Initial
Catalog='MyDatabase';User ID='MyID';Password='MyPWD'
 OLEDB (Direct Server) connection with SQL integrated Security:
Provider=SQLOLEDB;Data Source='MyServer';Initial
Catalog='MyDatabase';Integrated Security='SSPI’

Multiuser Features > Encryption
The Encrypt internal data and images configuration option prevents unauthorized
users from viewing images and RES files outside of TeleForm.

NOTE This feature is only available for the Enterprise
product level.

Companies that process forms containing credit card information often a
requirement to protect the information while it is being processed. One of the
requirements is to encrypt any files containing sensitive information when they are
stored on disk (in-memory information does not need to be encrypted). All files
stored on the TeleForm Server (or under the TeleForm directory on a single-user
system) will be encrypted.

•
•
158 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Multiuser Features Tab

NOTE RES files were already compressed by default and
were not easily readable, but this feature will ensure they
are encrypted.

The options available in the Multiuser Features > Encryption tab are the
following:


Encrypt Images and Data Files. When this is enabled, the user will not be
able to open the images or the RES files outside of TeleForm.



Hash algorithm. Select the hash algorithm to use.



Encryption algorithm. Select the encryption algorithm to use.



Key storage. Select where the key is stored.



Keys stored. If you have selected Encrypt Images and Data Files, then this is
the number of encryption keys stored.

Image zone output
Image clips are stored in the <TeleForm>\Img directory.


When encryption is enabled, the system setting for image zone format will be
hard coded to be the encrypted image format.



A user can still configure image zones to output to an unencrypted format
using the field level setting



If the image clip needs to be converted, a function is available in VBA to do
this.
NOTE Text output files from image zones will not be
encrypted. It is recommend that this setting not be used
when encryption is enabled.

Multiuser Features > Remote Settings Tab
This tab affects the function of the Remote Capture Option. It is only visible when:
1. You open the Global & Local TeleForm Settings dialog box from a Scan
Station or Reader station.
2. You have a Remote Capture Option license in your TeleForm license
database.
See “Synchronization Directory Setup” on page 172 for instructions on using
these controls.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 159
•
•
•

Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration

Multiuser Features > Web Settings Tab
This tab affects the function of the Web Capture Option. It is only visible when:
1. You open the Global & Local TeleForm Settings dialog box from a Scan
Station or Reader station.
2. You have a Web Capture Option license in your TeleForm license database.
See “Configure Synchronization Directory” on page 192 for instructions on using
these controls.

•
•
160 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Multiuser Features Tab

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 161
•
•
•

Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration

Configuration Options tab
The Configuration Options tab allows you to change the value of miscellaneous
settings for this workstation.

To change configuration settings:
1. Select the Option you want to change.
2. Click Apply and OK.
3. To set a configuration option back to its default value, click Restore Defaults.
4. The available configuration options are described below.

Batch Auto Assign Skip Flags
Only available when the Configuration Options tab is opened from within
Verifier.
This option allows you to set a flag determining batches to be skipped in
auto-assign processing for the current Verifier operator. The flag settings are as
follows:

•
•
162 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Configuration Options tab

1

Skip if nothing to review (default)

2

Skip if missing pages

4

Skip only if missing pages

You may set multiple options by adding values. For example, a setting of 3 would
indicate that batches should be skipped if there is nothing to review or there are
missing pages.

Clear And Key Virtuals
Only available when the Configuration Options tab is opened from within
Verifier.
This option clears data from virtual fields when the Clear and Key option is
implemented. This option is enabled by default.

Disable Background Form Loads
Only available when the Configuration Options tab is opened from within
Verifier.
When checked, this option loads all forms in Verifier before beginning correction.
When not checked, correction begins after one form is loaded and the remaining
forms load in the background. This option is checked by default.

Enable BasicScript Editor
BasicScript was replaced by VBA as the default scripting language for TeleForm
as of v9. This option enables you to run the BasicScript editor.
As of TeleForm version 10.5.2, VBA and BasicScript require an additional license.
Contact your Autonomy representative for more information.

Enable scripts
When enabled, all scripts (e.g. form, system, export) are permitted to run. This
option should only be disabled when attempting to diagnose a problem that may
be related to script use.

Explicit ID Performance
The Value setting defines the Explicit ID performance level (0 by default):

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 163
•
•
•

Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration

0

Optimize for speed

1

Balance for speed and accuracy

2

Optimize for accuracy

Form Selection Config Override
Only available when the Configuration Options tab is opened from within
Verifier.
This option allows users to configure the Form Selection dialog box even if they
do not have configure rights. This option is enabled by default.

Generate Wallpaper Resolution
The Value setting defines the resolution for background images on Existing forms.
Valid values are 200, 300 or 400 (200 by default).

Hide Default Job
The Default Job will not be available for selection during batch creation, users are
required to choose one of the custom jobs.

Right Justify Numerics
When enabled, TeleForm right-justifies all numeric values. This function is
especially helpful with dollar amounts, since it aligns the decimal points. This
option is enabled by default.

Capture Entry Font Name
This option defines the font for Capture Zone data entry fields. The default font is
Arial.

Stacked Config Pages
This option displays the configuration tabs in a stacked format. This option is
disabled by default.

Verifier Preloads
Only available when the Configuration Options tab is opened from within
Verifier.
This option specifies the number of images to pre-load in Verifier at one time. The
range is 1-20. The default value is 5.

•
•
164 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Configuration Options tab

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 165
•
•
•

Chapter 9 Change the System Configuration

•
•
166 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide


Remote Capture Option
CHAPTER 10

Both the Remote Capture Option and Web Capture Option are designed to
expand TeleForm’s sources of batched images and data. These two modules
allow operators who are not physically located “within” a TeleForm system to
supply that system with batches.
This chapter covers only the Remote Capture Option. See “Web Capture Option”
on page 179 for information on the Web Capture Option.


Important Remote Capture Station Concepts



Remote Capture Stations and TeleForm



Configuration Steps



Job Settings and Remote Capture Stations

Important Remote Capture Station Concepts
Understanding the following concepts and terms make it easier to configure and
use the Remote Capture Option:


Remote batch directory



Synchronization directory



DSS Files

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 167
•
•
•

Chapter 10 Remote Capture Option

Remote batch directory
The Remote batch directory is the storage location to which Remote Capture
Stations submit their batches.
Each Remote Capture Station must have its own unique subdirectory in the root
Remote batch directory.

Synchronization directory
The Synchronization directory is the storage location for TeleForm Job Settings
used by Remote Capture Stations.
Both the Remote Capture Option and the Web Capture Option use a
Synchronization directory. If you use both these options, you MUST have at
least two distinct Synchronization directories:


one for Remote Capture



a second for Web Capture

DSS Files
When a Remote Capture Station submits a batch, it actually transmits a DSS file
to the Remote batch directory. The DSS file is a compressed “package” that
includes the batch images and an XML file. This XML file contains any data
collected about the batch, such as index and tracking information.

Remote Capture Stations and TeleForm
The following illustration explains the relationship between Remote Capture
Stations (RCS) and the home TeleForm site. RCS modules supply batches to
TeleForm using a Remote Batch Directory, typically located on the same network

•
•
168 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Configuration Steps

as TeleForm itself. In turn, TeleForm supplies Job Settings to the Remote Capture
Stations. These Job Settings control the processing of batches created by RCS
operators.
Remote Capture Stations
2 shown for clarity, more possible

RCS 1

Job Settings
downloaded
by
RCS

Batches
uploaded
to
TeleForm
RCS 2

Remote
Batch
Directory

Synchronization
Directory

Job Settings
Scan Station
or

Reader

Control Center

TeleForm also supplies Remote Capture Stations with confirmation messages
indicating whether batches created by an RCS module were successfully
transferred to TeleForm.

Configuration Steps
There is no setup or installation program required at the home TeleForm site to
use Remote Capture Stations. The remote workstations that run RCS modules
require the installation of software, which is covered in the Remote Capture
Station User Guide.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 169
•
•
•

Chapter 10 Remote Capture Option

However, the TeleForm system manager must perform certain administrative
steps at the home TeleForm site before ANY Remote Capture Stations are
installed at remote workstations. These steps are:
1. Add a Remote Capture Station License
2. Define Your Connection Protocol
3. Create Directories
4. Synchronization Directory Setup
5. Determine Which Readers Process Remote Capture Station Batches
6. Configure the Remote Batch Setup Connect Agent
7. Inform RCS Operators of Configuration Settings

Add a Remote Capture Station License
A Remote Capture Station license is required in order to run Remote Capture
Stations. Your TeleForm License Code may already support the Remote Capture
Station option; if it does not, contact Cardiff Sales to purchase the appropriate
license.
See “Manage Licenses” on page 75 for information on adding TeleForm licenses.

Define Your Connection Protocol
You must decide how to connect your Remote Capture Stations to the home
TeleForm site before proceeding. The following connection options are available:


FTP. The Remote Capture Station currently supports:
 IIS 6.0, 7.0, 7.5
 Windows 2003, 2008, 2008 R2 Server

TeleForm does not include any FTP software; your organization must set up
its own FTP site and procedures.


Directory. This directory must not require a user name or password for
access. It must be shared so that Remote Capture Stations have read/write
access to it. Remote Capture Stations need to read information FROM this
directory and write information TO it.



Network. A network connection, unlike the Directory option, requires a user
name and password. When using this option, you must specify the Remote
batch directory or the Synchronization directory with a UNC path.

You can combine these connection protocols.

•
•
170 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Configuration Steps



The Remote batch directory can be accessed through a different protocol
than the Synchronization directory.



Some RCS stations may connect to the home TeleForm site via FTP while
others use the Network method.

Create Directories
TeleForm interacts with Remote Capture Stations through special directories:


Remote batch directory



One subdirectory for each Remote Capture Station in the Remote batch
directory



Synchronization directory

These directories must be created through Windows Explorer before you can
configure TeleForm to use them.
To create a directory for the TeleForm Remote Capture Station
1. Using Windows Explorer or another browsing tool, create a base Remote
batch directory. This directory can be located anywhere, so long as it can be
accessed by the Remote Capture Stations and the TeleForm Reader stations
that process the batches.
2. Create subdirectories within the base Remote batch directory for every
Remote Capture Station.
IMPORTANT If you are also using Web Capture
Option, the subdirectories for Remote Capture MUST
be different from the directories used for Web Capture.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 171
•
•
•

Chapter 10 Remote Capture Option

IMPORTANT These subdirectories MUST match the
Workstation Names defined during the local Remote
Capture Station installations.
The local Remote Capture Station installation reads the
workstation name from the operating system on the
remote computer; for example, YourName-2K. If you
know the workstation names that will be assigned
automatically, you should use these names for the
subfolders. If you do not know the workstation names,
you can use a logical naming structure for the
subfolders and provide these names to your RCS
operators before they install the RCS locally. They must
manually type the appropriate subfolder name in the
Workstation Name screen during the local installation.

See “Configure the Remote Batch Setup Connect Agent” on page 174 for
instructions on configuring TeleForm Reader to process DSS files found in
these subdirectories.
3. Create a Synchronization directory.
 This directory should be located on a server. The rules for its location are

identical to that for the Remote batch directory. Users at the home site
need read and write access. Remote Capture Stations need read access.
 The Synchronization directory is the location where Job Settings are

posted at the home site. RCS stations download these Job Settings to
ensure that all “batch creation” points in the TeleForm system use common
batch processing settings.

Synchronization Directory Setup
The synchronization directory is a central repository for job settings created at the
home TeleForm site. Remote Capture Stations use these job settings when
creating batches.
The Synchronization command, initiated at individual Remote Capture Stations,
looks for transfer confirmation messages as well as Job Settings. However, the
confirmation messages are downloaded from the RCS-specific subfolder of the
Remote batch directory, not the Synchronization directory.
To configure directory synchronization
1. From the Utilities menu of a TeleForm module, click Configuration.
2. On the Global & Local TeleForm Settings-Multiuser Features dialog box,
open the Remote Settings tab.

•
•
172 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Configuration Steps

3. Select the Enable synchronization option.
4. Select the Type of synchronization and define the Synchronization directory:
 FTP. Click the Setup button to configure the FTP settings.
 Directory. This directory must NOT require a user name or password for

access. No Setup is required.
 Network. Click the Setup button to configure the UNC path to the

directory. A Network connection requires a user name and password.
5. De-select any Job in Jobs to include that you do not want to include in the
synchronization. All Jobs are selected by default.
6. Click OK.

Determine Which Readers Process Remote Capture Station Batches
After RCS batches have been submitted to TeleForm, TeleForm Reader must
process them. There are several options for targeting RCS batches with Reader:


Single Reader for all RCS batches. You can assign one TeleForm Reader
station to evaluate all the batches created by Remote Capture Stations. In this
case, you only need to setup the Remote Batch Connect Agent on that
particular Reader station.



Multiple Readers, one Batch Distribution Reader. You can also “split” the
RCS batch load among multiple Reader stations.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 173
•
•
•

Chapter 10 Remote Capture Option

The best way to “split” the RCS batch load among multiple Reader stations is
to designate one Reader as a Batch Distribution station (see “Distribution.
Specifies how often Reader station checks its internal queue for new images
to distribute. Only one Reader station should have the Batch distribution
feature enabled. It should be disabled on all other Readers.” on page 136).
Set up the Remote Batch Connect Agent on that station and allow it to
distribute RCS batches to other Readers.


Multiple Readers, no Batch Distribution Reader. The Remote Batch
Connect Agent settings are specific to the Reader station on which the
Connect Agent is configured. If you want multiple Reader stations to process
RCS batches, and you are not using a Batch Distribution Station, you must
configure the Remote Batch Connect Agent on each Reader.

All Reader stations that process Remote Capture Station batches must use the
same base Remote batch directory. However, each Reader can be configured to
process only batches from specific Remote Capture Stations “within” that Remote
batch directory.
See “Create Directories” on page 171 and “Configure the Remote Batch Setup
Connect Agent” on page 174 for information on the relationship between the
Remote batch directory and the RCS-specific subdirectories.

Configure the Remote Batch Setup Connect Agent
To configure the Remote Batch Setup Connect Agent
1. Start TeleForm Reader.
2. From the Utilities menu, click Connect Agent Setup > Remote Batch
Setup.

•
•
174 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Configuration Steps

3. On the Remote Batch Receive tab, select the Enable remote batch
monitoring checkbox.
4. Select the appropriate Type of connection by which this Reader station
accesses the Remote batch directory.
 FTP. Click the Setup button to configure the FTP settings.
 Directory. This directory must not require a user name or password for

access. No Setup is required.
 Network. Click the Setup button to configure the UNC path to the desired

network directory. A network connection, unlike the Directory option,
requires a user name and password.
NOTE If using Network Connection Type, the
workstation is limited to only these user credentials for
network connections to the same server. If another user
logs in, the connection fails.

5. Define the Remote batch directory you created in “Create Directories” on
page 171. If necessary, use the Browse button to locate it.
6. Open the Remote Workstation tab.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 175
•
•
•

Chapter 10 Remote Capture Option

7. Click the Add button.
8. In the Add a Remote Workstation dialog box, type the name of a Remote
Capture Station.

IMPORTANT This name must exactly match one of
the subdirectories you created in the Remote batch
directory during “Create Directories” on page 171. If it
does not, you are prompted with an error message.

NOTE The number of Remote Capture Stations you
can add is limited by the license you purchased from
Cardiff.

•
•
176 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Job Settings and Remote Capture Stations

9. Select the checkbox for all Remote Capture Stations that provide batches to
this Reader station. Only batches from selected Remote Capture Stations are
processed by the Reader on which you are configuring the Connect Agent.
10. If you want other Reader stations to process batches from Remote Capture
Stations, open the Remote Batch Connect Agent on those Readers and
repeat Step 9.

NOTE Do not alter the base Remote batch directory
on any subsequent Reader stations.

Inform RCS Operators of Configuration Settings
You must relay the following information to every person who installs a Remote
Capture Station:


The location of the Remote batch directory. This directory is discussed in
“Create Directories” on page 171;



The Workstation Name that they must type during the installation of their
Remote Capture Stations. This name is discussed in “Create Directories” on
page 171;



The location of the Synchronization directory. This directory is discussed in
“Create Directories” on page 171 and “Synchronization Directory Setup” on
page 172;



Any FTP or network passwords that must be entered to gain access to the
Remote batch directory or Synchronization directory.

The operators who install the Remote Capture Stations must know this
information in order to configure the individual stations.
If you want your Remote Capture Station operators to be able to contact Cardiff
Technical Support directly, you must provide them with your registration or
maintenance contract information.

Job Settings and Remote Capture Stations
Job Settings can be created and managed through the Job Configuration
command in Scan Station, Designer, and Control Center modules. However, the
Synchronize Now command can only be initiated at a Scan Station or Control
Center, not from within Designer.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 177
•
•
•

Chapter 10 Remote Capture Option

Clicking the Synchronize Now button on the Job Configuration dialog box
automatically saves all new and modified Job Settings to the Synchronization
directory. See “Synchronization Directory Setup” on page 172 above for
information on defining this directory.
Every Remote Capture Station can access the Job Settings found in the
Synchronization directory, assuming the Remote Capture Stations are also
properly configured with the directory location.

•
•
178 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide


Web Capture Option

CHAPTER 11

The Web Capture Option consists of two components:


The Web Capture Client, accessed through an Internet browser on remote
workstations, which creates batches of documents and submits them to
TeleForm for processing.



The Web Capture Server, which connects the Web Capture Clients and
TeleForm.

From the standpoint of the operator creating a batch, the Web Capture Option is
a very light application. The operator simply browses to a URL. There is no setup
program and the Web Capture Option can be run on a wide range of computers.
This chapter describes the Web capture option.


Web Capture Stations and TeleForm



Web Capture Concepts



Install the Web Capture Server



Install the Web Capture Client



Manage the Web Capture Option

Web Capture Stations and TeleForm
The following illustration shows a typical Web Capture and TeleForm system.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 179
•
•
•

Chapter 11 Web Capture Option

Web Capture Clients
Workstations browse to URL at Web Capture Server

Web
Capture
Server

Web Capture Clients
transfer batches to
Web Capture Server

Batches

Job Settings

Web Capture Server
supplies clients with
Web Capture interface
and Job Settings

Web Capture directory
Synchronization
directory

Web Capture Server
subdirectory

o
o
o

TeleForm:
Scan Station
Designer
Control Center

Batches

Job Settings

Firewall

TeleForm Reader

Web Capture Concepts
Understanding these concepts makes it easier to configure and use the Web
Capture Option:

•
•
180 ••
•
•



Concurrent Users



DSS Files



Data Transfer Methods



Web capture directory

TeleForm Administration Guide

Web Capture Concepts



Synchronization directory



Firewall

Concurrent Users
Each Web Capture Option license limits the number of Web Capture Clients who
can access the Web Capture URL simultaneously. If more Web Capture Clients
attempt to access the server than are allowed by the license, the “extra” clients
are denied access. Such clients receive a message explaining why access was
denied.

DSS Files
When a Web Capture Client submits a batch, it actually transmits a DSS file to the
Web Capture Server. The DSS file is a compressed “package” that includes the
batch images and an XML file. This XML file contains any data collected about the
batch, such as index and tracking information.

Data Transfer Methods
Web Capture Clients communicate with the Web Capture Server via HTTP or
HTTPS.
The Web Capture Server and TeleForm transfer data back-and-forth by one of
three methods:


FTP



Directory



Network

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 181
•
•
•

Chapter 11 Web Capture Option

http
or
https

Web Capture
Clients

http
or
https

Web Capture Server

FTP,
Directory,
Network

TeleForm

See “Configure the Web Capture Connect Agent” on page 191 and “Configure
Synchronization Directory” on page 192 for instructions on selecting the transfer
method.

•
•
182 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Web Capture Concepts

Web capture directory
The Web capture directory is the root storage location to which the Web Capture
Server saves batches. The Web Capture Server actually saves batches to a
subdirectory in the root Web capture directory.
Web Capture Client

Batch
(DSS)
Web
Capture
Server

DSS

Web
Capture
directory
DSS
Server
folder

Web Capture
Connect Agent

TeleForm Reader

Synchronization directory
The Synchronization directory is the storage location for TeleForm Job Settings
used by Web Capture Clients when creating batches. You are not required to save
all Job Settings to this directory; you can limit the available job settings depending
on what type of batches are created by Web Capture Clients.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 183
•
•
•

Chapter 11 Web Capture Option

Both the Remote Capture Option and the Web Capture Option use a
Synchronization directory. If you use both these options, each should have a
unique Synchronization directory. If you use the same directory for both, you
cannot limit the job settings used by Web Capture Clients.
Web Capture Client

Web
Capture
Server

Synchronization
directory
Job
Settings

TeleForm

Firewall
See “Web Server for Web Capture Option” on page 42 for information on the
system requirements for the Web Capture Server.

•
•
184 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Install the Web Capture Server

We recommend that the Web Capture Server be insulated from the home
TeleForm site by a firewall. The Web Capture Server should be located outside
the firewall if Web Capture Clients outside the firewall need access to it.
Web Capture Server

Web capture
directory

Synchronization

Firewall

TeleForm

Install the Web Capture Server
There are several steps involved in installing and configuring the Web Capture
Option to work with TeleForm:


“Install the Web Capture Server” on page 187



“Create Directories” on page 188



“Configure The Web Capture Server” on page 189

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 185
•
•
•

Chapter 11 Web Capture Option



“Choose Reader Stations” on page 190



“Configure the Web Capture Connect Agent” on page 191



“Configure Synchronization Directory” on page 192

These steps cover only the installation of the TeleForm side of the Web Capture
Option. For information on installing the Web Capture Client to remote
workstations, see “Install the Web Capture Client” on page 194.

Older Files
When installing Web Capture Server 10.3 or later, older versions of files that may
have been customized in the WCMApp and WCMServices directories are placed
in a backup directory, named with the date the directory was created. For
instance, the directory path may look like C:\Inetpub\TeleForm Web
Capture\Backup\10_30_2006_14_00_27.
NOTE JavaScripts for the TeleForm 9.1 release of Web
Capture are not supported and must be updated to work
with TeleForm 10.0 and later.

Net 2.0 / FIPS Requirement
ASP.Net, used by the Web Capture Server, is not naturally compatible with .Net
2.0.
ASP.Net uses a non-FIPS certified encryption tool which causes a parser error
(Win XP) or unhandled exception (Windows Vista) if you attempt to install the Web
Capture Server to a system that uses .Net 2.0 and FIPS.
To use ASP.Net and .NET 2.0 with Web Capture Server
1. Open WCMServices\Web.config and add the following line under
<system.web>:
<machineKey validationKey="AutoGenerate,IsolateApps"
decryptionKey="AutoGenerate,IsolateApps" validation="3DES"
decryption="3DES" />

If machineKey already exists in Web.Config, just add:
decryption=”3DES”.
2. From the Windows Start menu, click Run.
3. In the Run dialog box, type iisreset and click OK.

•
•
186 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Install the Web Capture Server

4. You should be informed that Internet services were successfully restarted.

See http://support.microsoft.com/kb/911722 for more details.

Install the Web Capture Server
To install Web Capture Server
1. TeleForm must already be installed.
2. Insert the TeleForm DVD in the drive of the Web Server. All Web Capture
Option application files are installed to this server.
3. The Setup Program should automatically start. If it does not, browse the DVD
and run the Setup.exe program.
4. The Welcome screen is shown. Click Next.
5. The License Agreement screen is shown. Select I accept the terms of the
license agreement and click Next.
6. The License Code screen is shown. Type the Web Capture Server license
code (included with the Web Capture Option disc) and click Next.
7. The Choose Destination Location screen is shown. This screen specifies
where the WCM files will be installed. Click Next to continue.
 Click Browse to select a different directory or folder for the installation.
 If the default folder (Inetpub\WCM) does not exist, the Setup program

can create it.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 187
•
•
•

Chapter 11 Web Capture Option

8. On the Virtual Directory Alias screen, type an alias for accessing the WCM
virtual directory.
9. On the Start Copying Files screen, click Next.
10. The Setup Status screen tracks the progress of the installation.
11. The InstallShield Wizard Complete screen is shown when the installation is
finished.
a. Select the Open configuration page option to automatically launch a
Web page for configuring the Web Capture server. See “Configure The
Web Capture Server” on page 189 for instructions on using this page.
b. To launch this configuration page later, use your web browser to open this
file:
http://server_name/WCM/WCMServices/WCMConfig.aspx

c. Click Finish.
12. The following subdirectories exist under Inetpub\TeleForm Web
Capture\. If you changed the installation location, the root directory may be
different, but the subdirectory names remain the same.
 AdmHelp. Help files related to the Web Capture Server Administration

pages
 WCMApp. Web Capture Client files
 WCMServices. Web Capture Server configuration files
 WebHelp. Help files for the Web Capture Clients

13. Proceed to “Create Directories” on page 188.

Create Directories
You must create several directories before proceeding.
To create the required installation directories
1. Open Windows Explorer.
2. Browse to a location that can be accessed both by the Web Capture Server
and TeleForm.
3. Create a new folder named WCMDir in this location.
4. In the WCMDir folder, create two more folders:
 bat
 sync

•
•
188 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Install the Web Capture Server

5. In the WCMDir\bat folder, create one last folder. The name of this folder
should match the machine name of your Web Capture Server. For example, if
your Web Capture Server is named Colossus, the full path for this folder
should be:
WCMDir\bat\Colossus

6. Proceed to “Configure The Web Capture Server” on page 189.

WCMDir

sync

bat

Web Capture
Server name

Configure The Web Capture Server
The Web Capture Server must validate the Web capture directory and
Synchronization directory before you can proceed.
1. If you selected the Open configuration page option at the end of the Web
Capture Option setup program (see Step 11 on page 188), the Web Capture
Administration page opens in your web browser.
OR
To open this page manually, go to Start > Programs > TeleForm Web
Capture > Web Capture Configuration.
2. Open the Configuration Settings tab.
3. In the Web Capture Directory field, type the exact location of the WCMDir\
bat directory you created earlier.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 189
•
•
•

Chapter 11 Web Capture Option

a. See “Create Directories” on page 188 for instructions on creating this
directory.
4. In the Synchronization Directory field, type the exact location of the
WCMDir\sync directory you created earlier.
a. See “Create Directories” on page 188 for instructions on creating this
directory.
5. If the Web Capture Directory and Synchronization Directory are on a local
drive, select the Use default ASP.NET account option.
6. If either directory is not on a local drive, de-select Use default ASP.NET
account and specify the Domain, User ID, and Password for the directories.
Make sure that both directories can be accessed through the same Domain,
User ID, and Password.
7. Click Submit.
8. The Web Capture Server attempts to validate the two directories. If the
directories cannot be validated, either because they do not exist or cannot be
accessed through the login specifications, you are warned.
9. Proceed to “Choose Reader Stations” on page 190.

Choose Reader Stations
You must determine how many Reader stations are needed to process Web
Capture batches before configuring the Web Capture Option Connect Agent
(“Configure the Web Capture Connect Agent” on page 191).

•
•
190 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Install the Web Capture Server

You can assign one TeleForm Reader station to evaluate all the batches created
by Web Capture Clients. You can also “split” the Web Capture Client batch load
among multiple Reader stations.
After you have determined how TeleForm Readers handle Web Capture batches
(see next column), proceed to “Configure the Web Capture Connect Agent” on
page 191.


Single Reader. If you want only a single Reader station to process all Web
Capture Servers, you should configure the Web Capture Option Connect
Agent on that Reader and no others.



Multiple Readers, Batch Distribution Reader. The best way to “split” the
Web Capture batch load among multiple Reader stations is to designate one
Reader as a Batch Distribution station (see “Distribution. Specifies how often
Reader station checks its internal queue for new images to distribute. Only
one Reader station should have the Batch distribution feature enabled. It
should be disabled on all other Readers.” on page 136). Set up the Web
Capture Option Connect Agent on that station and allow it to distribute Web
Capture batches to other Readers. You do not need to configure the Web
Capture Option Connect Agent on any other Reader stations.



Multiple Readers, No Batch Distribution. The Web Capture Option
Connect Agent settings are specific to the Reader station on which the
Connect Agent is configured. If you want multiple Reader stations to process
Web Capture batches, and you are not using a Batch Distribution Station, you
must configure the Web Capture Connect Agent on each Reader.
IMPORTANT Any Reader station on which the Web
Capture Option Connect Agent is configured must have
read-write access to the WCMDir\bat\Server Name
folder. See “Create Directories” on page 188 for information
on creating this folder.

Configure the Web Capture Connect Agent
The Web Capture Option Connect Agent must be configured before TeleForm
can process Web Capture batches.
To configure the Web Capture Connect Agent
1. Start TeleForm Reader.
2. From the Utilities menu, click Connect Agent Setup > Web Capture Setup.
3. On the Web Capture Receive tab, select the Enable web capture
monitoring checkbox.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 191
•
•
•

Chapter 11 Web Capture Option

4. Select the appropriate Type of connection by which this Reader station
accesses the Web capture directory.
 FTP. Click the Setup button to configure the FTP settings.
 Directory. This directory must not require a user name or password for

access. No Setup is required.
 Network. Click the Setup button to configure the UNC path to the desired

network directory. A network connection, unlike the Directory option,
requires a user name and password.
IMPORTANT If using Network Connection Type, the
workstation is limited to only these user credentials for
network connections to the same server. If another user logs
in, the connection fails.

5. Define the Web capture directory. By default, it is:
Web Capture Server\WCMDir\bat

See “Configure The Web Capture Server” on page 189 for more information
on this directory. The Web capture directory specified on the Web Capture
Server Administration page MUST match the Web capture directory
specified for the Connect Agent.
6. Open the Remote Servers tab.
7. Click the Add button.
8. In the Add a Web Capture Server dialog box, type the name of a Web
Capture Server and click OK.
NOTE This name must match the Server Name portion
of the WCMDir\bat\ServerName subfolder you
created earlier. See “Create Directories” on page 188
for instructions on naming this directory.

9. Place a check next to each Web Server that will send batches to this Reader
and click OK.
10. Proceed to “Configure Synchronization Directory” on page 192.

Configure Synchronization Directory
The Synchronization directory is a central repository for Job Settings created at
the home TeleForm site. Web Capture Clients use these Job Settings when
creating batches.

•
•
192 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Install the Web Capture Server

IMPORTANT If you are also using Remote Capture
Option, the subdirectories for Web Capture MUST be
different from the directories used for Remote Capture.

To configure the synchronization directory
1. From the Utilities menu of a TeleForm module, click Configuration.
2. Select the Web Settings tab on the Multiuser Features tab.

3. Select the Enable synchronization option.
4. Select the Type of synchronization. These settings determine how TeleForm
sends Job Settings to the Synchronization directory.
 FTP: Click the Setup button to configure the FTP settings.
 Directory: This directory must NOT require a user name or password for

access. No Setup is required.
 Network: Click the Setup button to configure the UNC path to the

directory. A Network connection requires a user name and password.
5. Specify the Synchronization directory. By default, it is:
C:\WCMDir\sync
 See “Configure The Web Capture Server” on page 189 for more

information on this directory.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 193
•
•
•

Chapter 11 Web Capture Option

 If necessary, use the Browse button to locate it.

6. In the Jobs to include list, place a check next to the jobs that you want to
include in the synchronization.
7. Click OK.
See “Synchronize Job Settings” on page 194 for information on saving Job
Settings to the Web Capture Synchronization directory.

Install the Web Capture Client
The Web Capture Client files are installed to remote workstations the first time a
user connect to the Web Capture Option.
To install the Web Capture Client
1. When you first access Web Capture Server URL, you are prompted to install
the WCM QC Control.
2. You are then prompted to install the WCM Client.
3. Once the Client has been installed, the Web Capture Client is available.

Manage the Web Capture Option
After the Web Capture Option has been installed and configured, you still need to
perform certain management functions:


Synchronize Job Settings



Limit Web Capture Job Settings



Web Capture Server Administration

Synchronize Job Settings
Clicking the Synchronize Now button on the Job Configuration dialog box
automatically saves Job Settings to the Web Capture Synchronization directory.
The Job Configuration dialog box is available from:

•
•
194 ••
•
•



TeleForm Scan Station > File menu



TeleForm Designer > Utilities menu. However, the Synchronize Now
command is not available from Designer. If you build or modify Job Settings

TeleForm Administration Guide

Manage the Web Capture Option

from Designer, you must still open the Job Configuration dialog box in Scan
Station or Control Center to initiate the Synchronize Now command.


TeleForm Control Center

The Synchronize Now button is not available unless you have configured a
Synchronization directory for the Web Capture Option or the Remote Capture
Option.
If you use both the Web Capture Option and the Remote Capture Option, you
should have two separate Synchronization directories. If you use the same
Synchronization directory for both options, you are unable to limit the Job Settings
available to Web Capture Clients. All Job Settings are saved to the single
Synchronization directory, and therefore all are available to Web Capture Clients.

Limit Web Capture Job Settings
Every Web Capture Client is able to access the Job Settings that have been
saved to the Web Capture Synchronization directory through the Synchronize
Now command. However, not every Job Setting must be made available to this
directory.
Both the Web Settings configuration dialog box and the Job Properties >
General tab for a specific Job allow you to determine if a Job Setting should be
added to the Web Capture Synchronization directory.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 195
•
•
•

Chapter 11 Web Capture Option

Web Settings Tab
To select the Job Settings available to Web Capture Clients
1. From the Utilities menu of a TeleForm module, click Configuration.
2. On the Global & Local TeleForm Settings dialog box, open the Multiuser
Features > Web Settings tab.
3. Use the Jobs to include controls to determine which Job Settings are made
available to Web Capture Clients.
4. Click Apply and OK.

Job Properties Dialog Box
To include a job in the Web Capture Service
1. Open the Job Configuration dialog box.
 In Scan Station, click File > Job Configuration.
 In Designer, click Utilities > Job Configuration.
 In Control Center, select Global Settings > Job Configuration.

2. Select the job that you want to edit in the Jobs window.
3. Click the Modify button.

•
•
196 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Manage the Web Capture Option

4. The Job Properties dialog box opens.
5. On the General tab, use the Include in Web Capture checkbox to determine if
the Job Setting is available to Web Capture Clients.

Web Capture Server Administration
To open the Web Capture Server Administration page manually, go to Start >
Programs > Cardiff TeleForm Web Capture > Web Capture Configuration.
See the following sections for information on the Web Capture Administration
controls:


“Configuration Settings Page” on page 198



“License Info Page” on page 199



“Session Info Page” on page 200

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 197
•
•
•

Chapter 11 Web Capture Option

Configuration Settings Page
This page allows you to specify the location of two key directories. If you change
the default directories, and either directory is not on a local drive, make sure that
both directories can be accessed through the same Domain, User ID, and
Password.
After configuring these directories, click Submit. The Web Capture Server
validates the directories by attempting to access them. If it cannot, you are warned
to change either the directories or the login credentials.
Web Capture Directory
This is the root directory to which Web Capture Servers store batches. By default,
it is:
Web Capture Server\WCMDir\bat

The Web Capture Server saves batches to a subdirectory in the Web Capture
Directory. See “Create Directories” on page 188 for information about creating this
subdirectory.
IMPORTANT At least one TeleForm Reader station must
be configured to process batches from this directory. See
“Configure the Web Capture Connect Agent” on page 191
for instructions.

Synchronization Directory
This directory stores the TeleForm Job Settings that are used by Web Capture
Clients when creating batches. By default, it is:
•
•
198 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Manage the Web Capture Option

Web Capture Server\WCMDir\sync

This directory cannot be created from the Configuration Settings page. See
“Create Directories” on page 188 for information about creating this subdirectory.
TeleForm must be configured to save Job Settings to this directory. See
“Configure Synchronization Directory” on page 192 for instructions.
Network Login
If the Remote Batch and Remote Synchronization directories are on a local drive,
select the Use default ASP.NET account option.
If either directory is not on a local drive, de-select Use default ASP.NET account
and specify the Domain, User ID, and Password for the directories. Make sure
that both directories can be accessed through the same Domain, User ID, and
Password.

License Info Page
This page allows you to type a Web Capture Option license and displays a
summary of the active license.
You must add a Web Capture Option license before using the Web Capture
Option to capture batches.
To add a Web Capture Option license
1. Type or replace a Web Capture Option license code in the License Code
field.
2. Click the Replace License button.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 199
•
•
•

Chapter 11 Web Capture Option

3. The license is added to the Web Capture Server. A summary of the license is
displayed in the License Summary window.
To reset a license
Use the Reset button to clear a license entry and reload the last valid Web
Capture Option license.
License Summary
The License Summary window displays:


Name of the license



Serial number of the license



Expiration date of the license



How many users can access the Web Capture Server concurrently. See
“Session Info Page” on page 200 for information on tracking current sessions.

Session Info Page
This page shows the current Web Capture Clients that are currently connected
(sessions) to the Web Capture Server.
This page does not automatically refresh when a session begins or is terminated.
You must manually refresh the page to see the latest information.

•
•
200 ••
•
•



Sessions. The Sessions table provides detailed information on every Web
Capture Client that is currently accessing the Web Capture Server or has
accessed the Web Capture Server in the past. The Active column indicates if
the client is currently accessing the server or not.



IP Address. IP Address of the client.



Client System. Machine ID of the computer on which the client runs.

TeleForm Administration Guide

Manage the Web Capture Option



User. User name of the client.



Active. Whether the session is connected to the server.
 True: Currently connected to the server.
 False: Not currently connected to the server.



Login Time. The last time the client logged into the server.



Last Batch. The last time the client submitted a batch to the server.



Last Contact. The last time the client had contact with the server.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 201
•
•
•

Chapter 11 Web Capture Option

•
•
202 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide


Customize Verifier for Your
Operators
CHAPTER 12

The default Verifier configuration works well for processing the majority of forms.
However, you may want to change these aspects of how Verifier functions:


Correction Options. If you need to visit every available correction (Character
Mode, Field Mode, Capture Mode, and Form Mode), you can set up
thresholds to launch them under certain conditions, instead of skipping these
modes completely.



Keyboard Options. Configure the keystrokes that control certain functions in
Verifier.



Form, Field, and Character Mode Options. Configure how Verifier behaves
and looks during Form Mode, Field Mode, and Character Mode correction.

This chapter describes how to customize Verifier and includes the following topics.


Access Configuration Controls



Correction Options



Keyboard Options



Form Mode Options



Field Mode Options



Character Mode Options

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 203
•
•
•

Chapter 12 Customize Verifier for Your Operators

Access Configuration Controls
To access the Verifier configuration of an operator
1. Start Control Center.

2. Double-click the Configuration Settings branch to expand it.

3. Click the User Settings sub-branch to display the TeleForm operators.

•
•
204 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Access Configuration Controls

4. Double-click an operator from the list. A menu of Verifier settings opens in the
display pane.

5. Double-click any setting to access the corresponding dialog box.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 205
•
•
•

Chapter 12 Customize Verifier for Your Operators

Correction Options
Depending on the nature of the forms you are processing, there are occasions
where you may wish to skip over one or more correction modes, or restrict a
particular workstation to a single correction mode.
If you designate a workstation for a particular correction mode, you may also set
the Image Management Options such that only forms requiring that type of
correction are visible at this workstation. For instructions on setting your Image
Management Options, see page 206.

Field Character Threshold Options
If the data for a given data entry field meets the conditions specified in the Field
character threshold settings, the field is excluded from Character Mode
correction. The field is shown during Field and Form Mode correction, but it is
blank.
In order for a field to be excluded from Character and Field Mode correction, it
must meet the following requirements:


The number of errors in the field is greater than the Maximum in field value;
AND



The number of errors in the field is greater than or equal to the Minimum in
field value;
AND

•
•
206 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Keyboard Options



the percentage of errors is greater than the Percentage in field value.
Minimum in Field

The minimum number of questionable characters a
field must have to qualify for exclusion.

Maximum in Field

The maximum number of questionable characters a
field could contain and not be excluded.

Percentage in Field

The percentage of characters in the field that could
contain questionable characters and not be excluded.

Keyboard Options
The Keyboard Options determine what key strokes are assigned to commands
for these correction modes:


Character Mode



Field Mode



Form Mode - Single Line Fields (Constrained Print Fields, single line Image
Zones, and Entry Fields)



Form Mode - Multi Line Fields (multi-line Image Zones)



Form Mode - Choice Fields

To assign a New Keystroke to a Command
1. Click Correction Keyboard Settings.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 207
•
•
•

Chapter 12 Customize Verifier for Your Operators

2. Select a correction mode from the Category list.
3. In the Command list, select the command.
4. Click Add or double-click the command.
5. The New Key Assignment dialog box opens.

6. In the Select a Key list, click the key you want to assign to the command.
7. The Control, Shift, and Alt check boxes are available or disabled depending
on whether they may be used with the key you selected in step 6.
8. If the current key combination is already mapped to a command, the name of
the assigned command is displayed in the Currently assigned to box. A key
combination can only be assigned to one command per category. If a key that
is already assigned to another command is chosen as the new key
assignment, it replaces the old key assignment.
•
•
208 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Form Mode Options

9. Repeat these steps for the same command or a new one. You can assign
more than one key combination to a command, but a specific key combination
can only control one command.
To remove a Keystroke Assignment
1. In the Keyboard Assignments dialog box, select the command that you want
to remove the keyboard assignment for in the Command list.
2. Select the key assignment in the Current Keys list.
3.

Click Remove.

To restore Default Keystroke Assignments
1. Click Options-Keyboard to open the Keyboard Assignments dialog.
2. To restore defaults for a single command, select it in the Command list and
click Reset.
3. To restore defaults for all the commands in a category, select the category in
the Category list and click Reset All.

Form Mode Options
To modify the behavior and appearance of Verifier during Form Mode
correction
1. Click Form Correction. The Form Mode Options dialog opens.
2. Select either the Correction Options tab, the Appearance tab, or the Image
Positioning tab.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 209
•
•
•

Chapter 12 Customize Verifier for Your Operators

Correction Options Tab
These settings primarily affect how Verifier behaves in Form Mode correction.

You can choose any or all of the following settings from the Correction Options
tab of the Form Mode Options dialog box.


Don't allow incorrect entry. When enabled, a Verifier operator cannot
override any field constraints or validation settings. This option is enabled by
default.
 Only allow special characters from recognition settings. When

enabled, a Verifier operator entering characters in an Image Zone or
Constrained Print Field will only be able to enter those special characters
that have been enabled for that field.

•
•
210 ••
•
•



Don't prompt to save data after each form. When enabled, this option
automatically saves the item after the last field is corrected. This option is
disabled by default.



Skip empty Image Zones. When enabled, Verifier ignores Image Zones that
do not contain any information. This option is enabled by default.



Automatically move to the next character needing review. When enabled,
the Verifier cursor automatically advances after you replace a questionable
character. This option is disabled by default.



Leave after all fields visited. When enabled, Verifier automatically exist the
Capture Zone after all fields have been visited. This option is disabled by
default.

TeleForm Administration Guide

Form Mode Options



Leave after tabbing out of last field. When enabled, Verifier automatically
exits the Capture Zone after you TAB out of the last field. This option is
enabled by default.



Leave when user presses enter. When enabled, Verifier automatically exits
the Capture Zone when the Verifier operator presses the ENTER key. This
option is enabled by default.



Always prompt before leaving. When enabled, Verifier prompts you to
confirm before leaving the Capture Zone. This option is disabled by default.

Appearance Tab
These settings determine how the various elements of an image are displayed
during Form Mode correction.



Color. Select a color for the following elements of an image during Form
Mode correction:
 Normal Text
 Current Field Highlight
 Selected Character Highlight
 Questionable Character Text
 Choice/Entry Field Mark



Multi-Line Image Zone Font Size. These settings determine the size of the
text that is shown when you type a value for a multi-line Image Zone.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 211
•
•
•

Chapter 12 Customize Verifier for Your Operators

The Medium setting is the default value.

Image Positioning Tab
Image Positioning
These settings determine how the image of a specific type of data entry field is
displayed when that particular type of data entry field is visited during Form Mode.
For Example:
You select Center Field in Bottom of Window for Constrained Print
Fields.
You begin to correct a form in Form Mode.
When you tab into a Constrained Print Field, the form image moves so that the
Constrained Print Field is displayed at the bottom center of the Verifier Image
Window.

Default Image Scaling
Select the default scale for the image when displayed in Form Mode. Choose
from:

•
•
212 ••
•
•



Fit Sides



Fit Vertical



Actual Size (100%)

TeleForm Administration Guide

Field Mode Options



Magnify (200%)

Field Mode Options
To change Field Mode options
1. Click Field Correction.
2. The Field Mode Options dialog opens.
3. Select the General Options or Appearance tab.

General Options Tab
These settings determine how Verifier behaves during Field Mode correction.



Don’t allow incorrect entry. When selected, you cannot override any
constraints or validation settings which were assigned to the field either during
template design or by a script. For instance, you could not insert a numeric
character if the field was designated as alphabetic. This option is enabled by
default.
 Only allow special characters from recognition settings. When

enabled, a Verifier operator entering characters in an Image Zone or
Constrained Print Field will only be able to enter those special characters
that have been enabled for that field.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 213
•
•
•

Chapter 12 Customize Verifier for Your Operators



Automatically skip to the next questionable character. If you type a
character to replace the questionable (red) character, the cursor advances to
the next questionable character on the item. This option is disabled by default.



Exclude Image Zones. By default, single-line Image Zones are only corrected
during Form Mode. However, you may encounter situations where Character
or Field Mode correction for such fields is appropriate. In such cases, you can
disable the Exclude Image Zones function.



Number of fields to display. Controls how many fields displayed on the
screen in Field Mode correction. This option is set to 5 by default.

Appearance Tab
These settings determine how the various elements of an image are displayed
during Field Mode correction.



Color. Select a color for the following elements of an image during Field Mode
correction:
 Corrected Text
 Current Text
 Current Questionable Character Text
 Selected Character Highlight
 Uncorrected Text
 Uncorrected Questionable Character Text
 Current Field Highlight

•
•
214 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Character Mode Options

Character Mode Options
To change Character Mode options
1. Click Character Correction.
2. The Character Mode Options dialog opens.
3. Select General Options or Appearance.

General Options Tab
These settings determine how Verifier behaves during Character Mode correction.



Number of columns and rows to display. Sets the number of rows and
columns of characters that appear. The default setting is 9 x 6. This means
that the character boxes are sized to fit in nine columns and six rows in the
Verifier window, up to the number of characters to display selected. Available
grid sizes are 12 x 8 (smallest), 9 x 6, 6 x 4, 3 x 2, and 2 x 1 (largest).



Number of corrected characters to display. The maximum number of
corrected characters that are shown on the screen at once. The default value
is 10.



Number of uncorrected characters to display. The maximum number of
uncorrected characters that are shown on the screen at once. The default is
10.



Exclude confusable characters. This option filters out characters that are
hard to identify without seeing them in context (like the letter O and the

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 215
•
•
•

Chapter 12 Customize Verifier for Your Operators

number 0). Click the Setup button to configure which characters are deemed
“confusable.”
TeleForm provides a default setting for look-alike characters that can be
enabled simply by checking the Exclude Confusable Characters check box.
See “Manage Confusable Characters in Character Mode” on page 217 for
instructions on customizing this function.


Exclude if confidence is less than. Causes a character to automatically
forego Character Mode correction based on how confidently it was evaluated
by TeleForm Reader. Excluded characters are corrected during Field Mode,
where they can be more easily identified from the context of the field. Values
can range from 0-100. The default is 30.



Exclude Image Zones. By default, single-line Image Zones are only corrected
during Form Mode. However, you may encounter situations where Character
or Field Mode correction for such fields is appropriate. In such cases, you can
disable the Exclude Image Zones function.



Sorting. You can sequentially sort the characters that are shown during
Character Mode.
 Alphabetical by field name. Sorts characters by the name of the field

from which they came.
 Field type. This choice is the default sort setting. It sorts characters based

on the allowed range of values for the character, grouping questionable
Numeric, Alpha, and AlphaNumeric characters together. This option has
been found to result in the fastest rate of verification during Character
Mode.
 Confidence. Sorts characters by confidence. Higher confidence

characters are displayed first, followed by lower confidence characters.
 Alphabetical by best guess. Sorts characters according to the

recognized best guess character. This groups all characters that were
recognized as 'A' together and all characters that were recognized as 'B'
together, etc.

•
•
216 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Character Mode Options

Appearance Tab
These settings determine how the various elements of an image are shown during
Character Mode.



Colors. Select a color to display for Corrected Text, Current Text, Current
Background, Uncorrected Text, and Current Character Highlight Rectangle.



Best guess character position. Specify where the best guess characters
should be displayed. Possible choices are upper left, upper right, lower left,
and lower right. The preview is updated whenever this option is changed.



Best guess character font size. Control how large the best guess character
is. Possible choices are Small, Medium, and Large. The preview is updated
when this is changed.



Show best guess for uncorrected characters. Displays best guess
characters for all characters in character mode. If this box is cleared best
guess characters are only displayed for corrected characters.

Manage Confusable Characters in Character Mode
The Look-Alike Character feature allows you to establish a list of characters that
are never shown in Character Mode correction, but are instead shown for the first
time in Field Mode correction.
The purpose of the character feature is to reduce the number of characters that
get held over during Character Mode correction. One example of look alike
characters is the letter l (el) and the number 1 (one). Due to their similarity, it is
virtually impossible to distinguish them during Character Mode correction. By

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 217
•
•
•

Chapter 12 Customize Verifier for Your Operators

designating these as look alike characters, they are excluded from Character
Mode correction and are shown instead during Field Mode correction, where they
can be deduced from the context of the field.
To add or remove characters from the default Look-Alike settings
1. Start Verifier.
2. From the Options menu, click Character Mode.
3. On the Character Mode Options dialog box, click the General Options tab.

4. Make sure the Exclude confusable characters check box is selected.
5. Click the Setup button.
6. The Look-Alike Character Setup for Character Mode dialog box opens.

•
•
218 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Character Mode Options

7. To exclude a character:
a. Select the Character class.
b. In the Correctable Characters list, select the character you wish to
exclude.
c. Click the

button.

8. To include a character:
a.

Select the Character class.

b. In the Correctable Characters list, select the character you wish to
include.
c. Click the

button.

Add Extended Characters
Extended characters are items such as his common punctuation marks,
superscript numbers (1, 2, and 3), parentheses, brackets, non-English characters,
and so on. If you select the Include external characters check box, the full list of
extended characters are “appended” to characters in the Characters to exclude
list. You can then move them to the Characters to include list as needed.
Each Character type has a unique set of extended characters. To add all the
possible extended characters to the Characters to include list, you would need
to select each Character type in turn.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 219
•
•
•

Chapter 12 Customize Verifier for Your Operators

Restore Default Character Exclusion Settings
To restore the default character exclusion settings
1. On the Look-Alike Character Setup for Character Mode dialog box, click
Set Defaults.
2. The Set Look-Alike Character Defaults dialog box opens.

3. Select the Character classes you want to restore to their default values.
4. Click OK to save your changes and return to the Look-Alike Character Setup
for Character Mode dialog box.

•
•
220 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

PART 3

TeleForm
Maintenance

This section provides information about general maintenance
of your TeleForm system.


“Run and Manage TeleForm” on page 223. Describes
TeleForm Control Center and Monitor, two applications that
help you run the system.



“Maintain System Performance” on page 251. Simple
maintenance procedures can keep TeleForm running
smoothly.



“Revision Control” on page 259. Describes how TeleForm
can work with the SourceSafe revision control application.



“Analyze Form Design” on page 277. Speed up your
system by analyzing your form design.



“Analyze Your System Throughput” on page 295. Speed up
your system by analyzing your system.

Part 3 TeleForm Maintenance

•
•
222 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide


Run and Manage TeleForm
CHAPTER 13

This chapter describes how to run and manage TeleForm


License Monitoring



Run Modules



Run Reader and AutoMerge Publisher as Services



Control Center



TeleForm Monitor

License Monitoring
TeleForm modules cannot be run from a workstation unless TeleForm can verify
that you have a valid, activated product. This is done using TeleForm License
Service that is used to lock TeleForm to the TeleForm server using Machine
Locking.
See “TeleForm License Service” on page 223 for details about these license
monitoring methods.

TeleForm License Service
The License Service is automatically installed to the TeleForm Server 10.0 and
later and used to manage licenses. This service ‘locks’ TeleForm to the server
using Machine Locking.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 223
•
•
•

Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm

To start the TeleForm License Service
1. Open Windows Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services on your
TeleForm Server.
2. On the Services window, find the TeleForm License Service.
3. Confirm the Startup Type is Automatic.

Run Modules
Most often, all the program files for all the TeleForm modules are installed to each
workstation. You can choose to install only certain modules to workstations, but
you do not need to do this. If you choose the default installation method, all the
TeleForm modules are available on every TeleForm workstation.
TeleForm License Service keeps track of how many instances of each module are
running and prevents you from launching modules for which you have insufficient
licenses. Reader and AMP stations running those modules as services (“Run
Reader and AutoMerge Publisher as Services” on page 224) are also tracked.
To launch a module
To start a TeleForm module on a workstation, click Windows Start > Programs >
Cardiff TeleForm and select the module.

Run Reader and AutoMerge Publisher as Services
The TeleForm workstation install program automatically configures two services
on each workstation:


AutoMerge Publisher (AMP)



Reader

These services are installed and registered by the setup program. Initially, they
must be manually started. However, you can change the startup method from
manual to automatic. See “Configure Services” on page 225 for instructions.
NOTE AutoMerge Publisher and Reader can be run as
services only by TeleForm Enterprise. TeleForm Workgroup
does not support this configuration.

•
•
224 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Run Reader and AutoMerge Publisher as Services

System Requirements
In addition to the operating systems supported for workstations, Reader and AMP
services can run on these server operating systems:


Windows Server 2003 (SP2)



2008 Server (Service Pack 2), Windows 2008 R2 Server (Service Pack 1)
IMPORTANT They CANNOT be run as a service on the
TeleForm Server, or on any member of a cluster if that
cluster is acting as the TeleForm Server.

Reader and AMP can also be run as regular applications, not only services, on
these server operating systems.

User Interface
When run as services, Reader and AMP have no user interface
Even if you usually run these modules as services, you can always launch the
regular user interface. Simply click Windows Start > Programs > Cardiff
TeleForm > TeleForm Reader or AutoMerge Publisher. For example, if you
want to use Reader’s Connect Agent Setup feature, you can launch the Reader
module and use the Utility > Connect Agent menu. Similarly, if you need to create
a new merge, you can launch AMP, configure the merge, then shutdown the
module and run the TeleForm AutoMerge Publisher service. You can also
configure merges through Designer’s Utility menu.

Global Configuration of Services
The Global & Local TeleForm Settings dialog box, described on “Change the
System Configuration” on page 117, allows you to configure certain aspects of
Reader and AutoMerge Publisher. These configuration settings apply whether the
modules are run as regular modules or as services.

Configure Services
To configure the TeleForm AutoMerge Publisher or TeleForm Reader
services
1. Start the TeleForm workstation on which the service(s) are run.
2. Launch the Windows Control Panel.
3. From the Control Panel, click Administrative Tools.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 225
•
•
•

Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm

4. From the Administrative Tools window, click Services.
5. Right-click the TeleForm AutoMerge Publisher or TeleForm Reader service
and select Properties.
6. The service’s Properties dialog box opens.
7. On the General tab, choose the Automatic Startup type.

8. Open the Log on tab and choose the log-on method for the service:
 Local System account
 This account. You must specify a valid user name (including domain, if

applicable) and password.

•
•
226 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Control Center

9. Click OK on the Properties dialog box.

Control Center
Control Center is a powerful application that allows you to monitor and control
your TeleForm system.
TeleForm Control Center is a snap-in for Microsoft Management Console (MMC).
The relationship of the Control Center snap-in to the MMC consists of a shared
common hosting environment, and cross-application integration. The Control
Center snap-in resides in the MMC, but does not run on its own. The Control
Center snap-in delivers the actual management behavior; MMC itself does not
provide any management functionality. The MMC environment provides for
seamless integration between snap-ins. Therefore, the combination of Control
Center and MMC allows you to manage your TeleForm system within an
integrated interface.
TeleForm Control Center manages every aspect of automated capture processing
in TeleForm. When you are processing a high volume of data, it is important to
know how many images are in each phase of the system, and how quickly these
images are being processed. With TeleForm Control Center, you can find where
the system is not as efficient as it could be, and find ways to optimize your system.
You can think of TeleForm Control Center as a high-tech diagnostics lab. Because
of the sophisticated equipment (MMC), analyzing form processing becomes a
scientific pursuit. If your experiment (form processing with the current

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 227
•
•
•

Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm

configuration) does not yield the desired results, you troubleshoot the problem
(using Control Center Statistics), and come up with a solution (by changing one or
more configuration settings and/or by changing one or more form designs).

NOTE A user must have Full Rights to the TeleForm
directory in order to use Control Center.

Control Center Branches
Control Center is composed of 5 distinct branches. To display a branch’s contents
in the right pane of the Control Center window, click that branch.
The following bullets highlight the major benefit of each branch in the Control
Center tree.


System branch. Displays summary statistics and licenses of the TeleForm
system, and more detailed statistics on each of the TeleForm modules and
users.



Current Workload branch. Displays detailed statistics of every batch and
form that is currently being processed in the TeleForm system.



Configuration Settings branch. Allows you to customize the global, user,
and local settings of your TeleForm system.



Alerts branch. Displays special conditions that signal some sort of
inefficiency in your TeleForm system.



Reports branch. Allows you to generate reports based on the statistics in
Control Center.

Outline of the Control Center Tree
Control Center functions are accessed by clicking folders on the Control Center
tree. This tree operates like the Windows Explorer tree.

•
•
228 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Control Center

The Control Center tree is in the left pane of the Control Center window:


Each folder in the tree represents a category of information.



When you click on a folder, its contents are displayed in the right pane of the
Control Center window (the display pane).



When you double-click on a folder that expands, sub-folders are displayed
underneath the main folder.



To expand a folder, click



To collapse an expanded folder, click

(plus), or double-click the folder
(minus), or double-click the folder.

Customize Your Control Center window
The Action menu contains options that allow you to customize the display of the
Control Center window. This menu applies to the folder or sub-folder that you
select on the Control Center tree. You can also access this menu by right-clicking
a folder or sub-folder.
For example, if you want to put the contents of the Readers sub-folder in its own
window, right-click Readers, and then select New window from here on the
shortcut menu. The Readers sub-folder opens in its own window. This feature
allows you to view multiple windows of information on the same screen.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 229
•
•
•

Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm

Graph Colors
The Colors tab allows you to set the colors used in the Control Center Graphs.
To change the graph colors
1. In the TeleForm Control Center tree, double-click Configuration Settings.
This folder expands to include four sub-folders.
2. Double-click Control Center.
The Control Center list is shown in the display pane.
3. Double-click Control Center in the display pane.
4. The Control Center Properties dialog box opens.
5. Click the Colors tab. The Colors dialog box opens.

•
•
230 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Control Center

6. Change the Graph Colors as desired.
7. Click OK.

Workflow Analysis
Control Center gives you access to complete workflow analysis. This analysis
includes extensive system and operator statistics. Control Center statistics cover
specific things such as the number of images in a batch that are waiting to be
evaluated by Reader stations. They also cover more general things such as the
average time it takes to evaluate one image in TeleForm Reader. Using these
statistics, you can manage and optimize the entire data collection process: from
scanning images and correcting forms through final data output.
Using Control Center Statistics, you can determine the following:


How many TeleForm Designer, Reader, Verifier, Scan Station, and AutoMerge
Publisher stations are being used;



How many images are waiting for evaluation in TeleForm Reader and
correction in TeleForm Verifier;



Estimated time to complete evaluation and correction of all images in your
TeleForm system;



High, low and average time to evaluate a form’s image in TeleForm Reader;



Average time to correct a form’s image in TeleForm Verifier;



Number of images evaluated in TeleForm Reader and the number of
images corrected in TeleForm Verifier.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 231
•
•
•

Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm

Recommended Statistic Settings
You can use the default Statistics Collection settings, with the following
exceptions:


If you want to collect Reader statistics, you must select the Collect Reader
statistics check box. It is recommended that you enable this setting.



If you are processing a large number of items per day, you may want to set
Form Tracking to Minimal Tracking to maximize the system’s speed.

If you need to collect detailed field statistics, make sure that you only do so while
you are optimizing a single form or document. In addition, make sure that you
clear the Collect detailed field statistics... check box when you are done
optimizing that form or document. Collecting these statistics can greatly slow
down form evaluation in your Reader stations, slow down the system
considerably, and may require a large amount of disk space.
IMPORTANT Minimal Tracking automatically deletes
intermediate records (such as prints, receives, and sends).
Full Tracking collects and stores intermediate records.
With Full Tracking on, these intermediate records remain
on your system until you delete them manually.

Statistics Parameters
Before you start analyzing TeleForm processing, you must specify what time
period you want to focus on and how often you want to measure TeleForm.
To set the statistics parameters
1. In the TeleForm Control Center tree, expand the Configuration Settings
branch.
2. Select Control Center.
3. Double-click Control Center in the display pane.
4. The Control Center Properties dialog box opens with the Data tab displayed.

•
•
232 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Control Center

5. Under Statistics Data, do one of the following:
 Click the Include all data option if you want to include all statistical

information from the databases.
 Click the Include data for (days) option if you want to include statistics for

a specific time interval. Type the number of days that you want the
statistics to reflect. For example, if you type 1, the statistics are only for
today.
Your Purge Log settings impact how much data is actually available. Refer to
“Use the Purge Log” on page 252 for more information.
6. Under Batch Data, type the number of minutes that you want deleted and
completed batches to show up under the Current Workload branch.
7. In the Refresh Data (sec) box, type a number. For example, if you type 300,
Control Center updates the statistics every 5 minutes.
NOTE If you have built up a large amount of
information in your statistics databases, you may notice
a slight decrease in system performance. To improve
system performance and responsiveness, include data
for only one day, and increase the value in the Refresh
Data (sec) box.

8. Click OK to save settings and close the Control Center Properties dialog box.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 233
•
•
•

Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm

NOTE Clicking OK starts a refresh process of stored
data using the new settings. Depending on how much
information is stored in your statistics databases, and
how much of this data you are going to display, it might
take some time to save these settings (in which case,
you see the hourglass pointer).

9. Your statistic parameters are now specified.

Reader Statistic Collection
To change which statistics are collected from TeleForm Reader
1. In the Control Center tree, expand Configuration Settings and click the
Global Settings sub-folder.
2. Double-click Reader Settings. The Global TeleForm Settings > Reader dialog
box opens.
3. Click the General sub-tab.

4. Click the Collect Reader statistics check box if you want to collect statistics
from TeleForm Reader. You can also click the Collect Reader field statistics
check box if you want to collect evaluation statistics for every field on a
particular form or document. Select the template that you want to collect field

•
•
234 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Control Center

statistics for, or select <All forms> if you want to collect field statistics for all of
your forms and documents.
NOTE Remember that you only want to collect Reader
field statistics while optimizing a form or document, not
while processing.

5. Click OK.

Verifier Statistic Collection
To collect Verifier statistics
1. In the Control Center tree, expand Configuration Settings and click the
Global Settings sub-folder.
2. Double-click Global System. The Global TeleForm Settings > Global System
dialog box opens.
3. Click the General sub-tab.

4. Click the Collect Verifier statistics check box.
5. To collect only the most fundamental statistics, click the Minimal Tracking
check box.
6. Click OK.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 235
•
•
•

Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm

Alerts
With Control Center Alerts, you can have messages open whenever an
administrator-specified event occurs. Optionally, you can set up Control Center to
perform certain actions, such as sending an email or executing a command, when
a specific event occurs.
For example, if you want to be notified when more than 300 images need
evaluation, you can enable the “More than __ images need evaluation” Alert, and
type 300 in the corresponding box. You can then take the necessary actions to
increase (or start) the evaluation of images whenever there is a backlog.
Using Control Center Alerts, you can specify conditions that result in a warning
message being displayed. You can generate alerts for the following conditions:


When TeleForm estimates that the forms or documents in the system are not
be completed by a certain time;



When more than a specified number of images need to be evaluated;



When more than a specified number of images need to be corrected;



When more than a specified number of batches need to be committed;



When there are items that have been in the system for more than a specified
number of days;



When a Reader station has stalled;



When a TeleForm Statistic file exceeds the size specified, e.g., a file
exceeding 100KB in size;



When a TeleForm database log file exceeds the size specified, e.g., a file
exceeding 200KB in size.

Alerts in Control Center
To aid your management of the TeleForm process, you should specify under what
conditions you want Control Center to display Alert messages.
To specify the conditions of Control Center alert messages
1. In the TeleForm Control Center tree, expand the Configuration Settings
branch.
2. Select Control Center.
3. Double-click Control Center in the display pane. The Control Center
Properties dialog box opens.
4. Click the Alerts tab.

•
•
236 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Control Center

Email Alerts
In addition to displaying alerts in the Control Center module, you can also set
Control Center Alerts to provide email notification, execute a command, or log the
event in the NT Event Log.

IMPORTANT Alert notifications only work while Control
Center is running.

To set Alert Properties for a given event
1. Click on the Alert Action button
to the left of the event.
The Alert Properties dialog box opens.
2. Change the relevant alert properties.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 237
•
•
•

Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm

The Alert section displays the Alert ID and a description of the alert (e.g.
“Estimated completion later than __ today”).
 Send Email to. Defines the recipient(s) of the Email Alert. Click the Send

Email to checkbox and type one or more email addresses in the input field
separated by semicolons.
 Execute command line. Specifies a command to be performed when the

given condition occurs. If you want the alert message text to be added to
the command line, use “%1” to indicate the placement of the message
text.
 Log Alert to NT Event Log. Sends a log entry to the Event Log on the

TeleForm Server. Click the Log Alert to NT Event Log checkbox to log
the event.
 Test Action. After setting up the Alert Actions, you can test them by

clicking the Test Action button. Whatever actions were selected is
performed (e.g. you can send an email alert to a test address).
The Re-Notification section allows you to specify when to send another alert.
 Suppress subsequent occurrences for __ hours prevents further alerts

for a specified time period. Type the time (in hours) in the input field. Some
alerts use additional filtering options:
 Same alert subject suppresses subsequent alerts from the same batch,

workstation, file, etc.

•
•
238 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Control Center

 Any alert subject suppresses subsequent alerts from any batch,

workstation, file, etc.
For example, if you have several stalled Readers, setting the Same alert
subject option only suppresses the alert notifications from the original
workstation. Setting Any alert subject suppresses the alert notifications
from all the stalled Reader workstations.
 Select Re-notify if not cleared in __ hours to force an alert notification in

the specified time frame, if the alert has not been cleared in that time. Type
the time (in hours) in the input field.
3. Click Apply to save and apply your settings.

E-Mail Alert Setup
You can define separate alert properties for each event in the Workflow list.
Events that have email alert actions associated with them have a yellow arrow on
the Alert Action button
.
To set up e-mail delivery
1. Click the Email Setup button. The Outbound E-Mail dialog box opens.

2. Select Message Importance from the drop-down menu (Low, Normal, or
High). The default value is Normal.
3. Select Send Method from the drop-down menu (SMTP or MAPI, if available).
The default value is SMTP.
4. Type your Outbound mail server, Port and Sender/Reply address.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 239
•
•
•

Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm

5. Click OK to save your Email Send options.
6. Once you have finished setting your Alert Properties, click the OK button to
return to Control Center Properties dialog box.
7. Click OK to save your alerts.

Configure TeleForm with Control Center
Control Center can be used to configure all of your TeleForm settings. Instead of
going to each TeleForm workstation to configure TeleForm, you can configure all
global, user, and local (station) settings in one place. Having centralized control
simplifies the set up of TeleForm. Control Center also allows you to manage and
configure the TeleForm systems global settings, workstation settings and user
settings. In a multiuser environment, every TeleForm workstation and user runs off
the network. With Control Center, you have control over every configuration in
TeleForm, regardless of whether or not a particular workstation or user is logged
on.

Use the Configuration Settings folder to access:

•
•
240 ••
•
•



Global Settings. Affect all TeleForm workstations and users.



Station Settings. Only affect a specific workstation.



User Settings. Only affect a specific operator.

TeleForm Administration Guide

Control Center

Global Settings
Global settings are those settings that apply to every workstation, user and form in
the TeleForm system. These settings are the most powerful settings in Control
Center. Therefore, be careful when you change a global setting, because it can
affect your TeleForm system dramatically.
Setting

Description

Also Found In...

Security

Sets up a security system that restricts
access of certain information and
TeleForm functions to designated users.

Security command on the Utilities
menu of the TeleForm Verifier window

Licenses

Displays the current license information of
your TeleForm system.

License Info command on the File
menu of the TeleForm License
Manager window

Image
Preprocessing

Sets up the preprocessing settings of all
form images that enter TeleForm Reader.

Image Preprocessing command on
the Utilities menu of any major
TeleForm application

Recognition Set

Enables the recognition (processing) of
Existing forms and VersiForms.

Recognition Set command on the
File menu of the TeleForm Designer
window

Reader Settings

Sets up Reader task settings, form
identification, recognition, OCR
performance, image handling, disk space
monitoring and other general Reader
settings.

Configuration command on the
Utilities menu of any major TeleForm
application

Form Merges

Enables/disables and sets up form merges
between form or document fields and
database values.

Form Merge command on the
Utilities menu of the TeleForm
Designer, Reader and AutoMerge
Publisher window

Purge Log

Set up the removal (purge) of information
from the TeleForm system.

Purge Log command on the Utilities
menu of the TeleForm Designer or
Reader window

Multiuser Features

Sets up features that are unique to
multiuser versions of TeleForm.

Configuration command on the
Utilities menu of any major TeleForm
application

Job Configuration

Allows you to save the settings for a batch
and use these settings for future batches
of the same type.

Job Configuration command on the
File menu of the TeleForm Scan
Station window

Advanced
Configuration

Allows you to change the value of
additional global settings are not shown in
the Global Setting options listed above.

Configuration command on the
Utilities menu of any major TeleForm
application.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 241
•
•
•

Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm

Station Settings
When you click the Station Settings sub-folder, a list of your TeleForm
workstations are shown in the display pane.

When you double-click on a workstation, the Local TeleForm Settings dialog box
for that workstation opens.
For example, if you have TeleForm Reader generating batches using Automated
Batch Creation on a workstation that is also used for verification, you probably
have the enable evaluations option for this Reader turned off. However, if you
determine that the amount of images in the evaluation queue is such that you
cannot complete their evaluation by the end of the workday, you can turn on the
enable evaluations and leave it on until the queue is sufficiently reduced.
The following table contains a description of each Local TeleForm Setting:

•
•
242 ••
•
•

Station Setting

Description

Local System tab

Sets up batch automation, specifies whether to export forms
with missing pages, and enables/disables audible alerts for this
workstation.

Designer tab

Specifies whether or not a new form is created when TeleForm
Designer is started, specifies the background color of Existing
forms, and specifies the TeleForm Spell Checker options for this
workstation.

TeleForm Administration Guide

Control Center

Station Setting

Description

Reader tab

Sets up the configuration of TeleForm Reader for this
workstation.

Merge/Print tab

Defines how forms and images are printed. If you use
AutoMerge Publisher, this tab also controls certain aspects of
the merge function.

Configuration
Options tab

Changes the value of miscellaneous settings for this
workstation.

User Settings
User settings apply to individual TeleForm operators.
To view a user’s settings
1. Expand the Configuration Settings branch.
2. Expand the User Settings branch.
3. Click the User Settings sub-folder. The list of operators is shown.
4. Select a user from the list. The user settings is shown in the display pane.

For more information on changing user settings, refer to “Customize Verifier for
Your Operators” on page 203.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 243
•
•
•

Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm

Batch Control
Workgroup and Enterprise customers can commit, discard, and pause batches
from Control Center rather than having individual Verifier operators perform these
tasks. Using Control Center for batch disposition frees your Verifier resources to
concentrate on Quality Control and correction tasks.
To perform an action on a batch
1. Right-click a batch in the Control Center “Current Workload” display.
2. Select Properties.
3. The Batch Properties dialog box for the selected batch opens.
4. Select a batch disposition task from the Action list.
 Commit
 Discard
 Pause
 Resume

5. Click OK.

Log on to Control Center
If you have security enabled (using the Security option of the Global Settings
sub-folder in TeleForm Control Center), every time you start TeleForm Control
Center, you are asked to type a login and password.


If you just want to view the basic throughput statistics, you can log on as any
TeleForm user, or you can click Cancel on the TeleForm Login dialog box.



If you want to change Global or Local configurations, or view sensitive
information, you must log on as a user with administrative rights.



If you want to change Purge Log settings you must log on as a user with
administrative rights.



If you want to change station configuration dialogs that do not require
administrative rights, you need to have the right to “Configure Reader” set.

To log on as a different user while TeleForm Control Center is open
1. On the Action menu, point to Task, and then select Login.
The TeleForm Login dialog box opens.
2. Enter the new login Name and Password.

•
•
244 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Control Center

NOTE TeleForm Control Center users must have
permissions to run Control Center or be the TeleForm
Administrator to successfully run Control Center.

Use Control Center to Resolve Inefficiency
To diagnose inefficiency between your Verifier operators and Reader
stations.
1. View the Workflow tab of the System folder.

2. Look in the Evaluate column, and see if any of these statistics point to the
problem.
If the average time to evaluate an image seems too long, you may need to
reconfigure either your TeleForm Reader station settings, your global capture
processing settings, or your form or document design.
3. Try changing your local or global settings, and then process a batch of forms
with these new settings.
4. Repeat steps 1-3 until you have increased TeleForm Reader efficiency.
5. If your evaluation efficiency is still problematic:
 Re-design one or more of your forms.
 Purchase additional Reader licenses.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 245
•
•
•

Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm

For more information on improving efficiency, refer to “Analyze Your System
Throughput” on page 295.

TeleForm Monitor
TeleForm Monitor is used to oversee the fundamentals of each TeleForm
workstation. It can show you the status of each workstation as well as the status of
each image that is currently being processed by TeleForm Reader.

TeleForm Monitor Overview
The TeleForm Monitor has four tabs:


Applications. Provides a list of all running TeleForm modules and indicates
how long they have been running, what they are currently doing, how long
they have been working on the current task, how long it has been since the
last status update, and more. See “Monitor Active Tasks” on page 247 for
more information.



Active Batches. Shows which batches a Reader, Verifier operator or Scan
Station operator is working on and how long the application has locked the
batch or items in the batch.



Error Log. Provides a centralized view of all errors logged by all TeleForm
modules. You can filter the list by Workstation, Application and Age.



Image Queue. Provides the same list of images previously shown in TeleForm
Monitor but also provides a great deal of additional information. See “Monitor
Queued Images” on page 248 for more information.

Start TeleForm Monitor
You may want to run TeleForm Monitor on the same workstation as Control Center
to give you access to both TeleForm management modules.
To run TeleForm Monitor on the same workstation as Control Center
1. From the Windows Start menu, select Applications > TeleForm > Utilities >
TeleForm Monitor.
2. The TeleForm Monitor window opens.
3. If you want, change the Refresh Time(s) value. TeleForm Monitor refreshes
the information it displays every specified number of seconds.

•
•
246 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

TeleForm Monitor

Monitor Active Tasks
Under Active Tasks in the TeleForm Monitor window, the following information is
displayed for each workstation running TeleForm over the network:


The name of the TeleForm workstation;



The TeleForm application the workstation is running;

The status of each TeleForm application running over the network.The following
table lists possible status values for each TeleForm application
Status

Meaning

Active

The TeleForm application is currently being used.

Idle

The TeleForm application is currently running but not actively
performing a task.

Stalled

The TeleForm application is currently stalled.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 247
•
•
•

Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm

Status

Meaning

TeleForm Reader Evaluate

TeleForm Reader is evaluating an image.

TeleForm Reader Idle

TeleForm Reader is waiting for images to process.

TeleForm Reader Stalled

TeleForm Reader is stalled. Check the workstation running
TeleForm Reader for the specific problem.
If possible, clear the problem at the workstation.
If you are unable to do this, then click Delete Stalled Task on
the Task menu of Monitor.
Often, workstations are reported as Stalled if their system times
are significantly different (more than two minutes) from the
workstation running Monitor. Consider having all workstations
synchronize their clocks from the TeleForm Server each time
they log on or re-start.

Monitor Queued Images
In the Image Queue list on the TeleForm Monitor window, a list of images is
displayed. These images were scanned, faxed, or automatically retrieved from
directory into TeleForm, went to the TeleForm network directory, and are waiting to
be evaluated by a TeleForm Reader workstation.


Use the Image Queue list to monitor TeleForm’s progress as it processes
images.



If you want, you can view, save, print or delete an image in the Image Queue
list using the Monitor menu commands. For example, to view an image, click
on the image in the Image Queue list, and then select View on the Image
menu.



If you attempt to view a queued image through Monitor while the file is being
evaluated or viewed by another workstation, a 'file locked' message opens.



After a file has been retrieved for evaluation by Reader, the image is removed
from the queue.



You cannot delete an image from the TeleForm Monitor if the image is part of a
batch.

Bad Images
A Bad Image status can be caused by:


•
•
248 ••
•
•

A bad image file (a file that is actually damaged);

TeleForm Administration Guide

TeleForm Monitor



A file that TeleForm does not recognize as one of its supported image formats.

If a Bad Image is found in the TeleForm Monitor’s Image Queue, the image
should be removed.
To remove a bad image
 If the image is not part of a batch,
a. Select the image in the Image Queue
b. Click File > Delete.


If the image is part of a batch, the image cannot be deleted.
a. Select the image in the Image Queue and note the path of the image in
the TeleForm Monitor’s status bar. This path indicates which batch the bad
image belongs to.
b. Discard and reprocess the batch.

Bad Evaluations
If an image in the Image Queue list has a Bad Evaluation status, this means that
TeleForm Reader had a problem processing one or more fields on the image. The
image was evaluated and passed on to Verifier. The image that generated the
Bad Evaluation in TeleForm Monitor also displays the Bad Evaluation status in
Verifier’s Image Management dialog.
When the Verifier operator opens the image and corrects it, the Verifier’s status
bar reflects the status of each field during the correction process. When the
problem field is found, the Verifier status bar indicates a status of Bad Evaluation
and the field(s) that caused the problem are displayed.
If this occurs occasionally, correct the field as you normally would and the image
completes the verification process and exports with no problems. However, if you
receive this message frequently, you should contact Autonomy Cardiff Technical
Support.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 249
•
•
•

Chapter 13 Run and Manage TeleForm

•
•
250 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide


Maintain System
Performance
CHAPTER 14

This chapter describes how to maintain your TeleForm system.


General Maintenance Tips



Run Windows Utilities



Use the Purge Log



Use Database Utilities



Archive Images



Delete Old Image Zone Files

General Maintenance Tips
As you use TeleForm, you accumulate hundreds or even thousands of image files
on your hard drive in just a short time. The constant cycle of deleting files and
receiving new ones inevitably causes fragmentation on your system's hard drive.
To optimize your system's integrity and performance, we recommend the following
maintenance measures:


Run ScanDisk, Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup at regular intervals;



Use the Purge Log;

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 251
•
•
•

Chapter 14 Maintain System Performance



Archive images;



Delete old Image Zone files.



Use Database Utilities as appropriate

Run Windows Utilities
Windows includes several built-in utilities to help you keep your hard drive in
optimum operating order.
ScanDisk
ScanDisk checks your hard drive for lost file fragments, invalid file names, and
cross-linked files which can slow performance and even cause errors. The
ScanDisk utility detects and repairs these situations before they can cause
problems.
Disk Defragmenter
This utility locates files that have been stored in several different locations on the
disk (that is, they are fragmented) and rejoins them, allowing these files to be
located and read much more quickly. Defragmenting also consolidates the free
space on your hard drive, making it faster and easier to write new information to
the disk.
Disk Cleanup
Disk Cleanup searches your drive for temporary files, internet cache files, and
unnecessary program files that you can safely delete. You can direct Disk
Cleanup to delete some or all of those files.

NOTE You must close all TeleForm applications on the
workstation prior to running these utilities.

Use the Purge Log
Use TeleForm’s Purge Log to automatically delete old files from your hard disk,
ensuring that you always have enough disk space to accommodate your incoming
data.
The Purge Log provides a systematic way to delete old and unwanted images
from your hard drive. You have two options for triggering the purge function:
•
•
252 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Use the Purge Log



Manual, or on-demand, with the Purge now button;



Automatic, at a scheduled time.

Both methods allow you to specify the age of the files to be deleted. By default,
the Purge Log is set to purge your TeleForm files after they have been on your
system for seven days, excluding NonForms and any images.

Manual Purge With the Purge Log
To open the purge log
1. Start TeleForm Designer or TeleForm Reader.
2. From the Utilities menu, click Purge Log. The Purge Log dialog box opens.

3. Select the type of records you want to remove.
4. Choose the purge method from the Purge checked events section. Purge
settings are described in “Purge Events” on page 254.

Scheduled Purges
By default, the Purge Log is configured to delete files after they have been on
your hard drive for 7 days. While you can purge files manually with the Purge now
function, or use the standard automatic purge feature, you can also schedule your
purges so they occur at a convenient time. Scheduling purges for the weekend,
for example, can keep your TeleForm Reader station process forms more
efficiently during the week.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 253
•
•
•

Chapter 14 Maintain System Performance

To create a purge schedule
1. Start TeleForm Designer or TeleForm Reader.
2. From the Utilities menu, click Purge Log. The Purge Log dialog box opens.
3. Choose the files to purge. The available events are described on “Purge
Events” on page 254.
4. In the Purge checked events section, select the Automatic checkbox.
5. Click the Schedule button. The Schedule dialog box opens.
6. On the Schedule dialog box, define when the purge takes place. You can
choose from:
 Weeks
 Days
 Hours
 Seconds

7. Click OK on the Schedule and Purge Log dialog boxes.

Purge Events
The following paragraphs describe the events that can be purged.

Completed Tracking Records
In the Completed Tracking Records section, select those types of events that
you want to automatically remove from the form log. These are not files, just
records of past events.
Send/Print/Reminders
Check this box if you want to purge records of forms that were scheduled to be
faxed, printed, or that used the Send Reminder option.
Expected Returns
Check this box if you want to purge records of forms sent with the Track Expected
Returns option selected.
Receives
Check this box if you want to purge records of all received (faxed or scanned)
forms.
E-Forms
These are records of forms completed using the NonForm Data Entry utility or
TeleForm Internet Server records needing review.

•
•
254 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Use Database Utilities

Deleted Data/Exports
These are records of files that have been deleted and of forms that have been
auto exported or manually exported from TeleForm.

Stored Images
In the Stored Images section, select the types of image files that you want to
purge.
You can choose to purge images with the status Non Form, Evaluated OK, Labels
& Zones, or all of these.
You cannot automatically purge images with the status Needs Review, since they
contain data that has not been processed yet. These files can be deleted
manually from the Form Log or TeleForm Verifier's Stored Images window.

Other Events
In the Other events section, you can choose to purge:


Batches that have been completed (that is, they have been committed or
discarded)



TeleForm Reader statistics



TeleForm Verifier statistics

Use Database Utilities
Use TeleForm’s Database Utilities occasionally to optimize your system's integrity.
The following functions can be performed from the Database Utilities program:


Clear lock records



Rescan unique file database



Purge\rescan unique file database



Change next batch ID



Run Diagnostic Tests

For more information about Database Utilities, refer to the TeleForm Help.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 255
•
•
•

Chapter 14 Maintain System Performance

Archive Images
TeleForm Verifier has a built-in archiving feature that allows you to remove any
number of form images from standard TeleForm activity and store their image files
in the \BAK subdirectory. These files are no longer listed with the TeleForm
Verifier stored images unless the Show Archived Images option is selected.
Archiving old files reduces overhead so TeleForm can better track your current
files but it does not compress the images.
To save additional hard disk space, you may manually copy archived files from the
\BAK subdirectory to another disk or drive.
Archived images can be re-evaluated directly using the TeleForm Reader
Evaluate Image command. An evaluated image is processed exactly the same as
if it were an incoming fax or newly scanned image because of image
pre-processing.
To archive forms
1. Start TeleForm Verifier.
2. In the Image Management dialog box, select the forms to archive from the
Stored Images list.
3. From the Image menu, click Archive.
4. You are prompted as to how you want to handle the images after they are
archived. Click Yes or No to archive the files.
 Click Yes if you want to delete the images after they have been archived.

The selected images are archived to the \BAK subdirectory.
 Click No to leave the original files in Verifier.

To review archived images
1. In Verifier, on the Options menu, click Image Management, or click the
Options button to the right of the Image Management dialog box.
2. The Image Management Options dialog box opens.
3. Select Show Archived Images, and click OK.
4. In the Forms list, select Archived Directory Images. All the archived images
for that form are displayed in the Stored Images list.
5. To view an image, select it from the list and on the Image menu, click View
Results and Image or double-click on it.

•
•
256 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Delete Old Image Zone Files

NOTE Archived images selected through the Image
Management Options cannot be evaluated by using
the Re-Evaluate As command in Verifier. They can only
be evaluated directly from TeleForm Reader.

Delete Old Image Zone Files
If your Image Zones use the Store images in separate file option, you can easily
accumulate a number of these graphic files. TeleForm tracks these images as part
of the standard purge operations. You can delete these files when you are certain
that you no longer need the information that they contain by opening the Labels
dialog box from the Utilities menu of TeleForm Designer and TeleForm Reader.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 257
•
•
•

Chapter 14 Maintain System Performance

•
•
258 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide


Revision Control
CHAPTER 15

This chapter describes how to use Revision Control with TeleForm.
Read this entire chapter before making any changes to your TeleForm system in
regard to revision control. This feature requires:


A sophisticated understanding of source control principles;



Knowledge of TeleForm configuration steps



Training of the TeleForm operators who will use the revision control function.
CAUTION A lack of preparation or understanding of any of
these requirements can cause your TeleForm system to
experience serious problems when revision control is
enabled.

This chapter includes the following sections.


Prerequisites



Precautionary Notes



Set Up Revision Control With SourceSafe



Revision Control Tasks



Use Revision Control in TeleForm

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 259
•
•
•

Chapter 15 Revision Control

Prerequisites
To use revision control with TeleForm, the following prerequisites must be met:


You must run TeleForm 8 or later. Earlier versions of TeleForm do not support
revision control;



You must use Microsoft Visual SourceSafe as your revision control software.
This product is the only source control software certified for use with
TeleForm.
IMPORTANT This chapter should not be considered a
substitute for reading the documentation provided with
SourceSafe.



The Microsoft Visual SourceSafe client must be installed on every TeleForm
Designer workstation that moves TeleForm items into and out of revision
control.
IMPORTANT Autonomy Cardiff strongly recommends
that an experienced Microsoft Visual SourceSafe
administrator is involved in setting up your SourceSafe
database, client installations, and TeleForm
configuration.



To create new merges or modify existing ones, the SourceSafe client must be
installed on your AutoMerge Publisher workstations.

Set Up Revision Control With SourceSafe
Configuring TeleForm to work with Microsoft Visual SourceSafe is a three step
process.
IMPORTANT Autonomy Cardiff strongly recommends that
these set up steps be performed by an experienced
SourceSafe administrator.

To configure TeleForm to work with Microsoft Visual SourceSafe
1. Configure SourceSafe.

•
•
260 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Set Up Revision Control With SourceSafe

2. Enable TeleForm Security.
3. Configure TeleForm.

Configure SourceSafe
To configure SourceSafe, you must install the SourceSafe client and add the
network logon names to SourceSafe.
Every Designer and AutoMerge Publisher workstation on your TeleForm system
must have the Microsoft Visual SourceSafe client installed. The operators who will
work at these stations should be thoroughly trained on SourceSafe in general and
the specific interaction of SourceSafe and TeleForm before they begin working.
NOTE Cardiff recommends that you take advantage of the
Use network name for automatic user login function in
SourceSafe.

To add network logon names to SourceSafe
1. Start the SourceSafe Administrator program.
2. From the Tools menu, select Options.
3. Enable the Use network name for automatic user login option.
4. Add the network login names of your Designer and AutoMerge Publisher
operators to the list of SourceSafe users.
5. The Designer operators are able to move items in and out of revision control
without being prompted to login to SourceSafe.
6. The AutoMerge Publisher operators are able to merge data onto forms that
are subject to revision control without being prompted to login to SourceSafe.

Enable TeleForm Security
Cardiff strongly recommends that you enable the TeleForm Security function and
limit the security rights for the Designer and AutoMerge Publisher operators.
The following rights are recommended:


Run Designer



Run AutoMerge Publisher



Create Forms



Open Forms



Delete Forms

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 261
•
•
•

Chapter 15 Revision Control



Import/Export Forms

The following rights would allow an operator to modify the revision control settings
in TeleForm, and as such you should seriously consider disabling them:


Administrator



Configure Designer



Configure AutoMerge Publisher

See “Security” on page 85 for more information about TeleForm Security.

Configure TeleForm
SourceSafe must already be installed and functional before you can link it to
TeleForm.
To link SourceSafe to TeleForm
1. Start TeleForm Designer.
2. From the Utilities menu, click Configuration.
3. On the Global & Local TeleForm Settings dialog box, open the Multiuser
Features > Revision Control tab.
4. Select the Enable checkbox.
5. The Select Revision Control Provider dialog box opens. This dialog box is
automatically populated with the revision control clients found on your
computer. Choose your revision control software and click OK.

6. You are prompted to Select or add the base project. Click Yes to continue,
No to stop the process of configuring revision control.

•
•
262 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Set Up Revision Control With SourceSafe

7. On the Visual SourceSafe Login dialog box, type your user name, password
(if any) and use the Browse button to select the SourceSafe database.

8. On the Add to SourceSafe Project dialog box, select an existing project or
type the name of a new project.

9. Click OK on the Revision Control tab.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 263
•
•
•

Chapter 15 Revision Control

 Aux Label. This field shows the root directory of Microsoft Visual

SourceSafe. Revision Control is a multiuser feature. Cardiff recommends
that you link to a database that is available to all users.
 Base Project. This field displays the project in the Microsoft Visual

SourceSafe database to which your form and Shape Library files are
added and from which they are checked in and out.
 Options. This button launches a control dialog box from SourceSafe. See

your SourceSafe documentation for more information on this tool.

Revision Control Tasks
The following table lists the revision control tasks that can be performed and what
program they should be initiated in: TeleForm or Microsoft Visual SourceSafe.

•
•
264 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Revision Control Tasks

As a general principle, you should never do anything from Microsoft Visual
SourceSafe that you can do from TeleForm. See “Precautionary Notes” on
page 266 for a list of problems that can occur if you perform tasks in the wrong
application.
Task

TeleForm

SourceSafe

Rename items

Yes

NO

Add items to revision control

Yes

NO

Check in items

Yes

NO

Check out items

Yes

NO

Run History command

Yes

NO

Run Differences command

Yes

NO

Delete folders or forms that are subject to revision
control

Yes

NO

Search for deleted items

No

Yes

Create Base Project in Microsoft Visual
SourceSafe database for storing TeleForm item.

Yes

Yes (Not
recommended)

Purge items that have been deleted from within
TeleForm. This task should be performed
periodically by an experienced SourceSafe
administrator.

No

Yes

Retrieve read-only copies of files stored in
Microsoft Visual SourceSafe.

No

Yesa

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 265
•
•
•

Chapter 15 Revision Control

a. The Get command should only be initiated from Microsoft Visual SourceSafe if you must recover from a massive loss of TeleForm data.

Precautionary Notes
The revision control feature can cause your TeleForm system to behave
unexpectedly if it is not properly configured and used. Improper usage can cause
problems such as:
Overwriting Forms via the Import Command. Forms that are checked out of
revision control are given “read and write” access. If a form designer imports a
form that has the same name as the checked out form, the imported form
overwrites the checked out form, even if the imported form represents an older
version of that form. No warning message opens.
Breaking Revision Control Links. If you rename or move folders or files from
within Microsoft Visual SourceSafe, you break the link between TeleForm and
SourceSafe. When these links are broken, you cannot perform the most basic
source control functions, such as checking in, checking out, adding files to
revision control, and deleting files from revision control.
Locking Files in TeleForm. If you delete a project from within Microsoft Visual
SourceSafe, and this project contains TeleForm items, those items are locked
and unavailable for use in TeleForm. You cannot open, export, move, rename,
or delete them from within Designer or AutoMerge Publisher. As noted
throughout this manual, you should NOT manage the projects and files that
have been added to SourceSafe through the Microsoft Visual SourceSafe
interface. Only in rare instances should you perform any revision control tasks
from SourceSafe itself. Use the controls in TeleForm to manage your revision
controlled items.
You can use the Validate Files function to recover locked files. See “Validate
Files” on page 273 for more information.

Use Revision Control in TeleForm
Revision control commands can be initiated from TeleForm Designer and the
Shape Library.

Revision Control in Designer
In TeleForm Designer, there are different icons to identify files and folders which
are included in revision control.

•
•
266 ••
•
•

Yellow form folders are not subject to revision control.

TeleForm Administration Guide

Use Revision Control in TeleForm



Gray form folders have been added to revision control.



Red check marks next to forms show that they are checked out.

To access the revision control commands in Designer
 Right-click a folder or form in the Select Form(s) dialog box.


Click a revision control command to perform that action on the form or folder.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 267
•
•
•

Chapter 15 Revision Control

Revision Control in the Shape Library
To access the revision control commands in the Shape Library, use the Library
menu.

You cannot place the shapes within the Shape Library in revision control. The
entire Shape Library file (GLS file) is subjected to revision control. The check out,
check in, history, and difference commands are performed on the entire GLS file.

Revision Control Tasks
After you have enabled revision control, form designers can perform the following
tasks:

•
•
268 ••
•
•



Add Items to Revision Control



Remove from Revision Control



Check out



Check in



History



Difference



Validate Files

TeleForm Administration Guide

Use Revision Control in TeleForm

Add Items to Revision Control
When an item is placed in revision control, it is copied to the Microsoft Visual
SourceSafe database. The copy of the file in the TeleForm directory structure is
assigned a status of Read-only. You cannot edit these files unless you check
them out or remove them from revision control. To make the file editable, you must
use the Check out command.
The following items can be added to revision control:


Form folders (must be added prior to adding forms)



Forms



Shape Library Glossary files (GLS)
NOTE When you add a form to revision control, you are
actually adding a “package” of files (a TCD file) that includes
the TeleForm form definition, scripts that are associated with
the form, merge definitions, and any graphic files that are
part of the form. Before a TCD file is added to revision
control or checked in, the current versions of images and
scripts are embedded in the TCD, so they can be extracted
at a later time. This package cannot be split apart and the
constituent parts added to revision control separately.

Add form folders to revision control
You must add the form folders that contain forms you wish to add to revision
control before you can add the forms themselves.
To add form folders to revision control, right-click the folder in the Select Form(s)
or Delete Form(s) dialog boxes in TeleForm Designer and select the Add to
revision control command.
If you add a form folder to revision control and select the Add sub-folders
(recursively) option, all the sub-folders contained within that folder are also
added to revision control.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 269
•
•
•

Chapter 15 Revision Control

The Add to Revision Control dialog box allows you to choose from the following
options:


Add only the folder (which becomes a project in SourceSafe). Do not select
either of the checkboxes.



Add the folder and the forms it contains. Select the Add forms checkbox.



Add the folder and any sub-folders (all of which become projects in
SourceSafe). Select the Add sub-folders (recursively) checkbox.



Add the folder, sub-folders, and forms these folders contain. Select both the
Add forms and the Add sub-folders (recursively) checkboxes.

Previously Removed Files
If you add an item to revision control after previously removing it, you are notified
that “A deleted file of this name already exists in SourceSafe. Do you want to
recover the deleted file instead of adding your local” file?



Yes. The file on your local hard drive are replaced by the file in SourceSafe
which you had previously removed from revision control.



No. The file on your local hard drive is added to SourceSafe. The file that had
previously been removed from revision control must be purged at some time.

Check out
You can Check out forms and Shape Library files after they have been added to
revision control. When an item is checked out of SourceSafe, the file that is stored
in the Microsoft Visual SourceSafe database is copied to the corresponding

•
•
270 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Use Revision Control in TeleForm

location in the TeleForm directory structure. The file in TeleForm is assigned a
status of Read-Write. You can edit and modify files that have been checked out.
You cannot check out a file until it has been added to SourceSafe.

NOTE You cannot Check out form folders.

Undo check out
The Undo check out command undoes changes that have been made to an item
since it was checked out. The copy of the item in your local TeleForm structure is
not checked back in to SourceSafe. Instead, the copy of the file in SourceSafe is
retained and copied out to your local TeleForm directory structure.
Undo check out works only on files that have been checked out.

Check in
You can check in forms and Shape Library files after they have been added to
revision control and are checked-out. When an item is checked in, the file in your
local TeleForm directory structure is assigned a status of read-only and cannot
be modified. A copy of this file is added to the SourceSafe database.

NOTE You cannot check in form folders, since these
folders cannot be checked out.

To check in forms
1. When you initiate a Check in command, the Check In dialog box opens.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 271
•
•
•

Chapter 15 Revision Control

2. Add a Comment, if desired. Comments can be viewed in the History >
Details dialog box, available by running the History command.

Difference
The Difference command compares the copy of a file that is stored in the
Microsoft Visual SourceSafe database with the copy of the same file stored on
your local TeleForm directory structure.
This command does not produce a summary explaining the exact differences
between the SourceSafe and TeleForm versions of the files. You are notified if
there are any differences.

NOTE You cannot run a Difference command on form
folders.



When run on a Shape Library file, the Difference command triggers a binary
file comparison without regard to contents. Differences are not apparent until
you Save the modified Shape Library file on your local TeleForm directory.



When run on a form, the Difference command detects whether the saved
version of the form within your TeleForm directory differs from that stored in
the SourceSafe database. You are notified that the files are identical or that
they differ, but no detailed information on the differences is made available.

History
This command displays a record of the changes to a file since it was initially
added to revision control. You can run a History report on forms and Shape
Library files after they have been added to revision control. You cannot run a
History report on form folders.
You can use the History command to retrieve previous versions of a form or GLS
file. Scripts, merge setups, and graphic files are stored with the form for each
version checked in. Restoring a previous version also restores the scripts and
merge setups for that version.
A dialog box containing a summary of the revision control tasks that have been
performed on the item is generated. To view any Comments that were applied to
the item when it was checked in, click the Details button.

•
•
272 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Use Revision Control in TeleForm

Validate Files
The Validate Files command is designed to fix some common user and system
errors. While it is safe to use at any time and can repair certain types of damage, it
is not a magic bullet for repairing any TeleForm problem.
The Validate Files command affects six TeleForm database tables.


Form Table. tfidtbl



Form Folder, Recognition Set Tables. tffldr, tffldmem



Group Folder Tables. tfgrpfld, tfgrpmem



Merge Setup Records. tflogex

The following list explains the conditions and actions that may require use of the
Validate Files command.


If you are experiencing problems with the internal tables listed below.



After restoring your TeleForm system from backup tape. You should reinstall
TeleForm after the restoration but before running the Validate Files command.



If files in the TeleForm directories have been manually manipulated from
outside the TeleForm system, such as with Windows Explorer.



After using the Get command from SourceSafe.



After removing or renaming a SourceSafe project corresponding to a
TeleForm form folder from SourceSafe.

Validate Command
The Validate Files command initiates the following sequence of events:

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 273
•
•
•

Chapter 15 Revision Control

1. Scans TeleForm’s form folders to make sure that they are registered in the
form folder tables. Each folder is subject to the following actions:
 Validation using the FOLDER.INI file. This file contains enough

information to re-register the folder in the folder table should the table get
lost due to a system failure or the folder is restored from revision control.
 Verification that forms in the folder are registered in the form table and

folder member table.
 Verification that there are no duplicate form files (same form in multiple

folders). If any duplicate forms are found, you are prompted as to which
copy to keep. Duplicate files are moved to the TELEFORM\FRM\
$DUPLICATES folder.
 Elimination of form fragments (i.e. tfxxxxx.00x files from versions

earlier than TeleForm 8). Fragments are moved to the TELEFORM\FRM\
$REMOVED folder.
 Validation that the form table record lists the correct form version based on

the filename. TeleForm 7 and earlier used different file extensions than
TeleForm 8 forms.
2. Checks the form table to make sure that all entries have a valid form file.
Invalid entries are removed.
3. Checks the folder tables to make sure that all entries are valid. Invalid entries
are removed.
4. Validates the Recognition Set folders. Backups of entries are kept in
RECSET_<name>.INI files in case of table loss.
5. Validates the Security Groups. Backups of entries are kept in
GROUP_<name>.INI files in case of table loss)
6. Scans all the form folders to validate revision control status of forms and
folders:
 Checks that revision controlled TeleForm folders are also present in the

revision control system. If not, the state is repaired.
 Checks that forms which are not subject to revision control have read-write

status.
 Verifies that forms which are subject to revision control and are checked

out have read-write status.
 Make sure that all forms which are subject to revision control and are not

checked out have read-only status.
 Check that the package of form files (scripts, graphics, merge setups, etc.)

are present and correct for the version of the form (TCD file) on the local

•
•
274 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Use Revision Control in TeleForm

hard disk. This check is important if a Get command is performed from the
SourceSafe client.
To trigger the Validate Files command
1. Right-click a folder in the Select Form(s) dialog box in Designer.
2. Select Validate Files from the Operation list in the TeleForm Migration Utility.
3. Select the Validate files at next startup option from the Global & Local
TeleForm Settings > Designer > Advanced dialog box.

Remove from Revision Control
When a folder is removed from revision control, you can choose to either delete
the copy of the folder in the SourceSafe database or leave this project in
SourceSafe but disconnect the “link” between it and the folder in the TeleForm
directory structure. The TeleForm file is assigned a status of Read-Write.
If you remove a specific form or GLS file from revision control, the matching copy
of the file is deleted from the SourceSafe directory.
The process of removing forms and library files from revision control differs from
that used to remove form folders from revision control.

Remove forms and library files from revision control
When you remove a form or GLS file from revision control, it is deleted from the
SourceSafe database. You cannot remove a form or GLS file from revision control
when it is checked out.

Remove Folders from Revision Control
When removing a folder from revision control, the Remove From Revision
Control dialog box opens:



Folder. This field shows what folder was selected for the Remove from
revision control command. You cannot edit this field.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 275
•
•
•

Chapter 15 Revision Control



Remove forms. When this option is enabled, all the forms in the selected
Folder are removed from revision control and deleted from the SourceSafe
database. The versions of the forms on your hard drive remain.
If you do not select this option, the forms are removed from revision control but
remain in the SourceSafe database. The versions of the forms on your hard
drive remain.



•
•
276 ••
•
•

Remove sub-folders (recursively). This option is always selected. Recursive
means that all the sub-folders contained within that folder are also affected.

TeleForm Administration Guide


Analyze Form Design
CHAPTER 16

This chapter covers which Control Center features to use in optimizing the design
of one or more of your forms. You view the By Form tabs of the Readers and
Verifiers sub-folders and the Current Workload folder. If you determine that a
form needs to be optimized, you edit the form and run a new batch of forms
through the TeleForm system.
IMPORTANT Once your form is activated, you must be very careful if you
change the appearance of it. Changing the appearance or layout of a form
template in your system that has been activated and distributed can cause
recognition errors when returned forms (using the old form template) are
processed in your system.
To avoid such problems, always thoroughly test your forms before you
distribute them.
If you wish to change the appearance of your form, save the form under a
different name, activate the updated form, and then distribute the updated
form. Remember to stop distributing the old form as well.


Overview



Analyze Your Forms on an Application Level



Analyze Your Form on a Current Workload Level

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 277
•
•
•

Chapter 16 Analyze Form Design

Overview
If a form is not properly designed or has not been optimized, it can significantly
slow down the identification, evaluation and verification process. A single form
that is poorly or hastily designed can cause inefficiency in the whole TeleForm
system. This form would have a negative impact on the processing of its images,
and it can also have a negative impact on the processing of all other forms.
Before you commit the time and money to mass produce your form, you should
test your form design. You may need to change your form template in order to
optimize the efficiency of its evaluation in TeleForm Reader and its correction in
TeleForm Verifier.
The following table summarizes the types of changes you can and cannot make
with activated forms:
You can...

You cannot...

Add, remove, or edit field titles

Move a data field or a group

Create/break grouped fields

Change the size/length of a data field

Add or move lines and shapes

Add new fields to the form

Change export settings

Move the Form ID

Modify field ID names

Move the reference marks

In order to optimize the performance of a form, it is often necessary to adjust the
size/location of a field on the form, add a new field to the form, or remove a current
field from the form. Most changes that affect the appearance of the form require
you to save the form under a new name and activate the updated form. If you do
this, you cannot evaluate previous versions of the form using the new and
improved form template because there is no current form template to match the
(old) returned image against. For this reason, it is highly recommended that you
thoroughly test your form before distributing it in large quantities.
Some changes, such as changing a field from accepting alphanumeric characters
to accepting alphabetic characters only, do not affect the appearance of your form.
Generally speaking, this type of change can be saved to your current form
template. Therefore, you do not need to save the form under a different name in
order to make these changes.
This type of change is good to focus on if you have already distributed a large
number of forms. Even though editing an activated form limits your optimization
possibilities, you can still change the field constraints and other recognition

•
•
278 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Overview

settings in the Field Attributes dialog boxes. These changes can greatly enhance
field interpretation in TeleForm Reader and can speed up the review process in
TeleForm Verifier.

Form Statistics
Form statistics are online statistics that are generated in real-time. They are based
upon statistical information gathered during an administrator-specified period, and
updated with an administrator-specified frequency. Both the period and the
frequency of the statistics collection is set up in the Data tab of the Control Center
Properties dialog box for more information on specifying the parameters of
statistics collection for your TeleForm system).

General Procedure for Analyzing Form Design
When you examine your form design, you can use three different statistical
groups:


TeleForm Reader statistics



TeleForm Verifier statistics



Statistics of the current workload

To analyze form design in Control Center
1. Display one or more of the following tabs:
 By Form tab of the Readers sub-folder (under the System folder, choose

Statistics)
 By Form tab of the Verifiers sub-folder (under the System folder, choose

Statistics)
 By Form tab of the Current Workload folder (under the System folder,

choose Statistics, and the one of the By Forms tabs)
2. View the statistics displayed in these tabs.
3. If you determine that one of your forms is not being processed efficiently, and
have identified an area that needs improvement, make the necessary changes
to the form.
 If these changes can be made to the activated form, save the activated

form.
 If TeleForm does not allow you to save these changes to your activated

form, then save the form under a different name, and activate the updated
form.
4. Process a new batch of form images.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 279
•
•
•

Chapter 16 Analyze Form Design

5. View the statistics again to determine if the processing of this form has
improved.

Analyze Your Forms on an Application Level
Application statistics apply to specific applications within TeleForm. If you have
already processed one or more batches of your form, these statistics provide you
with the best information to analyze what has occurred.
When you double-click the System folder on the TeleForm Control Center tree,
sub-folders are displayed underneath it.

Readers
Displays TeleForm Reader statistics in a table format and a chart format for your
choice of Statistics or Active Workstations.

Verifiers
Displays TeleForm Verifier statistics in a table format and a chart format for your
choice of User Statistics, Form Statistics, or Active Workstations.

•
•
280 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Analyze Your Forms on an Application Level

Viewing Evaluation Statistics for Your Forms
When you view the evaluation statistics for your form, you can see which forms
take a long time to evaluate, and which forms are evaluated quickly. For example,
if the Avg. Time column of the By Form tab indicates that one of your forms is
taking an average of 20 seconds per instance to evaluate, you should investigate
why evaluation for this form takes longer than the evaluation of your other forms.
The following figure illustrates a typical By Form tab.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 281
•
•
•

Chapter 16 Analyze Form Design

Reader Chart
The Form Chart displays the number of evaluated images that were evaluated OK
versus the number that needed review in TeleForm Verifier.

•
•
282 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Analyze Your Forms on an Application Level

Verifier Charts
Workflow Tab
tab displays workflow statistics for individual forms. See “View Verification
Statistics for Your Form” on page 286 for details on each column.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 283
•
•
•

Chapter 16 Analyze Form Design

Average Times Tab
This chart displays the average time required to verify a single instance of each
form.

•
•
284 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Analyze Your Forms on an Application Level

Total Times Tab
The Total Times chart gives you a visual representation of the time it took to
correct all instances of each form, divided into the individual modes of correction.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 285
•
•
•

Chapter 16 Analyze Form Design

View Verification Statistics for Your Form
These statistics show which forms require a lot of time to correct and which are
corrected quickly. For example, if the Avg. Time column indicates that one of your
forms is taking an average of 1 minute to correct, you should investigate the
statistics of this form and change the form template if necessary.

•
•
286 ••
•
•

Stat

Description

Value

Form

Shows the name of this form.

String of text

Completed

Shows the number of form images that have completed
verification.

Integer (1, 2,
3...)

TeleForm Administration Guide

Analyze Your Form on a Current Workload Level

Stat

Description

Value

Need Review

Shows the number of form images in the TeleForm
Verifier queue. Form images in this category still need
to be corrected by the Verifier operator.

Integer (1, 2,
3...)

Avg. Time

Shows the average time required to correct a form
image.

Time Format
(H:MM:SS)

Time to
Complete

Shows an estimate of the time required to correct the
remaining form images in the TeleForm Verifier queue.

Time Format
(H:MM:SS)

NOTE: The estimate assumes that a single Verifier
operator is correcting this form. You need to take this
into account if there are multiple Verifier operators
correcting this form.

Analyze Your Form on a Current Workload Level
Current workload statistics apply to batches of forms that are currently being
processed in TeleForm. View these statistics if you are processing your first batch
or group of batches of this form, and you want to get an idea of how efficiently they
are being processed.
Even if the batch contains a mixture of forms (instead of just a single form), you
can view the current workload statistics for a single form to analyze its form
design.
When you click the Current Workload folder on the TeleForm Control Center
tree, the current workload statistics are shown in the display pane. There are two
form tabs in this pane:


By Form - Displays the current workload statistics for each form in the group
of batches, in a table format



By Form - Displays the current workload statistics for each form, in a chart
format

View Current Workload Statistics for Your Form
When you click the By Form tab of the Current Workload folder, it is shown in
the display pane.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 287
•
•
•

Chapter 16 Analyze Form Design

The following table contains a description and a range of values for each statistic
in the By Form tab of the Current Workload folder. Each row in this tab
corresponds to a form in your TeleForm system.
Stat

Description

Value

Form

Name of this form.

Text

Completed

Shows the number of form images that have completed
verification.

Integer

Need Review

Shows the number of form images in the TeleForm
Verifier queue. Form images in this category still need
to be corrected by the Verifier operator.

Integer

Avg. Time

Shows the average time required to correct a single
image of this form.

Time Format

Time to
Complete

Shows an estimate of the time required to process the
remaining images for the current group of batches.

Time Format

By Form Chart
The Total Times chart gives you a visual representation of the time it took to
correct all instances of each form. This time is divided into the individual modes of
correction.

•
•
288 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Analyze Your Form on a Current Workload Level

Generate Form Reports
In addition to the online form statistics described in the previous sections, there
are also Form reports. These reports are Crystal Reports that are generated for a
specified time interval. Click on the Reports folder on the TeleForm Control
Center tree. The list of available reports is shown in the display pane. Double-click
on the name of the report you wish to generate.
:

Statistic

Description

Sample

Pages Read

Number of images (form pages) that were
evaluated for this form.

500

Avg. Eval Time (sec.)

Shows the average time (in seconds) required to
evaluate a single page of this form.

4.3
seconds

Short Eval Time
(sec.)

Shows the minimum time (in seconds) it took to
evaluate a single page of this form.

1.8
seconds

Long Eval Time (sec.)

Shows the maximum time (in seconds) it took to
evaluate a single page of this form.

10.4
seconds

Avg. Fields to Review

Shows the average number of fields that needed
review for this form.

3.2

Always Review

Shows the average number of fields per form page
with the Always Review configuration, for this
form.

2.0

Pages Read

Shows the combined number of images (form
pages) that were evaluated for all of your forms.

500

Avg. Eval Time (sec.)

Shows the average time (in seconds) required to
evaluate a single form image. This average is
based on the evaluation of all of your forms
combined.

4.3
seconds

Avg. Fields to Review

Shows the average number of fields that needed
review per form image. This average is based on
the evaluation of all of your forms combined.

3.2

Always Review Fields
per Page

Shows the average number of fields per form page
with the Always Review configuration. This
average is based on the evaluation of all of your
forms combined.

2.0

FORMS/NONFORMS

Fields per Page
TOTAL

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 289
•
•
•

Chapter 16 Analyze Form Design

Form Correction Summary Report
The following figure illustrates a typical Form Correction Summary report.

The Form Correction Summary shows you the average time it took to correct your
form, and the average number of characters on your form that needed review for
the specified time interval. With this report, you can compare your forms to
determine which ones are being corrected efficiently and which ones need to be
optimized.
The following table describes each column in the Form Correction Summary
report:

•
•
290 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Analyze Your Form on a Current Workload Level

Form Correction
Statistic

Description

Sample
Value(s)

Form Name

Shows the name of this form, as
specified in the Save As dialog box of
TeleForm Designer.

Dave’s Form

Form Page

Shows the page number of this form.
Each form page has its own row of
statistics.

1, 2, and so on

Page Count

Shows the total number of pages
processed for this form page.

8,995

Average Time

Shows the average time (in seconds)
required to correct this form page.

18.9 seconds

Average Char Visit

Shows the average number of
characters per form page that needed
review. This counts the form pages
that were evaluated OK by TeleForm
Reader

0.03

Average Char
Correct

Shows the average number of
characters per form page that were
corrected. This does not count the
form pages that were evaluated OK by
TeleForm Reader.

5.21

Average Field Visit

Shows the average number of fields
that were visited on this form page

2.32

Form Punts

Shows the total number of form pages
that this operator transferred to
another operator (including the
Supervisor).

0

TOTAL
(form name in bold)

The total row (which is shown as the
form name in bold) shows the
statistics of all of the form pages
combined.
See the FORM PAGE statistics for a
description of each column in this row

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 291
•
•
•

Chapter 16 Analyze Form Design

Form Detail Report
More than any other, this report points you to the inefficiencies in your form
design. For example, if you notice that a “Street Address” Image Zone needs
frequent review, you might consider using a Print Field instead.

The Form Detail report displays statistics for individual fields on the specified form,
for the specified time interval. This report can be used to analyze the evaluation
and correction process on a field level, instead of the form level (which is the
lowest level you can view in your online statistics).
The following table describes each column in the Form Detail report:

•
•
292 ••
•
•

Statistic

Description

Sample Value

Field Name

Shows the field ID of this field

firstName

Field Type

Shows the type of TeleForm data entry field
that this field is

Constrained

Filled

Shows the percentage of the time that this
field is filled in on the returned forms

100%

Avg. Chars

Shows the average number of characters
that this field contains

4.0

TeleForm Administration Guide

Analyze Your Form on a Current Workload Level

Statistic

Description

Sample Value

Need Review

Shows the percentage of the time that this
field needs review

14%

Must Review (Y/N)

Shows whether or not this field has the
Always Review configuration. This helps
you determine the significance of the Need
Review column.

N

Avg. Chars Need
Review

Shows the average number of characters in
this field that need review.

0.0

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 293
•
•
•

Chapter 16 Analyze Form Design

•
•
294 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide


Analyze Your System
Throughput
CHAPTER 17

This chapter covers how to use Control Center’s features in your analysis of the
TeleForm system throughput. Typically, you start by viewing the summary
statistics of your TeleForm system. If you find a significant summary statistic, you
can then view more detailed statistics. This procedure helps you identify areas in
your form processing that could benefit from re-configuration and optimization.


Overview of Throughput Analysis



General Procedure for Analyzing Throughput



Analyze Throughput on a Global Level



Analyze Throughput on an Application Level



Analyze Throughput on a Batch Level



Generate System Throughput Reports



Available Reports



System Performance Report



User Performance Report



Verifier Productivity Charts



Batch Summary Report



Form Evaluation Summary Report

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 295
•
•
•

Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput



Form Correction Summary Report



Form Detail Report



Reader Usage Chart

Overview of Throughput Analysis
When you are processing a large number of forms per day, you want to maximize
TeleForm’s processing efficiency. The easiest and most accurate way to do this is
to view statistics that are collected from this process.
Because of the large volume of forms that run through TeleForm each day,
sometimes there are bottlenecks. A bottleneck occurs when one area of the
system is not keeping up with the other areas. For example, if your Reader
stations are not evaluating images fast enough to meet the correction demands of
your Verifier operators, then your operators wait for images to correct.
However, attempting to find the cause of a bottleneck is sometimes more complex
than this. For example, the condition in the previous paragraph (not enough
evaluated images for Verifier operator throughput) can be caused by a high
degree of success in recognizing the fields on a form. In this case, most of the
form images require little if any correction. Therefore the Verifier operators have
fewer images to correct than Reader stations have to evaluate. If this is the case,
then you can purchase additional Reader licenses to meet the demand of your
Verifier operators.
Throughput Statistics
Throughput statistics are online statistics that are generated in real-time. They are
based upon statistical information gathered during an administrator-specified
period, and updated with an administrator-specified frequency. Both the period
and the frequency of the statistics collection is set up in the Data tab of the Control
Center Properties dialog box (see “Workflow Analysis” on page 231).

General Procedure for Analyzing Throughput
When you examine TeleForm throughput, you usually want to start at a general
(global) level, and then go to increasingly more specific levels.
1. Click on the System folder of the TeleForm Control Center tree. The
Workflow tab is shown in the display pane.

•
•
296 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Analyze Throughput on a Global Level

2. If you see a statistic that indicates a bottleneck in the TeleForm system,
determine what part of the TeleForm process that statistic relates to:
 If the average evaluation time seems long, view the Readers sub-folder.
 If the average time needed to correct an image seems too long, view the

Verifiers sub-folder.
 If the backlogged images in Reader seems too high, view the Readers

sub-folder.
 If there are too many NonForms, view the By Form tab of the Readers

sub-folder.
 Check the Current Workload folder to see if the problem is specific to a

particular batch.
3. Click the appropriate sub-folder from step 2 and examine the relevant
statistics.
4. When the source of the bottleneck has been identified, you can take the
appropriate actions to optimize your system throughput.

Analyze Throughput on a Global Level
System statistics are those statistics that apply to every part of the TeleForm
system. If you want to find out how efficient your TeleForm system is, this is the
first thing you should analyze.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 297
•
•
•

Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput

When you click the System folder on the TeleForm Control Center tree, the
system statistics are displayed in the display pane. There are two tabs in this
pane: Workflow and License.

Workflow
Displays the global statistics of your TeleForm system.
License
Displays the total number of licenses for each TeleForm application and the
number of licenses currently in use.

View Your Global Statistics
When you click the System folder on the TeleForm Control Center tree, the
Workflow tab is shown.

•
•
298 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Analyze Throughput on a Global Level

The statistics in the Workflow tab are divided into the three fundamental
processes of the TeleForm system:


Receive column - images that are scanned, faxed or automatically retrieved
from a directory into TeleForm Reader.



Evaluate column - images/forms that are evaluated in TeleForm Reader.



Verify column - images/forms that are corrected in TeleForm Verifier.

The following table contains a description and a range of values for each statistic
in the Workflow tab.
Global
Statistic

Description

Value

Statistics
Collection

Shows whether or not statistics are being gathered
for evaluation and correction. This configuration
can be changed in the Statistics Collection option
of the Global Settings folder.

(Off, On)

Images

Number of images received and evaluated by
Reader.

Integer

Shows the number of images that are waiting in the
queue of Reader and the number of images that
are waiting in the queue of Verifier. These images
have not yet passed through evaluation and
correction.

Integer

Number of images that were evaluated in Reader
and the total number of images that were corrected
in Verifier.

Integer

Backlog

Forms

TeleForm Administration Guide

(1, 2, 3...)

(1, 2, 3...)

(1, 2, 3...)

•
•
• 299
•
•
•

Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput

Global
Statistic

Description

Value

Number of images that were evaluated in Reader
as NonForms.

Integer

Average time it takes to evaluate and correct an
image.

Integer

% Need Verify

Percentage of evaluated images that need to be
corrected in Verifier.

0-100%
(Percent)

% Complete

Percentage of received images that were evaluated
by Reader and evaluated images that were
corrected by Verifier operators.

0-100%
(Percent)

Time to
Complete

Approximate minutes required to evaluate the
backlog of images in Reader and the approximate
number of minutes required to correct the backlog
of images in TeleForm Reader and TeleForm
Verifier.

Time in
minutes

Stations
Running

Number of workstations running for each TeleForm
application.

Integer

Estimated
Completion

Shows the estimated completion time for
evaluation of received images in TeleForm Reader
and correction of those images in TeleForm Verifier.
This estimate is based on the combined throughput
of all currently running TeleForm workstations.

Time Format
HH:MM AM/
PM

NonForms

Avg. Time (Sec.)

(1, 2, 3...)

(1, 2, 3...)

(1, 2, 3...)

View Your License Statistics
When you click the License tab in the System folder, it is shown in the display
pane.

•
•
300 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Analyze Throughput on an Application Level

If you are reaching the limit of your TeleForm license capacity, you may need to
add one or more licenses for a particular application. The statistics in the License
tab are divided into the two categories:


Licenses column - total number of licenses for each of the TeleForm
applications



In Use column - number of licenses currently used by the active TeleForm
workstations

Analyze Throughput on an Application Level
Application statistics apply to specific applications within TeleForm. After you view
the global system statistics, you might need to focus on a single TeleForm
application in order to more accurately diagnose a bottleneck in the TeleForm
system.
For example, if the Backlog statistic in the Verify column of the Workflow tab is
high, then your Verifier operators are not correcting the images fast enough to
keep up with the evaluation in TeleForm Reader. If you want to see more specific
statistics on Verifier performance, look at the Verifiers sub-folder of the System
folder.
After looking at the Verifiers sub-folder, you may see that it is taking a long time
for the Verifier operators to get through Character Mode. One solution to this
problem would be to turn off Character Mode. Another possible solution would be
to make Character Mode more selective of the characters that it displays (have
more characters automatically bypass Character Mode).

View Your Reader Station Statistics
To access the Reader station statistics, click the Readers sub-folder of the
System folder. The Reader station statistics are displayed for each workstation
that is using one or more Reader licenses.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 301
•
•
•

Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput

When you view the Reader station statistics, you are looking for possible
problems in the identification and evaluation of your form images. For example, if
there is an abnormally high number of images being evaluated as NonForms, this
shows up in the NonForm column of the By Station tab for any or all of your
Reader stations.
IMPORTANT If you want TeleForm to collect evaluation
statistics, you must select the Collect Reader image
recognition statistics check box in the Statistics Collection
global setting. Refer to “Workflow Analysis” on page 231 for
more information on setting up statistics collection in Control
Center.

The following table contains a description and a range of values for each statistic
in the By Station tab of the Readers sub-folder. Each row in this tab corresponds
to a TeleForm Reader workstation in your TeleForm system.
Stat

Description

Value

Station

Shows the name of the TeleForm Reader workstation.

String of text

Images

Shows the number of images that have been evaluated
by this workstation.

Integer

Avg. Time

Shows the average time required to evaluate an image
on this workstation.

Time in
seconds

NOTE If this number is higher for one Reader station
than it is for all others, then that Reader station may
have a slower CPU, or it may be running other tasks
while it is evaluating images.

•
•
302 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Analyze Throughput on an Application Level

Stat

Description

Value

Need
Review

Shows the percentage of images evaluated by this
workstation that need to be corrected in TeleForm
Verifier.

Percent

NonForm

Shows the number of images evaluated by this
workstation as NonForms.

Integer

Status

Shows the status of each Reader station.

Interpreting
Inactive
Idle

NOTE If you are running more than one Reader on a single
workstation, the statistics of each of these Readers is
combined and displayed in the workstation’s row.

View Verifier Statistics
To access the Verifier operator statistics, click the User Statistics option in the
Verifiers sub-folder. The Verifier operator statistics can be displayed for each
correction mode of TeleForm Verifier.
Displaying statistics for each correction mode helps you find which modes your
operators excel in and which modes your operators need more practice and/or
training in.
Mode Totals
When you click the Mode Totals tab in the User Statistics sub-folder, it is shown
in the display pane.

The following table contains a description and a range of values for each statistic
in the Mode Totals tab of the User Statistics option. Each row in this tab
corresponds to a Verifier operator in your TeleForm system.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 303
•
•
•

Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput

STAT

Description

Value

User

Name of the operator. Only available if you
have security features enabled.

String of text

Forms (Form Mode)

Shows the number of forms that this Verifier
operator corrected in form mode.

Integer

Shows the number of fields that this Verifier
operator corrected in Field Mode.

Integer

Zones (Capture
Mode)

Shows the number of Capture Zones that this
Verifier operator corrected in Capture Mode.

Integer

Chars (Char Mode)

Shows the number of characters that this
Verifier operator corrected in Character Mode.

Integer

Fields (Field Mode)

(1, 2, 3...)

(1, 2, 3...)

(1, 2, 3...)

(1, 2, 3...)

Form Mode
When you click the User Statistics sub-folder, the Form Mode tab is shown in the
display pane.

The following table contains a description and a range of values for each statistic
in the Form Mode tab of the User Statistics option. Each row in this tab
corresponds to a Verifier operator in your TeleForm system.

•
•
304 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Analyze Throughput on an Application Level

STAT

Description

Value

User

Shows the name of the Verifier operator.
This name is available only if you have
security features enabled, and you type a
name in the Display Name box on the Add
New Operator dialog box.

String of text

Total Time

Shows the total amount of time that this
Verifier operator has been correcting forms
in TeleForm Verifier.

Time Format
(H:MM:SS)

Mode Time

Shows the amount of time that this Verifier
operator has been in Form Mode
Correction.

Time Format
(H:MM:SS)

Mode %

Shows the percent of the Total Time that
this Verifier operator has been in Form
Mode Correction.

Percent

Forms (Form Mode)

Shows the number of forms that
completed verification in Form Mode
Correction as a result of corrections made
by this Verifier operator.

Integer (1, 2, 3...)

Forms (Other
Modes)

Shows the number of forms that
completed verification in correction modes
other than Form Mode Correction, as a
result of corrections made by this Verifier
operator.

Integer (1, 2, 3...)

Forms / hr.

Shows the average number of forms per
hour that completed verification as a result
of corrections made by this Verifier
operator .

Integer (1, 2, 3...)

Field Mode
When you click the Field Mode tab in the User Statistics sub-folder, it is shown in
the display pane.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 305
•
•
•

Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput

The following table contains a description and a range of values for each statistic
in the Field Mode tab of the User Statistics option. Each row in this tab
corresponds to a Verifier operator in your TeleForm system.
Field Mode
Operator Statistic

Description

Value

User

Shows the name of the Verifier operator. This
name is available only if you have security
features enabled, and you type a name in the
Display Name box on the Add New Operator
dialog box.

String of text

Total Time

Shows the total amount of time that this Verifier
operator has been correcting forms in
TeleForm Verifier.

Time Format
(H:MM:SS)

Mode Time

Shows the amount of time that this Verifier
operator has been in Field Mode Correction.

Time Format
(H:MM:SS)

Mode %

Shows the percent of the Total Time that this
Verifier operator has been in Field Mode
Correction.

Percent

Fields
(Field Mode)

Shows the number of fields that completed
verification in Field Mode Correction as a result
of corrections made by this Verifier operator.

Integer

Fields
(Other Modes)

Shows the number of fields that completed
verification in correction modes other than
Field Mode Correction, as a result of
corrections made by this Verifier operator.

Integer

Fields / hr.

Shows the average number of fields per hour
that completed verification as a result of
corrections made by this Verifier operator .

Integer

(1, 2, 3...)

(1, 2, 3...)

(1, 2, 3...)

Capture Mode
When you click the Capture Mode tab in the User Statistics sub-folder, it is
shown in the display pane.

•
•
306 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Analyze Throughput on an Application Level

The following table contains a description and a range of values for each statistic
in the Capture Mode tab of the User Statistics option. Each row in this tab
corresponds to a Verifier operator in your TeleForm system.
Capture Mode
Statistic

Description

Value

User

Shows the name of the Verifier operator. This
name is available only if you have security features
enabled, and you type a name in the Display
Name box on the Add New Operator dialog box.

String of text

Total Time

Shows the total amount of time that this Verifier
operator has been correcting forms in TeleForm
Verifier.

Time Format
(H:MM:SS)

Mode Time

Shows the amount of time that this Verifier operator
has been in Capture Mode Correction.

Time Format
(H:MM:SS)

Mode %

Shows the percent of the Total Time that this
Verifier operator has been in Capture Mode
Correction.

Percent

Zones
(Capture Mode)

Shows the number of Capture Zones that
completed verification in Capture Mode Correction
as a result of corrections made by this Verifier
operator.

Integer

Zones
(Other Modes)

Shows the number of Capture Zones that
completed verification in correction modes other
than Capture Mode Correction, as a result of
corrections made by this Verifier operator.

Integer

Zones / hr.

Shows the average number of Capture Zones per
hour that completed verification as a result of
corrections made by this Verifier operator.

Integer

(1, 2, 3...)

(1, 2, 3...)

(1, 2, 3...)

Character Mode
When you click the Character Mode tab in the User Statistics sub-folder, it is
shown in the display pane.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 307
•
•
•

Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput

The following table contains a description and a range of values for each statistic
in the Char Mode tab of the User Statistics option. Each row in this tab
corresponds to a Verifier operator in your TeleForm system.
Character Mode
Operator Statistic

Description

Value

User

Shows the name of the Verifier operator. This
name is available only if you have security
features enabled, and you type a name in the
Display Name box on the Add New Operator
dialog box.

String of text

Total Time

Shows the total amount of time that this Verifier
operator has been correcting forms in
TeleForm Verifier.

Time Format
(H:MM:SS)

Mode Time

Shows the amount of time that this Verifier
operator has been in Character Mode
Correction.

Time Format
(H:MM:SS)

Mode %

Shows the percent of the Total Time that this
Verifier operator has been in Character Mode
Correction.

Percent

Chars
(Char Mode)

Shows the number of characters that this
Verifier operator corrected in Character Mode
Correction.

Integer

Chars
(Other Modes)

Shows the number of characters that this
Verifier operator corrected in modes other than
Character Mode Correction.

Integer

Chars / hr.

Shows the average number of characters
corrected by this Verifier operator per hour.

Integer

(1, 2, 3...)

(1, 2, 3...)

(1, 2, 3...)

Analyze Throughput on a Batch Level
Current workload statistics apply to batches of forms that are currently being
processed in TeleForm. View these statistics if you are currently processing one or
more batches, and you want to check the status of your form processing job.

•
•
308 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Analyze Throughput on a Batch Level

Available Workload Statistics
When you click the Current Workload folder on the TeleForm Control Center
tree, the current workload statistics are shown in the display pane. There are two
display options:


Table



Chart

Table
Displays the current workload statistics for each batch that is still being
processed, in a table format.
This view is displayed when you select the Current Workload tab.

Chart
Displays the current workload statistics for each batch, in a chart format
When you click the sub-folder of an individual batch (under the Current Workload
folder), the statistics for this batch are shown in the display pane. These statistics
include detailed information about the batch.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 309
•
•
•

Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput

View Batch Statistics
When you click the Current Workload folder, the Batches tab is shown in the
display pane.
The following table contains a description and a range of values for each statistic
in the Batches tab of the Current Workload folder. Each row in this tab
corresponds to a batch in your TeleForm system that has not completed
processing. Any form images that are not part of a normal batch are counted in
the Non-Batch row (this includes form images that are received from a faxing
device and those that are retrieved from a directory).
Stat

•
•
310 ••
•
•

Description

Value

Batch

Shows the batch ID of this batch.

8-digit number

Scan

Shows the number of images that were
scanned for this batch.

Integer (1, 2, 3...)

Eval

Shows the number of images in this batch that
were evaluated in TeleForm Reader.

Integer (1, 2, 3...)

Need
Review

Shows number of images in this batch that still
need to be reviewed in TeleForm Verifier.

Integer (1, 2, 3...

Eval OK

Shows the number of images in this batch that
have completed processing.

Integer (1, 2, 3...)

NonForm

Shows the number of images in this batch that
were evaluated as NonForms.

Integer (1, 2, 3...)

TeleForm Administration Guide

Analyze Throughput on a Batch Level

Stat

Description

Value

Priority

Shows the priority of this batch. This number
can be changed in the Priority box on the
Batch Properties dialog box of your batch.

Integer Range
(0-255)
(Default = 100)

Status

Shows the status of this batch.

String of text

Tracking ID

Shows the tracking ID of this batch. The
tracking ID is used to identify and track a batch
of form images. It is specified in the Batch
Setup dialog box of TeleForm Reader.

Alphanumeric
(19 characters)

Owner

Shows the owner of this batch.

String of text

Job

Shows the job name.

String of text

View Batch Chart
When you click the By Batch tab of the Current Workload folder, a chart is
shown. The Batch Workflow chart gives you a visual representation of the overall
status of your batch.

The batch images are divided into 6 categories (one color for each category). The
following list shows what each category represents:


NonForm. Number of images in this batch that were evaluated as NonForms
(teal bar)



Eval OK. Number of images in this batch that have completed processing
(green bar)

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 311
•
•
•

Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput



Need Review. Number of images in this batch that still need to be corrected in
TeleForm Verifier (blue bar)



Need Eval. Number of images in this batch that still need to be evaluated in
TeleForm Reader (yellow bar)



Committed. Indicates that all images in the batch have been processed and
that the batch has been committed (the whole batch is displayed in gray)



Bad Images. Number of images in this batch that TeleForm failed to process
(red bar)

View Statistics for an Individual Batch
When you expand the Current Workload folder, a sub-folder is shown for each
batch that is currently being processed. When you click the sub-folder of a batch,
the Info tab is shown in the display pane. The following table contains a
description and a range of values for each statistic in the Info tab of the your batch
sub-folder.

•
•
312 ••
•
•

Statistic

Description

Batch #

Shows the batch ID of this batch.

Tracking ID

Shows the batch tracking ID specified in Scan Station.

Status

Shows the status of this batch.

Batch Date

Shows a date associated with this batch.

Scan Time

Shows the date that this batch was scanned into TeleForm Scan
Station.

Committed

Shows whether or not this batch has been committed in Verifier.

Scan
Operator

Shows the name of the Scanner station operator who scanned this
batch.

Workstation

Name of the Scanner workstation that scanned this batch.

Owner

Shows the owner of this batch.

Job

Shows the name of the job for this batch.

Type

Action that Reader takes when there are missing pages in this batch.

Attachment
Option

Specifies how NonForms are handled for this batch.

Job QC

Indicates whether Job QC mode is on or off.

Data Review

Indicates whether Data Review mode is on or off.

TeleForm Administration Guide

Generate System Throughput Reports

Statistic

Description

Directory

Shows the directory of scanned images for this batch.

Pages
Scanned

Number of pages that were scanned for this batch.

Forms
Scanned

Number of forms that were scanned for this batch.

Pages
Evaluated

Number of pages (images) in this batch that were evaluated in Reader.

Forms
Evaluated
OK

Number of forms in this batch that have completed processing.

Pages
Evaluated
OK

Number of images in this batch that have completed processing

Need Review

Number of images in this batch that still need to be reviewed in Verifier.

NonForm

Number of images in this batch that were evaluated as NonForms.

Bad Images

Number of bad images in this batch.

Priority

Shows the priority of this batch.

Comment

Shows any comments that relate to this batch.

Generate System Throughput Reports
The Reports folder allows you to generate reports that are based on the statistics
in the System and Current Workload folders. When you click on the Reports
folder, the TeleForm Report options is shown in the display pane.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 313
•
•
•

Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput

These reports can also be generated in the TeleForm Stats utility.
To generate a report in TeleForm Control Center
1. On the TeleForm Control Center tree, click Reports. The TeleForm Report
options opens in the display pane.
2. Double-click the report that you want to generate. The Report Settings dialog
box for that report opens.
3. Under Period of report, select the start and end date, and the start and end
time for this report.
4. Under Constraints, select the name of the Form, User and Workstation that
you want this report to be generated for.
5. Click OK. Your Report is displayed in the System Performance dialog box.

Available Reports
TeleForm Stats can generate the following reports:

•
•
314 ••
•
•



System Performance. Analyzes the efficiency of your TeleForm system.



Form Evaluation Summary. Shows the time needed to evaluate forms.



Form Correction Summary. Identifies the skill level of your Verifier operators.



Form Detail. This report points to inefficiencies in form design.

TeleForm Administration Guide

Available Reports



User Performance. Examines the efficiency of your Verifier operators.



Batch Summary. View these statistics if you are currently processing one or
more batches, and you want to check the status of your form processing job.



Reader Usage Chart. This chart helps you analyze the volume of form
processing over time.



Verifier Productivity Charts. This chart helps you analyze the amount of
work that each Verifier operator has done.

Crystal Reports Controls
Various buttons on the Crystal Reports button bar control what you can do with
your report.



End Page. Click this button to go to the last page of the report.



Page Down. Click this button to go one page towards the end of the report



Page Forward. Click this button to go one page towards the beginning of the
report



Beginning Page. Click this button to go to the first page of the report.



Home. Click this button to go to the home page of the report.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 315
•
•
•

Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput



Print. Click this button to print your report.



Export. Click this button to export your report to a database



Zoom. Select the level of magnification to view your form at. Choose a value
from 25 to 400 percent, or Page Width or Whole Page.

System Performance Report
This report provides an overall summary of TeleForm processing efficiency. This
report helps you identify overall changes in the system throughput for a
user-specified interval of time. For example, if a scanner started producing bad
scans, this would be reflected in the Average Fields to Verify column of this
report.

The following table describes each statistic in the System Performance report:

•
•
316 ••
•
•

Stat

Description

Example

Form Name

Name of form.

Mike’s Form

Pages Evaluated

Total number of images that have
been evaluated for this form.

5,400

Average Eval. Time
(sec.)

Average time (in seconds) required to
evaluate a single image of this form.

4.2 seconds

Pages Needed Vfy.

Total number of evaluated images that
needed review for this form.

3,270

TeleForm Administration Guide

System Performance Report

Stat

Description

Example

Forms Verified

Total number of images corrected for
this form.

2,876

Avg. Verify Time (sec.)

Average time (in seconds) required to
correct a single image of this form.

18.9 seconds

Avg. Fields To Verify

Average number of fields that needed
correction per form.

2.4

Total Form Pages
Evaluated

Total number of images that were
evaluated for all processed forms.

11,038

Total Form Pages Verify

Total number of evaluated images that
needed review for all processed
forms.

6,237

Verification Backlog
Growth

Shows the maximum amount of
images that were in the correction
queue.

6,237

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 317
•
•
•

Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput

User Performance Report
The following graphic displays a typical User Performance Report:

The User Performance report shows you how much work each Verifier operator
has performed, and divides this work into the following categories:


Character Mode correction



Field Mode correction



Form Mode correction



Capture Mode correction.



Combined work for all modes of correction

This report helps you determine which Verifier operators need more training and/
or instruction, and which Verifier operators are correcting forms efficiently.

•
•
318 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

User Performance Report

IMPORTANT Verifier operators must log in if you want to
run reports that show individual performance statistics. If the
operators do not log in (or if the Security feature itself is not
enabled), the reports do not track individual users.

User Performance Chart Statistics
The following table describes each statistic in the User Performance report:
User Performance
Statistic

Description

Sample Value

CHARACTER MODE STATISTICS
Time in Char Mode

Shows the amount of time that this
operator spent in Character Mode
correction.

Time format
(HH:MM:SS)
(0:13:10)

Chars Corrected

Shows the number of characters
corrected by this operator in Character
Mode correction.

205

Char Visits

Shows the number of characters that
were visited by this operator in
Character Mode correction. This
includes characters that were held for
Field Mode correction.

555

Correction

Shows the percentage of characters in
the Char Visits column that were
corrected by this operator in Character
Mode correction.

37%

Chars/Hr.

Character corrected per hour in all
correction modes. For example, 205
characters corrected in a time of
1:35:12 yields a Chars/Hr. value of
129.

129

Chars/Mode Hr.

Number of characters per hour that
were corrected during Character Mode
correction.

933

Shows the amount of time that this
operator spent in Field Mode
correction.

Time format
(HH:MM:SS)

FIELD MODE STATISTICS
Time in Field Mode

TeleForm Administration Guide

(0:44:55)

•
•
• 319
•
•
•

Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput

User Performance
Statistic

Description

Sample Value

Fields Corrected

Shows the number of fields corrected
by this operator in Field Mode
correction.

220

Field Visits

Shows the number of fields that were
visited by this operator in Field Mode
correction. This includes fields that
were held for Form Mode correction.

296

Correction

Shows the percentage of fields in the
Field Visits column that were
corrected by this operator in Field
Mode correction.

74%

Fields/Hr.

The average number of fields per hour
that were corrected by this operator in
all correction modes.

107

Fields/Mode Hr.

Shows the average number of fields
per hour that were corrected in Field
Mode correction.

458

Shows the amount of time that this
operator spent in Form Mode
correction.

Time format
(HH:MM:SS)

Forms Corrected

Shows the number of forms corrected
by this operator in Form Mode
correction.

33

Forms/Hr.

Shows the average number of forms
per hour that were corrected by this
operator.

21

Forms/Mode Hr.

Shows the average number of forms
per hour that were corrected in Form
Mode correction.

53

FORM MODE STATISTICS
Time in Form Mode

(0:13:10)

CAPTURE MODE STATISTICS

•
•
320 ••
•
•

Time in Capture Mode

Shows the amount of time that this
operator spent in Capture Mode.

Zones Corrected

Shows the number of Capture Zones
corrected by this operator in Capture
Mode.

Time format
(HH:MM:SS)

TeleForm Administration Guide

Verifier Productivity Charts

User Performance
Statistic

Description

Fields Completed

Shows the number of fields inside the
Capture Zones that were completed by
this operator in Capture Mode.

Chars Keyed

Shows the number of characters that
were keyed into the Capture fields by
this operator in Capture Mode.

Chars/Hr.

Shows the average number of
characters per hour that were keyed by
this operator in Capture Mode.

Chars/Mode Hr.

Shows the average number of
characters per hour that were keyed in
Capture Mode.

Sample Value

TOTALS - operator
Time

Shows the total time that this operator
spent correcting forms in TeleForm
Verifier

1:35:12

Chars Corrected All
Modes

Shows the total number of characters
that this operator corrected in all
modes of correction combined.

549

Char Visits All Modes

Shows the total number of characters
that this operator visited in all modes of
correction combined.

925

Form Punts

Shows the total number of forms that
this operator transferred to another
operator (including the Supervisor)

0

Verifier Productivity Charts
The following graphic displays a typical Verifier Productivity Chart. The charts
include a bar chart and pie chart (discussed in the next two sections). With these
charts, you can determine which operators are processing forms efficiently, and
which operators need more training and/or instruction.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 321
•
•
•

Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput

The Verifier Productivity charts do not take into account the number of hours that
each Verifier operator worked during the specified time interval. Keep this in mind
when viewing the charts.
IMPORTANT Verifier operators must log in if you want to
run reports that show individual performance statistics. If the
operators do not log in (or if the Security feature itself is not
enabled), the reports do not track individual users.

Verifier Productivity Bar Chart
The Verifier Productivity bar chart has the following characteristics:


•
•
322 ••
•
•

Forms Completed on the vertical (y) axis - shows the number of forms that
have completed correction

TeleForm Administration Guide

Batch Summary Report



Verifier operator name - shows the name of the Verifier operator, as specified
in the TeleForm Security

The Verifier Productivity bar chart is a visual representation of the amount of work
that each Verifier operator has done. For each Verifier operator, a rectangular bar
is placed on this chart. This color-coded bar represents the number of forms that
the Verifier operator corrected during the specified time interval.
Verifier Productivity Pie Chart
The Verifier Productivity pie chart has the following characteristics:


Each slice of the pie chart represents the percentage of forms completed by a
Verifier operator.



The whole pie is equal to 100% of the corrected forms for the specified time
interval.

The Verifier Productivity pie chart represents the same data as the Verifier
Productivity bar chart. However, with the pie chart, you can more easily see the
relative contributions of each Verifier operator to the total verification job.

Batch Summary Report
The Batch Summary report provides a summary of each batch processed during
the specified time interval. With this report, you can view the size of each batch,
how long it took to commit each batch, and the number of images in each batch
that currently need review (if the batch has not been committed).
The Batch Summary report is primarily used to track the batches that were
scanned in today. Therefore, you probably only want to generate this report for
one day. However, it can also be used to determine how efficiently each batch was
processed in previous form processing jobs.
The following table describes each statistic in the Batch Summary report:
Statistic

Description

Sample Value

Batch ID

Shows the relevant digits of the batch
ID for this batch.

1

Start Time

Shows the time that this batch entered
the TeleForm system.

Time format

INDIVIDUAL BATCHES

(HH:MM:SS)A/P
09:23:12A

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 323
•
•
•

Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput

Statistic

Description

Sample Value

Commit Time

Shows the time that this batch was
committed in TeleForm Verifier.

Time format
(HH:MM:SS)A/P
10:15:54A

Duration

Shows the total time required to
process this batch. This time is the
difference between the Commit Time
and the Start Time.

Time format

Images

Shows the number of images in this
batch that were scanned.

237

Forms

Shows the number of forms in this batch
that were evaluated.

237

Nonforms

Shows the number of images in this
batch that were evaluated as
NonForms.

0

Need Review

Shows the number of images that
currently need review in TeleForm
Verifier.

50

Images

Shows the total number of images that
were scanned (for all batches).

3782

Forms

Shows the total number of forms that
were evaluated (for all batches).

3772

Nonforms

Shows the total number of forms that
were evaluated as NonForms (for all
batches).

10

Need Review

Shows the total number of images that
currently need review in TeleForm
Verifier.

1078

(HH:MM:SS)
0:53:42

TOTAL

Form Evaluation Summary Report
The following figure displays a typical Form Evaluation Summary report:

•
•
324 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Form Evaluation Summary Report

The Form Evaluation Summary shows you the maximum, minimum and average
time it took to evaluate your form, and the average number of fields on your form
that needed review for the specified time interval. This report is useful if you want
to know how efficient it is to evaluate a particular form. You can also compare one
form with all of the other forms that you are processing, and with the combined
totals and averages of every form.
The following table describes each column in the Form Evaluation Summary
report:
Form Evaluation
Statistic

Description

Sample
Value

NONFORMS
For the NonForms columns, see the Forms columns (they are the same)
FORMS
Pages Read

Shows the number of images (form pages)
that were evaluated for this form.

500

Avg. Eval Time (sec.)

Shows the average time (in seconds)
required to evaluate a single page of this
form.

4.3 seconds

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 325
•
•
•

Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput

Form Evaluation
Statistic

Sample
Value

Description

Short Eval Time (sec.)

Shows the minimum time (in seconds) it
took to evaluate a single page of this form.

1.8 seconds

Long Eval Time (sec.)

Shows the maximum time (in seconds) it
took to evaluate a single page of this form.

10.4 seconds

Avg. Fields to Review

Shows the average number of fields that
needed review for this form/form page.

3.2

Always Review Fields
per Page

Shows the average number of fields per
form page with the Always Review
configuration, for this form.

2.0

Pages Read

Shows the combined number of images
(form pages) that were evaluated for all of
your forms.

500

Avg. Eval Time (sec.)

Shows the average time (in seconds)
required to evaluate a single form image.
This average is based on the evaluation of
all of your forms combined.

4.3 seconds

Avg. Fields to Review

Shows the average number of fields that
needed review per form image. This
average is based on the evaluation of all of
your forms combined.

3.2

Always Review Fields
per Page

Shows the average number of fields per
form page with the Always Review
configuration. This average is based on
the evaluation of all of your forms
combined.

2.0

TOTAL

Form Correction Summary Report
The following figure displays a typical Form Correction Summary report:

•
•
326 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Form Correction Summary Report

The Form Correction Summary shows you the maximum, minimum and average
time it took to correct your form, and the average number of characters on your
form that needed review for the specified time interval. With this report, you can
compare your forms to determine which ones are being corrected efficiently and
which ones need to be optimized.
The following table describes each column in the Form Correction Summary
report:
Form Correction
Statistic

Description

Sample
Value

Form Name

Shows the name of this form, as
specified in the Save As dialog box of
TeleForm Designer.

Dave’s Form

Form Count

Shows the total number of forms
processed.

8,995

Average Time

Shows the average time (in seconds)
required to correct this form page.

18.9 seconds

Short Time

Shows the minimum time required to
correct this form page.

0.1 seconds

Long Time

Shows the maximum time required to
correct this form page.

150 seconds

Average Char Visit

Shows the average number of
characters per form page that needed
review. This counts the form pages that
were evaluated OK by TeleForm
Reader

0.03

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 327
•
•
•

Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput

Form Correction
Statistic

Sample
Value

Description

Average Char
Correct

Shows the average number of
characters per form page that were
corrected. This does not count the form
pages that were evaluated OK by
TeleForm Reader.

5.21

Average Field Visit

Shows the average number of fields
that were visited on this form page

2.32

Form Punts

Shows the total number of form pages
that this operator transferred to another
operator (including the Supervisor).

0

Form Detail Report
The following figure displays a typical Form Detail report:

The Form Detail report displays statistics for individual fields on the specified form,
for the specified time interval. This report can be used to analyze the evaluation
and correction process on a field level, instead of the form level (which is the
lowest level you can view in your online statistics).

•
•
328 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Reader Usage Chart

More than any other Form report, this report points you to the inefficiencies in your
form design. For example, if you notice that a street address image zone needs
review much more often than the other fields on your form, you might consider
using a street address constrained print field instead.

Reader Usage Chart
The following graphic displays a typical Reader Usage chart:

The Reader Usage chart is a line chart with the following characteristics:


Images on the vertical (y) axis - shows the total number of images that were
evaluated by all Reader stations combined



Day of Month on the horizontal (x) axis - shows each day in the month

This chart is a visual representation of the volume of form processing over time.
For each day in the specified time interval that you process forms, a data point is
placed on this chart. The data point represents the number of form images
evaluated on that day.
For each day that you process forms, the number of images evaluated is
displayed in a table at the bottom of the Reader Usage chart.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 329
•
•
•

Chapter 17 Analyze Your System Throughput

•
•
330 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

PART 4

TeleForm Enterprise

This section provides information specific to TeleForm
Enterprise.


“Redundancy and High Availability Settings” on page 333.
Explains the settings that support TeleForm’s high
availability and redundancy features.



“Regulatory Compliance” on page 343. Explains how
TeleForm can contribute to maintaining regulatory audit
trails.

Part 4 TeleForm Enterprise

•
•
332 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide


Redundancy and High
Availability Settings
CHAPTER 18

A goal common to all IT departments is that of providing maximum availability of
their systems to their users. The availability of a multi-user, network-based
application is influenced by many factors that include multiple hardware and
software components, all of which have the potential to fail. In the pursuit of high
availability, all of these factors must be examined and addressed in the
appropriate order based on a cost/benefit analysis for each component.
This chapter describes the TeleForm Enterprise options and settings that support
redundancy and high availability.


Hardware Components



Cluster Server Monitoring



Redundant License Service

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 333
•
•
•

Chapter 18 Redundancy and High Availability Settings

Hardware Components
Table 1 on page 334, Table 2 on page 335, and Table 3 on page 336 list some key
hardware components, examples of how they might fail, and some common
responses to minimize the risks associated with failure of the component.
NOTE These lists are not meant to be comprehensive and
are simply intended to give the reader an introduction to the
types of things that must be addressed when building a high
availability system.

Table 1 Infrastructure Risk Areas

•
•
334 ••
•
•

Risk Area

Potential Failures

Possible Responses

Power

Failure of externally-supplied power
from utility companies

The use of internal power
generators for primary or
backup power.

Cooling

Water pipes A/C system can break,
resulting in complete or partial failure
of server room equipment.

Use of redundant and
non-destructive cooling
systems.

Fire

Electrical equipment can potentially
catch fire and ignite other equipment.

Use of non-destructive fire
suppression technologies.

Internal
Network

Failure of routers, switches, network
cables and other equipment essential
for internal network communications.

Setup redundant systems.

External
Network

Failure of internal or external
equipment required to provide access
between the internal network and
external networks such as remote
offices or the Internet.

Concurrent use of multiple
vendors and different
technologies to provide
connectivity between internal
and external networks.

Buildings

Natural and unnatural disasters such
as earthquakes, hurricanes or terrorist
attacks have the potential to disable
entire buildings or cities.

Complete or partial
duplication of mission critical
operations at a secondary
location.

TeleForm Administration Guide

Hardware Components

Table 2 Server Risk Areas
Risk Area

Potential Failures

Possible Responses

Database Server

The database server
application may stop working
due to software bugs in the
database application.

Use of “clustered” servers so
that if the primary server fails
the backup server can take
over.

File Server Storage

One or more hard drives in the
file server may crash.

Use of RAID-based file
servers and/or clustered file
servers

Server Hardware

Any hardware component in a
server computer, such as
CPU, RAM, motherboard,
NIC, etc., has the potential to
fail.

Use “clustered” servers so
that if one server fails another
server is able to take is place.

Some network-based
applications have additional
hardware or software
server-based components
that are potential points of
failure.

Generally speaking, the
application vendor must
build-in features specifically
designed to address high
availability concerns.

Server-Based
Application
Services

TeleForm Administration Guide

High-end servers also include
redundancy for many key
components, allowing them to
continue operating even if one
component fails.

•
•
• 335
•
•
•

Chapter 18 Redundancy and High Availability Settings

Table 3 Workstation Risk Areas
Risk Area

Potential Failures

Possible Responses

Workstation
Hardware

Similar to Server hardware,
workstations can suffer from
hardware failures.

Typically, redundancy is
accomplished by obtaining
duplicate hardware for any
workstation components that are
unique to a particular task.

Workstation
Software

The workstation OS or a
workstation-based application has
the potential to stop working due
to problems within the application
or due to a other applications
running on the same computer.

In many cases, there are multiple
workstations that are
interchangeable. If there are
special-purpose workstations that
are unique, duplicate workstations
should be available.

Additional
Hardware

Some applications require specific
hardware to be used and the
workstations. Examples include
high-performance scanners.

Typically, redundancy is
accomplished by obtaining
duplicate hardware for any
workstation components that are
unique to a particular task.

Although action can be taken to increase reliability in each risk area, there is
always the chance of downtime if a failure occurs. Therefore, the goal is to find the
right balance between costs, data security, and availability.

Cluster Server Monitoring
TeleForm Enterprise can monitor two types of cluster servers:


The cluster server that is hosting the MS SQL database used by TeleForm;



Any file server which TeleForm accesses through a file share. This includes
the TeleForm File Server itself (the server to which TeleForm is actually
installed) and certain other types of servers, as described on “Cluster Server
for File Servers” on page 338.

Failover Process
It is important to realize that the failover process, meaning the process of the
clustered servers switching from the primary to the backup server, is not
instantaneous and may actually take several seconds or even longer. It is also not
transparent to the client applications because some in-process information, such
as an active connection to the database, may become invalid during the failover.

•
•
336 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Cluster Server Monitoring

As long as the primary SQL Server is running, TeleForm runs normally. However,
if the primary SQL Server fails, TeleForm receives a message from the backup
server as soon as the failure is detected by the clustered server environment.
When TeleForm receives this message it immediately stops what it is doing and
waits for another notification message that the backup server is on-line. When this
second message is received, TeleForm attempts to resume processing from
where it stopped. If a SQL-related error occurs TeleForm attempts to recover by
re-attempting the operation and in some cases re-initializing the SQL connection.

Failure Notification for Cluster Servers
Once TeleForm has been configured to monitor a cluster server (“Enable Server
Cluster Support” on page 339), it automatically notifies module operators and
TeleForm system managers when a cluster server is switching from one active
node to another:
1. If the cluster server notifies TeleForm that a failure event has occurred, the
Resource Checker is automatically displayed at all affected TeleForm
modules.
2. The Resource Checker serves to notify TeleForm operators that processing
has been paused because the cluster has switched to a backup node.
3. The Resource Checker is automatically closed when the failure has been
addressed and the server is online.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 337
•
•
•

Chapter 18 Redundancy and High Availability Settings

Cluster Server for MS SQL
If your TeleForm Enterprise MS SQL database is running on a cluster server, and
you have enabled MS SQL cluster support, a failure event pauses TeleForm
processing. Processing is resumed after one of the other servers in the cluster
has taken over the active server role.
Clustered
MS SQL Server

`
Primary
TeleForm Workstation

`
Secondary

TeleForm Workstation

`
TeleForm File Server

TeleForm Workstation

To install MS SQL to a cluster server
1. Install MS SQL database on the cluster server using a standard installation.
No special steps are required.
See “MS SQL Database” on page 46 for information on setting up MS SQL
before installing TeleForm.
2. When installing TeleForm, you are prompted to identify the MS SQL server to
use for TeleForm data storage. Specify the cluster name, not any individual
servers within the cluster.
See Step 13 on page 56 for information on specifying the MS SQL server
during the installation of TeleForm.

Cluster Server for File Servers
In addition to monitoring a clustered MS SQL server, TeleForm Enterprise can
monitor clustered file servers that TeleForm accesses through file shares.
Examples of such servers include:


•
•
338 ••
•
•

Servers hosting database lookups for data entry field validation (all databases
except SQL)

TeleForm Administration Guide

Cluster Server Monitoring



Servers that host simple databases to which TeleForm exports data. CSV,
XLS, Access, and other databases to which TeleForm can export data (but not
images) may be hosted on cluster servers. TeleForm Enterprise can monitor
these cluster servers for failure.



Cluster servers to which TeleForm exports through the Connect Agent for
Capture to Directory, which exports data as CSV and images, could “target” a
file share on a clustered server.
Clustered
MS SQL Server

Primary
`
TeleForm Workstation
Secondary
`

Clustered
File Server

TeleForm Workstation

`
Primary

TeleForm Workstation

Secondary

TeleForm may not be able to monitor ALL cluster servers with which it interacts.
Unless TeleForm accesses a file share on the cluster server, do not attempt to
monitor it through TeleForm. For example, the Connect Agent to Livelink may
export data to a clustered Livelink server, but it does not do so through a file
share. Most export Connect Agents, with the exception of the Connect Agent for
Capture to Directory, fall into this category.

Enable Server Cluster Support
To enable server cluster support in TeleForm
1. Start a TeleForm module.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 339
•
•
•

Chapter 18 Redundancy and High Availability Settings

2. From the Utilities menu, select Configuration.
3. The Global and Local TeleForm Settings dialog box opens.
4. Open the Multiuser Features > Server Cluster Support tab.
a. Select the Enable checkbox in the SQL Cluster Support section. The
Resource name field is automatically filled in and cannot be edited.
5. To monitor clustered file servers:
a. Select the Enable checkbox in the File Server Cluster Support section.
b. Click the Add button. An editable field opens in the File servers to
monitor window
c. Type the name of the clustered file server in the editable field and press
the ENTER key.
d. Repeat as needed for more file servers.
6. Click Apply and OK.

•
•
340 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Redundant License Service

Redundant License Service
The License Service prevents a system interruption when the TeleForm File
Server experiences a temporary failure. The time period between the License
Service going offline and TeleForm modules automatically shutting down is two
weeks, for system managers to address the situation.
IMPORTANT If the License Service is not restarted within
two weeks, all licensed TeleForm modules shut down. After
that point, the TeleForm system manager needs to contact
Autonomy Cardiff Technical Support for assistance in
restarting TeleForm. See “Autonomy Customer Support” on
page 27 for information on contacting Technical Support.

The changes to the TeleForm License Service for TeleForm Enterprise are
automatic. You do not need to enable any options or change any settings for the
two-week “grace period” to take effect.
See “License Monitoring” on page 223 for more information about the License
Service.

Warning Messages and Alerts
If you want Control Center to generate alerts regarding the License Service, you
must enable that option. You can also configure TeleForm Control Center to
generate an alert when the License Service is not running. See “Alerts in Control
Center” on page 236 for information on configuring alerts.

Restart the License Service
To restart the TeleForm License Service
1. Open Windows Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services on your
TeleForm File Server.
2. On the Services window, find the TeleForm License Service.
3. Right-click the TeleForm License Service and select Start.

Transfer the License Service to a Different Machine
If the machine that the TeleForm License Service is installed on crashes and
cannot be recovered, you must:
1. Install TeleForm on another server in the cluster.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 341
•
•
•

Chapter 18 Redundancy and High Availability Settings

2. Install the local files to the same device (shared) the previous server used.
3. Start the License Service on the new server.
4. Reactivate TeleForm through the Activation Wizard. See “Activation” on
page 59 for more information on activating TeleForm.

•
•
342 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide


Regulatory Compliance
CHAPTER 19

Compliance tools in TeleForm Enterprise assist in efforts to respond to numerous
regulatory requirements such as Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOA), Health Insurance
Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA), and Title 21 CFR Part 11 (Part 11).
The primary goal of TeleForm Compliance tools is to provide better compliance
support by either automating common manual processes and making common
practices easier to perform. The overall guiding principle is to lower the overall
cost of compliance.
Compliance tools in TeleForm Enterprise include:


Double-key data entry in Verifier.



Enhanced security communication with Microsoft 2003 and 2008 Server.



Expanded data tracking and system use logging.



New reporting tool to query the audit data collected.



LDAP Support.

This chapter describes regulatory compliance tools in TeleForm.


Double Key Data Entry



Compliance Security



Compliance Reporting and Audit Logging

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 343
•
•
•

Chapter 19 Regulatory Compliance

Double Key Data Entry
Double key data entry is where 2 different users type data into a field and the data
must match or it is flagged for further review.
To use Double Key data entry
1. Set up and enable Security. See “Security” on page 85 for more information.

NOTE You must have at least 2 users with Verifier
(Basic) rights.

2. Enable Double Key Validation.
3. Set up Double Key Validation for a Field.
4. Process Batches With Double Key Validation.

Enable Double Key Validation
To enable double key validation
1. In one of the core TeleForm applications (TeleForm AutoMerge Publisher,
Designer, Reader, Scan Station, or Verifier), click Utilities > Configuration...
The Settings dialog box opens.
2. In the Settings dialog box, click the Multiuser Features tab and then
Compliance Support.

•
•
344 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Double Key Data Entry

3. Select Enable double key validation.

4. Click Apply to apply your changes.
5. Click OK to close the dialog box.
For information on enabling Account Impersonation, please see “Compliance
Security” on page 347.

Set up Double Key Validation for a Field
To set up double key validation
1. In TeleForm Designer, right-click on the field which will require double key
validation and select Properties.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 345
•
•
•

Chapter 19 Regulatory Compliance

2. Select the Validations tab.

3. Select Double key to enable double key validation.

Process Batches With Double Key Validation
Double key validation requires that items be processed within a batch and that
Data Review is enabled for the batch.
To enable Data Review
1. In Scan Station go to File > Job Configuration.
2. Select the Job that is used to process batches.

•
•
346 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Compliance Security

3. On the Review/Export tab, check Data Review. A drop list opens to select the
level of review.

4. Select the level of review the processing requires.
5. Click OK.

Compliance Security
Two additional levels of security have been added for TeleForm Enterprise 10.0
and later:


The directory that contains the TeleForm forms can be limited to use by a
specific TeleForm Group.



TeleForm can use Account Impersonation for processing.
IMPORTANT The following limitations exist for TeleForm
Enterprise 10.5 Compliance Security.
 It is only available for TeleForm system installed with
UNC. This feature cannot be used with a system
installed with mapped drives.
 It cannot be used with Single Sign On.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 347
•
•
•

Chapter 19 Regulatory Compliance

Cardiff strongly recommends that you implement the following in support of
Compliance:


Version control on all form definitions and scripts. “Revision Control” on
page 259 for more information.



Ensure sufficient security is setup on the Microsoft SQL Server used with
TeleForm.



Do not override compliance safeguards with script.

Set Up Form Folder Security
To set up form folder security
1. Enable security for the TeleForm System. See “Enterprise Security Options”
on page 86 for instructions.
2. In TeleForm Designer, select File > Templates.
3. In the Templates dialog box, right-click the Forms folder and select Security
Settings.

4. The Folder Security dialog box opens.

•
•
348 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Compliance Security

5. This dialog box displays the name of the folder as it is displayed in TeleForm,
as well as the path.
6. Select the user group that should have rights to modify forms from the
Security Group drop list.
7. Click OK.

Set Up Windows Security
To set up Network Security for TeleForm Compliance
1. On the Domain Controller create:
a. A TeleForm administrator account. This is the account that TeleForm
operates with under Account Impersonation. The TeleForm Administrator
account must be a member of the Power Users group on TeleForm
Server and all workstations.
b. Operator accounts for each person that logs on to TeleForm. These
Operator/user accounts must be in the Users group on the TeleForm
Server and appropriate Workstations.
2. On the TeleForm Server:
a. Navigate to File Server Management > Shares
b. Right-click on the shared TeleForm directory and select Properties.
c. On the Share Permissions tab, select Everyone and Full Control
access.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 349
•
•
•

Chapter 19 Regulatory Compliance

d. On the Securities tab, select the TeleForm Administrator account and
grant Full Control.
e. On the Securities tab, click Advanced.... Select the TeleForm operator
accounts (do not include the TeleForm Administrator account) and select
Traverse Folder/Execute File permissions and clear any other
permissions.
f.

Open the shared TeleForm directory, right-click on the \TeleForm
Public directory and select Properties.

g. On the Securities tab select the TeleForm operator accounts and select
Read access, in addition to the inherited rights from the Parent (TeleForm)
directory.
h. Select the TeleForm Administrator and grant Full Control, in addition to
the inherited rights from the Parent (TeleForm) directory.

Enable Account Impersonation
Account Impersonation is used to allow a TeleForm operator to complete tasks
within the TeleForm application, such as process documents or save data, that
their Windows security level would not allow them to do. These tasks can only be
accomplished while logged into the TeleForm system that has Account
Impersonation enabled.
To enable Account Impersonation, you must have completed “Set Up Windows
Security” on page 349. On the TeleForm Server:
1. In the TeleForm root directory, select the \TeleForm Public directory.
2. Open the TELEDATA.INI file using Notepad or a similar application.
3. Set Account Allow Impersonation to 1. Then Save and Exit the file.
4. Open TeleForm Control Center. Select Configuration Settings > Global
Settings > Global System > Account Information tab.

•
•
350 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Compliance Security

5. Select Enable Account Impersonation.
6. Type the login name of the TeleForm Administrator account in Account User
Name. This is the account that all TeleForm operators impersonate while
logged into TeleForm.
7. Type the domain the TeleForm Administrator account is a member of in
Account Domain Name.
8. Type the password for the TeleForm Administrator account in Account
Password.
9. Click OK.
Account Impersonation is now enabled for all TeleForm users.
NOTE A side effect of account impersonation is that
anything an operator user copies to a local workstation
profile is only available when the TeleForm Administrator is
logged into the workstation. It is recommended that form
exports, files, etc. are copied to either a local drive or
elsewhere on the network.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 351
•
•
•

Chapter 19 Regulatory Compliance

Compliance Reporting and Audit Logging
Compliance Reporting and Audit Logging include all user actions that take place
using a TeleForm System. The reports generated by Report Generator can be
used to demonstrate that Compliance Audit Logging is taking place.

Digital Signature
TeleForm applies user names and passwords as digital signatures on all human
actions within the TeleForm system. You have the option to inform your users of
this each time they log into TeleForm.
To notify your users that their actions are logged
1. Open TeleForm Control Center. Select Configuration Settings > Global
Settings > Multiuser Features > Compliance Support.

2. select Enable Digital Signature Warning.
3. In Warning text, type the text that you want to be displayed each time a user
logs in.
4. Click Apply to apply your changes.
5. Click OK to close the dialog box.

•
•
352 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Compliance Reporting and Audit Logging

Audit Logging Level
Audit logging is disabled by default. You must select a logging level to enable the
tracking.



Minimum Audit Logging logs module startup and shutdown



Normal Audit Logging logs all user and system actions, except modification
of individual data elements/fields.



Maximum Audit Logging logs all user and system actions, including
modification of individual data elements/fields.
CAUTION Maximum Audit Logging generates a
tremendous amount of data. Before enabling this
option, please ensure that your system is scaled to
handle this load. We recommend at a minimum:
 2 GB Server RAM
 1 TB Disk Space in an external SCSI Storage
Cabinet
 Configured RAID Level 5

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 353
•
•
•

Chapter 19 Regulatory Compliance

Data Warehouse/Off-line Database
TeleForm supports reporting from the live TeleForm database, as well as an
off-line (Archive) database, using Report Generator. Using an off-line database
removes the reporting task from the live TeleForm system which speeds the
processing of operators. The sync operation between the live TeleForm database
and the off-line database should not have a noticeable performance affect.
Cardiff supports Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Data Warehousing.

NOTE Cardiff recommends that you do not use Database
Replication for data warehouse transfers.

To set up reporting with Report Generator
1. Open Report Generator at least once to create the required tables.
2. Use the Data Transformation Services to create a DTS Package with the
following tables from the TeleForm database:
 Tfuser
 Tfvfstat
 Tfrdstat
 Tfrfstat
 Tfbatmt
 Tfidtbl
 Tfauditbatch
 Tfauditform
 Tfaudituser
 Tfauditworkstation
 TfauditImage
 Tfauditlog

3. After the initial copy has taken place, log into TeleForm as the Administrator
user.
4. Open TeleForm Control Center. Select Configuration Settings > Global
Settings > Multiuser Features > Compliance Support.

•
•
354 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Compliance Reporting and Audit Logging

5. Point the Data warehouse connect string to the alternate database location for
off-line reporting.
a. Connect string syntax to specify an ODBC Data Source:
Provider=MSDASQL;DSN=MyDSN;UID=MyUID;PWD=MyPassword


with SQL Integrated Security:

Provider=MSDASQL;DSN=MyDSN;Trusted_Connection=Yes

b. Connect string syntax to specify an OLEDB (Direct Server) connection:
Provider=SQLOLEDB;Data Source='MyServer';Initial
Catalog='MyDatabase';User ID='MyID';Password='MyPassword'


with SQL integrated Security:

Provider=SQLOLEDB;Data Source='MyServer';Initial
Catalog='MyDatabase';Integrated Security='SSPI’

6. Click Apply to apply your changes.
7. Click OK to close the dialog.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 355
•
•
•

Chapter 19 Regulatory Compliance

•
•
356 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Appendixes

This section includes the appendixes.


“Glossary” on page 359

Appendixes

•
•
358 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

Glossary
A
Activate

Moving a form from the design stage to the production stage, allowing it to
be identified and evaluated by TeleForm Reader.

Active

Refers to the window, object, or icon that “has focus”. Keystrokes and
mouse clicks apply to the “active” item.

AutoMerge Publisher
(AMP)

A TeleForm module that allows you to distribute documents via printer, fax
or email.

Append

To add data to the end of an existing file.

Application

A Windows program.

Application icon

A graphic on the desktop, Start menu, etc., that represents an application.

Application window

The work area of a running application.

Banding

Dragging a cursor over a specific area.

B

When used for Traditional and VersiForms, banding selects all the objects
in the area.
When used with Existing forms, TeleForm attempts to match an equivalent
data Entry Field to the original.
Bar Code

Sets of characters that are represented as a series of black bars and white
spaces. The bars and spaces represent characters that can be read by
TeleForm or other devices.

Bitmap

An image made up of individual pixels.

Blank

A field that does not contain any data.

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
•
• 359
•
•

Glossary

Block Form ID

A block at the top of a Traditional form that TeleForm reads to aid in
identification.

Border

A rectangle that encompasses an object and defines the object's perimeter
on a form.

Box-style Choice Field

A Choice Field where the standard bubbles are replaced by small boxes that
the user can mark (i.e. fill in, check, or “x”)

Bubbles

Circles that a user darkens to indicate a selection. May be part of an Entry
Field or a Choice Field. The term is also used generically to refer to the
choices in underline fields, box-style fields, and response-style choice
fields.

Check box

A small square that is shown in a dialog box. It can be selected or cleared.
When selected, it contains either a check-mark or an X.

Choice Field

A data Entry Field that includes one or more choices. Each choice consists
of a bubble, a display value, and storage value.

Choice Option

One element (bubble, display value and storage value) of a Choice Field.

Choose

To select an item or command by clicking on it or by using the appropriate
key sequence.

Click

To quickly press and release the left mouse button.

Client

Recipient of data in a Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) conversation.

Clipboard

A temporary storage area for cut or copied text and graphics that can be
pasted into another TeleForm form or another Windows application. The
clipboard holds information until another selection is cut or copied.

Close

To shut down a document or application window.

Cluster

A system configuration where a single system resource (such as a database
server) actually consists of more than one physical resource, providing
redundancy.

Cluster Aware Application

An application that can detect and handle events from a Cluster Server.
TeleForm Enterprise 10.0 and later is a Cluster Aware Application.

Cluster Server

A server that manages one or more instances of a server application.

C

•
•
360 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

D

Cold link

In DDE, a conversation in which the client only receives data from the server
when the client requests it.

Comb-style Print Field

A data Entry Field that lets users hand print alphabetic or numeric
characters with a specific appearance. Identical in nature to a Constrained
Print Field, but it looks like this:

Command

A word or phrase, usually found on a menu or a button, that you choose to
carry out an action.

Continuous Availability

This implies non-stop service, with no lapse in service. This represents an
ideal state, and is generally used to indicate a high level of availability in
which only a very small quantity of downtime is allowed. High availability
does not imply continuous availability.

Constrained Print Field

A data Entry Field that lets users hand print alphabetic or numeric
characters with a specific appearance so that they can be interpreted by
TeleForm. It looks like this:

Conversation

Exchange of data between two applications using DDE protocol.

Copy

To put a copy of the selected text or item on the Windows clipboard that can
be transferred it to another location.

Cornerstone

Any of the four blocks automatically placed at the corners of a Traditional
form that aid in alignment and interpretation of returned forms. (a type of
reference mark.)

CSV

Comma Separated Values. A format in which TeleForm can save data for
use in exporting to other applications.

Cursor

A visual marker that indicates the area in which you are working. Depending
on the function, the cursor may be displayed as an arrow, insertion bar,
crosshair, or other shape.

Cut

To remove an item from a document and put it onto the clipboard.

D

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 361
•
•
•

Glossary

•
•
362 ••
•
•

Data

Information maintained in individual fields and records.

Data Entry Field

A form element provided by TeleForm which users darken or otherwise use
to enter printed information. Data Entry Field types include constrained print
fields, choice fields, entry fields, and Image Zones.

Data Group

A type of group that can be applied to multiple data entry fields to combine
their values into a single field value.

Date Field

The date field is a TeleForm object capable of performing date validations
on your form. It can also export date values to databases that can accept
such information.

DCX

A graphical image file format that supports multipage PCX files.

DDE

Dynamic Data Exchange. A windows communication interface that allows
windows applications to exchange data.

Defaults

Predefined TeleForm settings such as confidence threshold, printer
settings, and so on.

DEL

Delimited values. A format in which TeleForm can save data for use in
exporting to other applications.

Detail Group

A type of group that can be used to instantly create data tables and similar
multi-row field structures from a single field or group of fields. Data entered
into each row are stored as a records of the detail group field.

Device Driver

A file that tells your computer how to operate a peripheral device such as a
mouse or printer.

Dialog box

A box that opens in response to a command that allows you to control or
configure an element of TeleForm.

Directory

A collection of files and subdirectories that are stored at the same location
on a disk.

Document window

A window in an application where a file can be viewed and edited.

Double-click

To click the left mouse button twice in rapid succession.

Draft

A form that has not been activated. Draft forms can be printed and
distributed, but cannot be identified or evaluated by Reader.

Drag

To hold down the left mouse button while moving the mouse.

TeleForm Administration Guide

E

Dropout form

A form that is professionally produced using drop out ink. Drop ink is a
special colored ink that is invisible to your scanner. When dropout forms are
evaluated, TeleForm Reader does not need to perform line removal, so
there is no risk of removing parts of characters that overlap field lines.

Edit

To add, change, or delete text and/or graphics.

Entry Field

A data Entry Field consisting of any number of bubbles with corresponding
single character data storage values.

Exclude Zone

An area of the form where no recognition occurs. Exclude zones can be
drawn onto forms using the Exclude Zone tool in TeleForm Designer.
Exclude zones are generally used to prevent the interpretation of text inside
a recognition area, such as pre-filled text inside an Image Zone.

Existing form

A form that was initially created in some application besides TeleForm.
These forms can be scanned into TeleForm Designer and overlaid with
TeleForm data fields to enable recognition.

Explicit ID field

A field that is added to Existing forms to uniquely identify the form to
TeleForm.

Export

To copy a form or form data from the hard disk to another directory or disk.
Exporting data requires selecting an export format so the data can be used
by another application.

Extension

The last three characters in a file name following the period.

Failover

When a component in an HA system fails resulting in a loss of service, the
service is started by the HA system on another component in the system.
This transfer of a service following a failure in the system is termed failover.

Fault tolerance

This is a means to achieve very high levels of availability. A fault tolerant
system has the ability to continue service despite a hardware or a software
failure, and is characterized by redundancy in hardware, including CPU,
memory, and I/0 subsystems. High availability does not imply fault
tolerance.

Field

A data gathering object that is filled out by the form user and read by
TeleForm. Can also be a reference to a data element in a database file.

E

F

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 363
•
•
•

Glossary

File

A document or application that has been given a name.

File format

The structure or arrangement of data stored in a file.

File name

The name of a file. In DOS and Windows, file names are generally
composed of one or more naming characters, followed by a period
separator and one to three extension characters to identify the file format.

Flat-file database

A database in which all related information is contained in a single table.

Font

The shape of a set of characters. Each set has a unique name, such as
Helvetica or Times Roman.

Form

A TeleForm document designed to gather data automatically.

Form ID

The unique identification number for a TeleForm form, whether Traditional,
VersiForm, or Existing. For Traditional and VersiForms, the Form ID is a
physical mark or set of numbers on the form itself.

Form name

The name of a TeleForm document. In TeleForm, this can be up to 30
characters and does not need to have an extension.

Form template

The complete set of form properties that have been set, saved, and
activated for a form in TeleForm Designer. When a form is evaluated,
TeleForm Reader identifies the form and then references the form's
template to obtain the evaluation and export instructions for the form.

Format

The structure of a data file. Specifies the type of database to which file data
is exported. Also, to prepare a disk so that it can hold information.

Grab handles

Small black squares that are shown on the edges and corners of an object
when it is selected.

Grid

Vertical and horizontal guidelines whose spacing and measurement units
can be defined as an aid to form design.

Group (standard)

A collection of objects that behave as one object.

Highlighted

Indicates that an object or text is selected. Highlighted items are displayed
in a different color than normal items.

G

H

•
•
364 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

I

Hot link

In DDE, a conversation in which the server sends data to the client
whenever the data changes or becomes available.

Icon

A graphic representation for various elements, such as application
programs.

ICR

An acronym for Intelligent Character Recognition. The technology used to
read and convert hand-printed text from a graphical image format to an
editable text format.

Image Zone

An area on a form that TeleForm reserves for capturing data (e.g. a bar
code, encrypted text) and/or images (e.g. a drawing).

Import

To copy a form or form data from another directory or disk.

Insertion point

Refers to the location of the cursor. The place where text is inserted when
you type.

Library

A TeleForm file in which frequently used objects and groups of objects can
be stored.

Log

A chart, list, or table of events that have occurred.

Machine Locking

Tying TeleForm to a specific computer through the Activation Wizard.
TeleForm must be activated before it can run.

Magnify

In TeleForm, to enlarge a form on the screen to twice its actual size so that
objects can be edited in detail.

Master-detail

A term used for forms that include Detail Groups. It defines the relationship
between two data tables. The master table (or Order table) contains the
main records; the detail table (or Line Item table) contains Detail Group
records. Multiple Detail tables can exist for each order table.

Menu

A list of commands that opens under each menu bar item.

Menu bar

The horizontal bar that contains the names of TeleForm menus. It is
displayed below the title bar.

I

L

M

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 365
•
•
•

Glossary

N
Node

A server that is managed by the cluster server. The active node is the server
in a cluster that is currently performing all processing tasks. Passive nodes
are servers in the cluster that are not currently processing, but are available
as backups in case of a failure at the active node.

NonForm

1. The form status assigned to a document that is not recognized by
TeleForm Reader as being a TeleForm form.
2. A form or page that is not a TeleForm document.

Non-recognition form

A form that is designed to not be interpreted by TeleForm, and as such, does
not need to be activated or contain reference marks.

Object

An item placed on a form that can be text, graphics, shapes, or data entry
fields.

Object ID

A unique identifier assigned for form data entry fields (sometimes called a
field name).

OCR

Optical Character Recognition. The technology used to read and convert
machine-printed text from a graphical image format to an editable text
format.

Open

To display the contents of a form in a window or to enlarge an icon to a
window.

Option button

A small round button that is displayed in a dialog box and is used to enable
an option.

Overlay field

A TeleForm data field that is positioned directly over the background image
on an existing form. When the existing forms are filled out and evaluated,
TeleForm interprets the text and marks as part of the overlay field and
processes it accordingly. In this way, overlay fields allow recognition to occur
on existing forms.

Page link

An element repeated on every page of a form that serves to link the pages
(should they happen to get separated) when the form is returned.

Paste

To transfer the contents of the clipboard to an application.

O

P

•
•
366 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

R

Path

The location of a file in a directory tree. For example, forms held for
verification may be stored in TELEFORM\SUS.

PCX

A file format for storing one page images in the form of a rectangular bitmap.
TeleForm can store Image Zones as PCX files.

PDF-417

A set of high density 2 dimensional bar code symbology.

Pixels

The smallest graphic units on the display screen.

Point size

A unit of measure for text. A point is equal to 1/72 of an inch.

Pointer

An arrow-shaped cursor that indicates the mouse position. Used in
TeleForm to move objects.

Preprocessing

The process of enhancing an image as it is processed by TeleForm Reader.
This process applies various filters to the image to increase its clarity and
remove unwanted lines and noise before it is evaluated.

Priority

You can set varying priorities for batches and Connect Agents. The
allowable range is 0-255, with the default being 100. 0 is the highest priority.
255 is the lowest priority.

Proportional font

A font in which different characters have varying widths.

RAM

An acronym for Random Access Memory. It can be read from or written to
by the computer or other devices. Information held in RAM is lost when you
turn off your computer.

Raster font

A font created as a graphic bitmap image. It is available only in a fixed size
and is not scalable. A raster font is used mostly on the screen, but is also
used by some dot-matrix printers and built into some laser printers.

Recoflex

A software utility built into TeleForm that combines the interpretation results
of several recognition engines and applies complex algorithms and artificial
intelligence routines to determine which result is the most accurate.

Recognition set

The currently active set of forms that TeleForm Reader is able to recognize
and process.

Record

A horizontal row in a database that contains a group of related fields of data.

R

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 367
•
•
•

Glossary

Reference marks

The alignment marks that are automatically placed on a Traditional or
VersiForm form and aid in its interpretation (for Traditional forms they are
also called cornerstones).

Relational database

As opposed to a flat-file database system, in which all related information is
contained in a single table, a relational database can store related
information across a number of tables, and can create relationships
between tables based on common data. See “Master-detail” on page 365.

Resource

An application or service managed by the cluster server.

Response field

A special class of Choice Field where users circle the desired option rather
than fill in a bubble field.

Response mark

The portion of an Entry Field or a Choice Field that a user darkens in order
to indicate the desired value. Can be bubbles, squares, and other such
marks.

Right-click

To quickly press and release the right mouse button.

Save

To store a file or document on a disk using the Save or Save As commands.

Scaled point size

A point size that approximates a specified point size for use on the screen.

Script

A short program or routine that can be used by a program to enhance its
function or provide additional capability.

Scroll arrow

An arrow at either end of the scroll bar that helps you scroll through
information. Click on the scroll arrow to advance by one line, or press the
mouse button to scroll continuously.

Scroll bars

The bars that display at the bottom and right edge of a window when the
contents of the window are not entirely visible.

Select

To highlight an object or a menu command by clicking on it.

Server

Source of data in a Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) conversation.

SQL

Structured Query Language. Adopted by the American National Standards
Institute (ANSI) as the standard language for relational database
management systems (RDBMS). SQL includes programming commands
for data definition, data manipulation, data retrieval, security, and
transaction processing.

S

•
•
368 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide

T

Standard group

A collection of objects that can be moved, cut, copied, and pasted as a
single object. Often useful to retain the spacing between fields during form
design.

Status bar

A bar that displays underneath certain TeleForm windows that provides
information about the items in the window.

TeleForm Control Center

A snap-in for Microsoft Management Console (MMC) that allows you to
manage your TeleForm network.

TeleForm Database Utilities

The TeleForm utilities that allow you to optimize and maintain your database
files.

TeleForm Designer

The TeleForm application where all forms are created and managed.

TeleForm form

Any form created in TeleForm Designer that can be evaluated by TeleForm
Reader.

TeleForm License Manager

The TeleForm utility where your registration code and license codes are
managed.

TeleForm Monitor

The TeleForm utility that monitors the status of every workstation.

TeleForm Reader

The TeleForm application responsible for interpreting forms. Although forms
can be received when this application is closed, they cannot be interpreted
unless TeleForm Reader is running.

TeleForm Remote Capture
Station

The TeleForm application that allows forms and documents to be captured
remotely, then transferred to the main TeleForm system for evaluation.

TeleForm Scan Station

The TeleForm application that turns completed forms into batches that can
be processed by Reader and Verifier.

TeleForm Stats

The TeleForm application that collects statistics for workflow analysis.

TeleForm Verifier

The TeleForm application where returned forms that contain suspect data
are corrected. Forms can also be filled in by keyboard from Verifier.

TeleForm Viewer

The TeleForm utility for viewing forms and images.

Template

A layout for data entry fields that includes fields and separator characters,
such as commas, hyphens, and slashes. For example, a date format may
include slashes to separate month, day, and year (2/2/2).

T

TeleForm Administration Guide

•
•
• 369
•
•
•

Glossary

Text

Any characters entered on a form or data Entry Field that are not treated
numerically.

Text cursor

The text cursor is shown whenever the insertion point is in a text field, such
as when editing a text object.

TIF

Tagged Image File format. A graphical file format commonly used for fax
transmissions.

Title bar

The horizontal bar at the top of a window containing the title of the window.

Topic

Name of the topic of a DDE conversation, usually a form name.

Traditional form

A form created entirely in TeleForm Designer, containing the cornerstone
reference marks and visible User ID.

Underline-style Choice
Field

A Choice Field where the bubbles are replaced by underscores where the
user can draw a mark (check, or “x”)

User ID

A name associated with a form that identifies the person to whom it was
sent, therefore identifying who returned the form.

VersiForm

A form created in TeleForm Designer, containing the flexible reference
marks and text or bar code Form ID.

U

V

W

•
•
370 ••
•
•

Warm link

In DDE, a conversation in which the client is notified each time the data
changes at the server (at least data which is relevant to the conversation).
Upon notification, the client may request to have the actual data sent to it.

Window

A rectangular area on the computer screen in which an application is run.
Windows can generally be manually resized, maximized, and minimized.

TeleForm Administration Guide

Index
Symbols
.NET 43
.Net 2.0 186

A
Activated forms 277
Changing 278
Active Directory 46, 94
Advanced configuration 241
Alerts 236
AMP
Service 224
Analyzing form design 277
Analyzing forms
Application level 280
Analyzing system throughput 295
Application-specific statistics 301
Archiving images 256
Auto page link 136
Auto-assign queue refresh 153
Average Times chart 284

B
Backlog statistic 301
Backup directory 123
Bad evaluations 248
Bad images 248
Batch commit 136
Batch merging 151
Batch page link 136
Batch statistics
Attachment option 312
Bad images 312, 313

TeleForm Administration Guide

Batch 310
Batch # 312
Batch date 312
Comment 313
Committed 312
Data review 312
Directory 313
Eval 310
Eval OK 310, 311
Forms evaluated OK 313
Forms scanned 313
Job 311, 312
Job QC 312
Need eval 312
Need review 310, 312, 313
NonForm 310, 311, 313
Owner 311, 312
Pages evaluated 313
Pages evaluated OK 313
Pages scanned 313
Priority 311, 313
Scan 310
Scan operator 312
Scan time 312
Status 311, 312
Tracking ID 311, 312
Type 312
Viewing 310
Workstation 312
Batches
Purging 255
Best guess threshold 141
By Form chart 282, 288
By Form tab 281

•
•
• 371
•
•
•

Index

C
Cache the auto-assign queue 153
Capture Mode 306
Character extraction tolerance 142
Character Mode 215, 307
Appearance tab 217
Best guess character display options 217
Exclude confusable characters 215
Exclude if confidence is less than 216
Exclude Image Zones 216
General Options tab 215
Number of columns and rows to display 215
Number of corrected characters to display 215
Number of uncorrected characters to display
215
Setting colors 217
Sorting 216
Statistics 308
Character recognition options 141
Choice field separator 125
Citrix system requirements 80
Collect Reader statistics 148
Collect Verifier statistics 121
Compress .RES file 153
Concurrent Users 181
Confidence settings 137
Confidence threshold 141
Configuration Options dialog box 118, 340
Configuration Options tab 243
Batch auto assign skip flags 162
Capture Zone entry font name 164
Clear and key virtuals 163
Disable background form loads 163
Enable scripts 163
Explicit ID performance 163
Form selection config override 164
Generate wallpaper resolution 164
Right justify numerics 164
Stacked config pages 164
Verifier preloads 164
Configuration settings
Verifier configuration 204

•
•
372 ••
•
•

Configuring global settings 241
Configuring station settings 242
Configuring user settings 243
Connect Agent setup 174, 191
Connect Agents 50
Constrained print fill threshold 141
Control Center
Action menu 229
Alerts 236
Alerts branch 228
Analyzing form design 277
Analyzing system throughput 295
Configuration Settings branch 228
Current Workload branch 228
Customizing 229
Email alerts 237
Form correction summary report 290
Form detail report 292
Generating form reports 289
Global settings 241
Readers 280
Reports branch 228
Resolving inefficiency 245
System branch 228
System throughput reports 313
Verifiers 280
Control Center branches 228
Correction options
Character Mode 215
Field Mode 213
Form Mode 209
Verifier 206
Crystal reports 289, 315
Current Workload folder 287, 309, 311

D
Default language 119
Designer - Advanced tab 132
Copy bitmaps to clipboard with Edit/Copy 132
Default shape library 133
Extended ID range 133
Form ID assignment 133

TeleForm Administration Guide

E

Maximum undos 133
Skip ’Save As’ dialog for activated forms 132
Standard ID range 133
Validate files at next startup 132
Designer - Defaults tab 133
Constrained print dimensions 134
Entry/Choice shape 134
Line width 134
Reference mark margins 134
Designer - Local tab 130
Create a New form at startup 130
Existing form background color 131
Show Form ID and state in title 131
Show full grid 131
Spell check language 131
Spell checking options 131
Sticky cursors 130
Designer tab 242
Diagnostic Logging 156
Directory connection 170
Disable audible alerts 129
Disable fax capabilities 129
Distribution 136
Dropin identification 139
DSS Files 168, 181

E
Email alerts 237
Enable script caching 153
Enable synchronization 173, 193
Evaluation zones 136
Evaluation/Identification 135
Existing/VersiForm confidence 137
Export Connect Agents 50
Export tab 124
Choice field separator 125
Export/Commit retries 124
Mapping fields 125
Maximum field name length 125
Minimum VARCHAR length 125
Strict commit rule 125
Export/Commit retries 124

TeleForm Administration Guide

F
Field character threshold 206
Field Mode 213, 305, 306
Appearance tab 214
Automatically skip to the next questionable
character 214
Don’t allow incorrect entry 213
Exclude Image Zones 214
General Options tab 213
Number of fields to display 214
Operator statistics 306
Setting colors 214
FIPS 186
Firewall 185
Form cache size 129
Form correction statistics 291
Form correction summary 290
Form detail report 292
Form detail statistics 292
Form evaluation statistics 289
Form merges 241
Form Mode 209, 304
Always prompt before leaving 211
Appearance tab 211
Automatically move to the next character
needing review 210
Correction Options tab 210
Default image scaling 212
Don’t allow incorrect entry 210
Don’t prompt to save data after each form 210
Image Positioning tab 212
Image Zone font size 211
Leave after all fields visited 210
Leave after tabbing out of last field 211
Leave when user presses enter 211
Setting colors 211
Skip empty Image Zones 210
Form statistics 279
Application level 280
Average time to verify 284
Form reports 289
Total Times chart 288

•
•
• 373
•
•
•

Index

Verification 286
Workflow 283
Workload level 287
Form tracking 232
Full tracking 232

G
General tab
Collect Verifier statistics 121
Default language 119
Lock timeout 120
Minimal tracking 120
Stall time 120
WYSIWYG text options 120
Generating form reports 289
Global settings 241
Advanced configuration 241
Form merges 241
Image preprocessing 241
Job Configuration 241
Licenses 241
Purge Log 241
Reader settings 241
Recognition Set 241
Security 241
Global statistics 297, 299
% Complete 300
% Need Verify 300
Avg. Time (Sec.) 300
Backlog 299
Estimated completion 300
Forms 299
Images 299
License 298
NonForms 300
Stations running 300
Statistics collection 299
Time to complete 300
Workflow 298
Global System
Export tab 124
General tab 119

•
•
374 ••
•
•

Image Storage tab 122
Read Only tab 125
Resource Checker tab 126

H
Hardware requirements
Server 42
Horizontal offset 138
Horizontal shrink 138

I
IDOL 32
Image extraction tolerance 142
Image management options 206
Image preprocessing 241
Image Storage tab 122
Backup directory 123
Image Zone format 123
Internal storage format 122
JPEG compression quality 123
NonForm image directory 123
Save without processing 124
Image Zone fill threshold 142
Image Zone format 123
Installation 39, 49
Network protocols 46
Network requirements 45
Permissions 47
Installing on your Server 39, 49
Intelligent Classification Server 50
Internal storage format 122
Internet Information Server 43

J
Job Configuration 241
JPEG compression quality 123

L
LDAP 46
License codes 75

TeleForm Administration Guide

M

License information 76
License Manager 76
License statistics 300
Licensed Modules 76
Licenses 241
Load engines at startup 136
Local System tab 242
Disable audible alerts 129
Disable fax capabilities 129
Form cache size 129
ODBC connection cache size 129
Location lattice 143
Lock timeout 120
Logging 156
Logging in 111
Logging off 112
Look-alike characters 217
Low confidence character 143

M
Mapped Drive 55
Mapped Drives 47, 53
Mapping fields 125
Mark all forms for review 143
Mark fill adjustment 142
Mark fill high threshold 142
Mark fill low threshold 142
Mark fill maximum threshold 143
Mark size tolerance 143
Maximum enabled forms 138
Maximum field name length 125
Maximum users per batch 153
Merge/Print tab 243
Batch merging 151
Enable merges 150
Enable printing and sending 150
High speed merge 150
Priority based queuing 151
Minimal tracking 120, 232
Minimum VARCHAR length 125
Missing page batch commit 136
Missing page export 136

TeleForm Administration Guide

Modules 224
Licensed 76
Multi-page form handling 145

N
Network cabling 45
Network connection 170
Network protocols 46
Network requirements 45
Non-batch export 136
NonForm image directory 123
NonForm image handling 146
Attach to adjacent forms 146
Do not save 146
Print if not attached 147
Save adjacent pages together 146
Save each page separately 146
Save unattached 147

O
OCR recognition 144
ODBC connection cache size 129
OMR recognition 142
Operating rights 47
Optimizing form design 278
Optimizing system performance 251

P
Page link rule 145
All characters match, best guess OK 145
All characters match, evaluated OK 145
High confidence characters must match 145
Only link forms with page link and/or user ID
fields 146
Only link pages that are in same image or scan
146
Print forms with missing pages 146
Password
For TeleForm modules 112
Permissions
Installation 47

•
•
• 375
•
•
•

Index

Priority based queuing 151
Protocols 46
Purge Log 241, 252
Purging
Batches 255
Image Zone files 257
Statistics 255
Stored images 255

R
Read Only tab 125
Reader
Service 224
Reader - General tab 148
Collect NonForm identification information 149
Collect Reader field statistics 148
Collect Reader statistics 148
Distribute all evaluations (file/evaluate) 149
Evaluation override format 149
Leave NonForm faxes in the fax queue 149
Reader - Identification tab 137
Enable NCS style forms 139
Evaluate all forms as 140
Evaluate NonForms as 140
Existing/VersiForm confidence 137
Max reference marks per quadrant 139
Maximum enabled forms 138
Minimum bars (NCS style forms) 139
Offset 138
Reference mark tolerance 139
Shrink factor 138
Use dropin identification 139
Reader - Image Handling tab 144
NonForm image handling 146
Page link rule 145
Reader - Local tab 135
Batch commit 136
Batch page link 136
Display all evaluation zones 136
Distribution 136
Evaluation/Identification 135
Load engines at startup 136

•
•
376 ••
•
•

Missing page batch commit 136
Missing page export 136
Non-batch export 136
Reader - OCR Performance tab 144
Reader - Recognition tab 140
Best guess threshold 141
Character extraction tolerance 142
Character recognition 141
Confidence threshold 141
Constrained print fill threshold 141
Disable single line extraction 142
Image extraction tolerance 142
Image Zone fill threshold 142
Location lattice use 143
Low confidence character 143
Mark all forms for review 143
Mark fill adjustment 142
Mark fill high 142
Mark fill low 142
Mark fill maximum threshold 143
Mark size tolerance 143
OMR recognition 142
Skip blank constrained print fields and Image
Zones 142
Reader chart 282
Reader Identification tab
Check for flipped forms 139
Reader settings 241
Reader station statistics 301
Avg. Time 302
Images 302
Need review 303
NonForm 303
Station 302
Reader statistics 280
Reader Status
Evaluate 248
Idle 248
Stalled 248
Reader tab 243
Recognition Set 241
Remote Batch Directory 198

TeleForm Administration Guide

S

Remote batch directory 171
Remote batch setup 174, 191
Remote settings 172
Resource Checker tab 126
Check every _ seconds 128
Disk level 128
Ignore 127
Memory level 128
Retry 128
Warn 127
Reviewing archived images 256
Revision Control 259– 276
Rights 47

S
Security 85, 241
Changing module password 112
Logging in 111
Logging off 112
Security Groups 106
Adding users 110
Creating 108
Server
Hardware requirements 42
Software requirements 42
Web 42
Services 224
Session Info 200
Settings
Security 85
Single Reader per batch 153
Software requirements
Server 42
Stall time 120
Station settings 242
Configuration Options tab 243
Designer tab 242
Local System tab 242
Merge/Print tab 243
Reader tab 243
Statistics
For individual fields 328

TeleForm Administration Guide

Purging 255
Reader statistics 234
Recommended settings 232
Verifier statistics 235
Status
Active 247
Evaluate 248
Idle 247
Stalled 247
Strict commit rule 125
Synchronization 172
Synchronization Directory 198
System maintenance 251
System throughput
Analyzing 295
Application level 301
Batch information 310, 312
Batch level 308
Capture Mode information 307
Character mode 308
Field Mode 306
Global statistics 297
Reports 313
User information 303
Workflow 299

T
TCP/IP 46
templates 34
Testing forms 278
Throughput statistics 296
Troubleshooting bad images 248

U
UNC Path 47, 54, 55
User settings 243

V
Verifier
Configuration settings 204
Correction options 206
•
•
• 377
•
•
•

Index

Customizing for Operators 203
Field Mode 305
Form Mode 304
Image management options 206
Keyboard options 207
Mode totals 303
Shortcut commands 207
Verifier charts 283
Verifier operator statistics 303
Verifier statistics 280, 286
Avg. Time 287
Chars (Char Mode) 304
Completed 286
Fields (Field Mode) 304
Form 286
Forms (Form Mode) 304, 305
Forms (Other Modes) 305
Forms / hr. 305
Mode % 305
Mode Time 305
Need review 287
Time to Complete 287
Total Time 305
User 304, 305
Workflow 283
Zones Capture Mode) 304
Vertical offset 138
Vertical shrink 138
Viewing form statistics 281
VMWare 41, 47

Time to Complete 288
Workstation Limits 43
WYSIWYG text options 120

X
XML templates 34

Z
Zone Mode
Statistics 307

W
Web Capture Administration 189
Web Capture Server 185
Web Server 42
Workflow 298
Workflow tab 283
Workload statistics 287
Avg. Time 288
Completed 288
Form 288
Need review 288

•
•
378 ••
•
•

TeleForm Administration Guide